Home

- Service, Support

1. i i ne f_ ne LEN AS lie N LEN fA MO Oy O lt SSS J C S A S Reserved holes Commissioning Manual 154 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 To cut a reserved hole proceed as follows 1 Prise the plastic ring with a slotted screwdriver or cut it off with a diagonal cutting nippers g Q 2 Cut the film off with a paper knife It is recommended to cut the center firstly then cut the film off right around the hole edge Paper knife A 4 MCP strips Inserting the MCP strips The MCP strips of the turning version are already pre assembled into the MCP If you are using the control system of milling version you need to take these pre defined insertion strips out firstly and then insert the MCP strips of the milling version delivered in MCP package into the MCP by yourself To insert the MCP strips follow the order shown as follows with reference to the marks M1 to M6 T1 to T6 on the strips T1 M1 T2 M2 T3 M3 T4 M4 T5 M5 T6 M6 D E m odorant i ciake E a ma Gra Ur oO E m a ag E E E C
2. Shielding plate Cable clamp FSB and FSC only Connectors e FSA 4 poppers FSB ESC 2 Sen User documen 1 Safety Instructions tation Drill patterns and outline dimensions Page 32 1 For more information about the different fame sizes see Section Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 17 Drive rating plate Drive name E i SINAMICS V70 Mains input INPUT 3AC 380 480V 1 5A 50 60Hz Motor output ale OUTPUT 3AC 0 inputV 1 2A 0 330Hz Rated motor power and IP protection class E i IP CLASS IP20 MOTOR 0 4kW FS 01 Order number 1P 6SL3210 5DE12 4UA0 Product serial number ae S ZVXXXXXXXXXXX Part number ae i SNC A5E03662004 FAT EC q Gece rew see SINAMICS Refer to user manual Made in China Siemens Numerical Control Ltd No 18 Siemens Rd Jiangning Dev Zone Nanjing 211100 PR C Explanation of drive order numbers Data position of the order 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 E N Order number sd number SE 3 2 4 Mains voltage 3 AC 380 V ina 480 V Motor output power S a a E S E E A a te Oww S l TT tt ft pow TT TT Tt fo fo f o pote TT Et fe de pews TT ft Ff pW ft oo oww TT de ft Components in the motor package Illustration Shaft height mm _ Stall torque Nm SI
3. O N A eee Hee ae F Sali MCP N J A leo A al a ee Oral I 94571 Thickness 2 to 5 A D Commissioning Manual 26 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Note Make sure there is enough space around the PPU and the MCP for tightening the screws in the control cabinet Note All vertical MCP versions share the same requirements for cut out dimensions and mounting clearance The illustration above takes the MCP with a reserved slot for the handwheel for example Note When mounting a horizontal PPU together with a vertical MCP or vice versa follow the requirement for the clearance between a vertical PPU and a vertical MCP shown above Outline dimensions mm PPU161 2 p jii Pe EEEE 5 y H iy FREEREEEEE SERRER 23 E E EEE HEA ie lt Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0B
4. Commissioning Manual 232 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 3 Operation symbols of PLC programming languages Special bit memory SM bit definition read only Special markers aang a a Rs B a E a E SM0 0 C T F N ae marker register can ae the Sneha pens of PLC i 0 5 seconds i 30 seconds i 30 seconds i i 0 5 seconds Variable access rights You can read only the designated area You can read and write the designated area Data format information BYTE INT WORD DINT DWORD REAL Note All of the empty fields in the user interface are reserved for Siemens and may neither be written to nor be evaluated Fields designated with 0 always have the value logical 0 If there is no data format information you can read or write to all the specified data formats Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 233 Signal of input and output Address Input Output Q Form bit 10 0 14 6 Q2 1 Q1 7 byte IB4 IB12 QB3 QB7 word IW2 IW4 QW0 QW6 double word ID2 ID8 QDO QD4 Accumulator Accumulator AC max 4 accumulators Form arithmetic accumulators ACO and AC1 logical accumulators AC2 and AC3 Flag register M bit byte word double word Commissioning Manual 234 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 W326 Counter Counter C Form condition of counter bit C3 C25 represents the comparison result of
5. etc Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 241 A 7 4 3 Subroutine 20 AUX_MCP machine auxiliary functions Purpose Subroutine 20 is used to call the Auxiliary function Subroutines AUX_LAMP AUX_CHIP and AUX_SAFETY_DOOR Local variable definition None Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 20 OME ALTA MCF EN A 1 4 4 Subroutine 21 AUX_LAMP working lamp Purpose Subroutine 21 is used to control working lamp and can be called in AUX_MCP One time pressing of the LAMP key activates the working lamp while double pressing de activates the working lamp Local variable definition Inputs BYTE BOOL Lamp on off key Outputs LampLED BOOL Lamp status LampOut BOOL Lamp output Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 21 OME AUX_LAMP EM 04nodef LamplED FM CK1 PoM_CK1 4qLampk LampOute 20 0 Commissioning Manual 242 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 4 5 Subroutine 22 AUX_SAFE_DOOR safety door Purpose Subroutine 22 is used to control the safety door and can be called in AUX_MCP Local variable definition Inputs BYTE BOOL Door control key IsDoorCls BOOL Signal door is closed M1_2 OpDoor BOOL Open door when M01 M02 is active Outputs Relevant PLC machine data No Description S 14512 16 2 Selection of safety door function 0 do not use 1 use 14512 16 3 Safety door function is activated by M01 M0
6. 3 Speed rpm 1FL6067 1AC6 Speed rpm 1FL6064 1AC6 Speed rpm 1FL6090 1AC6 Speed rpm 1FL6066 1AC6 Speed rpm 1FL6092 1AC6 400 VAC supply voltage A Continuous operating area B Short term operating area 380 VAC supply voltage Commissioning Manual 132 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Note 1 Continuous operating area is a series of states when a motor can operate continuously and safely The effective torque must be located in this area 2 Short term operating area is a series of states when a motor can operate in a short duration if its effective torque is smaller than the rated torque 3 For the motors with different rated and maximum speeds the output torque will decline at a faster rate after the speed exceeds the rated speed 4 The feature in short term operating area varies with power supply voltages 5 The continuous operating area becomes smaller and the voltage drop grows larger when the cables in the major loop exceed 20 meters 6 For 1FL6096 motors the maximum speed can be ensured when the line supply voltage is higher than 380 V Permissible radial and axial forces UW M Axial force When using for example helical toothed wheels as drive element in addition to the radial force there is also an axial force on the motor bearings For axial forces the spring loading of the bearings can be overcome so that the rotor moves corresponding to the axi
7. te Se Program Status ban Pause Program Status Chart Status B Data Block Status Single Read o Write All Symbol Table I PES ESTERS T S The blue color in the program editing window indicates the online connection status Network 1 turning or milling setting for the following program ohid O W550 Ea E Network 2 Initialization ohtd 1 PLO_ini Note Please confirm the Step 7 connection has been deactivated after the PLC commissioning is complete For how to deactivate this connection see Section Establishing a connection via the Ethernet interface Page 184 Commissioning Manual 202 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 2 PLC user interface This part describes the PLC interface signals and I O signals The PLC program exchanges information among the NCK HMI MCP and I O through the signals of the PLC interface and signals of the input and output cards MCP application program T a 52 SOEs O 5 er h OES uw W 2S Signal overview of the PLC interface DB1600 DBB2 DB1600 DBB1 DB1600 DBBO Alarm activation Alarm variables DB4500 DBB2 DB4500 DBB1 DB2700 DBB0 DB3100 DBB1_ DB3300 DBB1 DB4500 DEBO 582500 DBBO DB2600 DBB0 DB3000 DBB0 DB3200 DBB0 PLC si NCK Way selection Channel control ARNA R control signal signal signal parameter function DB1400 DBBO Can keep the da
8. Activation of alarm no 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000 Activation of alarm no 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008 Activation of alarm no 700023 700022 700021 700020 700019 700018 700017 700016 Activation of alarm no 700031 700030 700029 700028 700027 700026 700025 700024 Activation of alarm no 700039 700038 700037 700036 700035 700034 700033 700032 Activation of alarm no 700047 700046 700045 700044 700043 700042 700041 700040 Activation of alarm no 700127 700126 700125 700124 700123 700122 700121 700120 Variables for user alarms DB1600 Variables for user alarms r32 w32 ner PLC gt HMI interface Byte Bt7 Bite6 Bit5 Bit4 Bt3 Bit2 Bit4 Bito Variable for alarm 700000 Variable for alarm 700001 Variable for alarm 700002 wl DBD1500 Variable for alarm 700125 DBD1504 Variable for alarm 700126 DBD1508 Variable for alarm 700127 Active alarm response DB1600 Active alarm response r PLC gt HMI interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bit5_ pita Bits Bit2 itt Bito DB1600DBX3 000 0 axes Acknowledge Acknowledge PLC STOP EMERGENCY Feedrate Read in NC start POWER ON with disable all disable disable Commissioning Manual 208 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Alarm acknowledgement PLC gt HMI interface Byte Bt7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bt3 Bit2 Bit1 Bito aoo ooo o S S e e S S Aao o 3001 3
9. Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 71 5 6 T 72 Select desired languages you want to install Product languages Please select the language you want to install German lw English French Spanish italian W Chinese Attention not all products support all installation languages In this case the concemed products are installed in your default installation language Information on which products support these installation languages can be found in the readme Readme Back Cancel If you have installed an earlier version of a program un install the program first then start the installation again and select the required software from the list Programs Programs to be installed Contig Data 8080 Access Mubachine P2P PC Config Data 8080 ADVANCED W 04 06 01 01 002 af z PLC Frogramming Tool SINUCOM PCIN Mul achine Required B06 MB Available on C ef 2 GB Help Back Cancel During the installation various dialog boxes will appear Acknowledge the dialog boxes and enter and confirm the installation information where necessary Installing all the software packages will take approximately 30 minutes When the installation finishes shortcuts will be created on the desktop Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 5 2 Overview of PLC Programming Tool In order to edit the PLC program use PLC Programming Tool V3 2 4 or higher By using PLC Progra
10. Operand STEP 7 connect Format Value PLC Status PLC Progran Edit PLC status list progran list alarm txt 89 12 31 2615 02 26 Change You can enter an operand to view its status Use these softkeys to respectively increase and decrease the bit of the operand Operand Operand 200 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Change Delete all Pressing this softkey changes the value of the operand To delete all the entered operands press this softkey rr Status J SLE list ww A JOG 11111111 11111111 11111111 66660088 66660088 86660088 666600868 66660088 a66G0088 aon nuh WN SS O PLC Status status list 89 14 66 2615 62 26 R 7 WI QBA Window 1 Window 2 Cross OB1 SBR28 reference U hw NN eS we on nua wWN eS ra an You can view the status of a PLC signal By default three signal status lists inputs flags and outputs are displayed in three columns Edit pad Change You can change column sequence or assign a new signal status list variables with this softkey You can also change the status of a PLC signal via this softkey _ PLC Prc PLC gt program Ww AS AN JOG SIMATIC LAD MAIN COB1 Network 1 turning or milling setting for the following program SMO M255 0 im 69 15 61 2615 62 26 Progran stat OF Network 2 Initializatio
11. Read PLC Cancel You can alternatively call this dialog by right clicking the project name in the instruction tree and choosing from the context menu Iq Program Block G Select a desired target system from the drop down list in the dialog If an active communication has been established between PLC Programming Tool and the control system you can alternatively click the following button to read the information directly from the target system Read PLC 4 Click this button to exit the dialog Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 183 A 7 1 4 Establishing a connection between the control system and the PC Establishing a connection via the Ethernet interface You can establish a connection between the control system and a PC installed with PLC Programming Tool via the Ethernet interface The following Ethernet connections are possible e Direct connection direct connection between the control system and a PC e Network connection integrating the control system into an existing Ethernet network Establishing a direct connection Proceed through the following steps to establish a direct connection N 1 Connect the control system with the PC using an Ethernet cable Select the desired operating area on the PPU N Press this key to view the extended softkeys oO 4 Set up a direct connection on the control system through the following softkey operations AY Serv Service
12. a with brake K without brake K1 with brake Staltoraue eo o o o da a b A 202 5 15 69 5 235 5 235 5 196 Shaft height 65 mm with absolute encoder unit mm b without brake Center hole C type M8x16 NZ 8 0 036 eS ee ee eee IMiii iO a with brake K without brake K1 with brake Stalltorque k KA fa 205 5 15 69 5 304 5 265 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 oF Shaft height 90 mm with incremental encoder unit mm b without brake Center hole 61 with brake C type M12x25 Version with feather key 38 60 0 036 Stall torque C 189 5 l 210 5 22Nm 214 5 281 236 5 Shaft height 90 mm with absolute encoder unit mm b without brake Center hole C type M12x25 Version with feather key 38 60 0 036 Stalltorque kK a5Nm tom e o ae m a po a Commissioning Manual 38 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 3 3 2 Mounting the motor Personal injury and material damage Some motors especially the 1FL609 are heavy The excessive weight of the motor should be considered and any necessary assistance required for mounting should be sought Otherwise the motor can fall down during mounting This can result in serious personal injury or material damage NOTICE Damage to the motor If the liquid enters the motor the motor may be damaged During motor installation or operation make sure that no liquid water oil etc can p
13. 9 4 3 Creating the user cycle parameter file cccccccssecccceeeeccseececceeeeceeeecceaseecseueeessaeeeeseueeesseneessaaees 9 4 4 Creating the ser cycle file on cocccc dsdccicnapdudecadl dtuscsasenaseusnsenpeuandsdeldads dduacnaceadceseslanpebesmedesadedusssacceeenaas lanes 9 4 5 Creating the user Cycle alarm file cccceecccceececceseeccceececcauececceueeeceuseecseuseessaueeessuecesseueeessnseesaaees 9 4 6 Creating the user cycle bitmap file cc ceccccseecccceseeccceeeecceececseuseeceucecseaseecseuseesaseessegeeesseneessaeees 9 4 7 Transferring the desired files to the control system cccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeetsaeeeeess 9 4 8 Call the Created user cycle 2 0 0 ccc ccccccecccceeccceeeecaeeeeceeeeseeeesseeeeseeceseeceseeesseeeeseueeseeessueessaeeeseeesaeeensaees 9 4 9 Editing the user cycle SCIOCIS ossicles icccncccscececedenstansiscecasidamecasndasunaded castacagedanashdececasededewadeddedtanadusacceicenes 9 5 Loading machine manufacturer s MD description files ce ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaees 9 6 Loading machine manufacturer s R variable name files ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaees 10 FEC CANIC er r eee neem eee eee ee ee ere ee eee ee ee eee 10 1 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED vsctectesencracecneaneuestioceratesmecueheto aunceseneueentecsreConeeeueheteneatcaneceusaeterssetexereuees 10 2 SINAMICS V70 servo dri
14. A 7 4 33 Subroutines 34 to 36 57 and 61 Explanation Subroutines 34 to 36 57 and 61 are reserved for users A 7 4 34 Subroutine 62 Trg_key_OR Purpose Subroutine 62 is used for the spindle override control via three trigger user keys in the vertical MCP with the handwheel Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description WORD IncS_Key BOOL Increase key of spindle override Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 275 Outputs Name iT ype SSC Description S LED1_S BOOL Lights spindle override lt 100 flashing 50 LED2_S BOOL Lights spindle override 100 LED3_S BOOL Lights spindle override 105 115 flashing 120 Assigned global variables SP_OV_Switch BYTE MB202 Spindle override switch buffer USB_MCP_SP_OV BYTE MB209 USB MCP single spindle override Relevant PLC machine data No Unit Range Description S 14510 15 0 5sto3 Spindle override 50 key holding on time defined S 14510 16 0 1sto3 Spindle override 100 key holding on time defined S 14512 20 Bit 0 Grey coded switch 0 spindle override controlled by the grey mode 1 spindle override controlled by trigger user keys Bit 5 define the spindle override startup value 0 the startup spindle override is always 100 1 recode the spindle override value of the last machine turn off for the next startup Bit 6 7 define the spindle override shift speed e bit6 0 bit7 0 Standard speed The steps are 50
15. Configuring Drive Bus addresses Page 78 The following steps are also applicable to configuring the feed axes or the analog spindle if necessary Operating sequence SYSTEM Hy A SHIFT ALARM Drive 2 systern Start 3 config Aly l Hotor 5 config 6 ra Select 8 Finish Pi 9 OK 152 Select the desired operating area on the PPU Press this horizontal softkey to open the window for drive configuration Press this softkey and the control system starts to identify the drives and motors connected After the identification finishes a drive list with motor information displays on the screen for example Axis Drive Hotor HAL 11 ID 16669 6 4KU 1 3A S666U min Without brake HZ1 13 1D 1808 4KW 1 3A 3806U min Without brake HSP1 Analog Custom e Note For a motor with an absolute encoder the motor ID can be identified automatically For a motor with an incremental encoder however you must configure it manually Select the additional axis using the cursor keys Press this softkey to enter the motor configuration window Select the right motor ID according to the motor rating plate with the cursor keys Note For a motor with an incremental encoder in this example you need to select the right motor ID according to the motor rating plate Axis HCI Drive 15 Hotor ID Power Current Speed Brake typ 19 8 4Ku 1 3A 3H68U min With brake
16. Flange Brake connector Oil seal A Oil seal B Motor with incremental encoder 58 Communication LED X9 Encoder Terminal door X10 Drive Bus X6 Safe torque off connector X6 Control power connector X7 Holding brake connector X11 Drive Bus interface interface bsolute encoder connector Motor with absolute encoder Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 2 1 Main circuit wiring 4 2 1 1 Main circuit interfaces Main circuit interfaces drive side Illustration Signal Description Line supply input inter i Line phase L1 3 phase 380 VAC to 480 VAC i Line phase L2 face S Ka rey Line phase L3 x Motor phase U Connects to the SIMOTICS S Motor phase V 1FL6 motor Motor phase W La ain Motor power interface T haa DK WD Internal external braking resistor interface Digitally controlled DCP is connected to R2 at the potentiometer factory DCP Resistor 2 R2 Resistor 1 R1 TAD OD RESISTOR J U IIN C m a BS RESISTOR Grounding connector For connecting the power supply grounding connector and the servo motor grounding connector Maximum cable cross section 2 5 mm2 1 The screw type for FSB and FSC is M4 and the recommended tightening torque is 2 25 Nm 2 The screw type for FSA is M2 5 and the recommended tightening torque is 0 4 Nm to 0 5 Nm Main circuit interface motor side llustration S
17. Parameters with index Some parameters have several indices Each index has its own meaning and corresponding value Parameters without index All parameters that do not have indices are parameters without index Editing parameters You can edit a parameter value in two methods e Method 1 change the value directly with the UP or DOWN button e Method 2 move the cursor to a digit with the SHIFT button then change the digit value with the UP or DOWN button Commissioning Manual 142 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 If you change a parameter value with method 1 proceed as follows Operating display If abort the change G aff 7 mh Target parameter Default value Desired value a 3 Lo oS Long press cael E Flash for around 15s For more information see Section Jog test Page 75 To change a parameter value digit by digit proceed as follows Operating display 5 of F Target parameter Default value Desired value Long press E L mo eE M er Flash for around 15 s Note You cannot change parameters p1414 and p1656 with the SHIFT button Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 143 Viewing parameters If a parameter has no index view its value as follows Operating display If a parameter has indices view its value as follows Operating display A 1 3 5 Auxiliary functions Seven BOP functions in total are available Functions Fund Q Set Drive Bu
18. Press this softkey to confirm your selection The selected motor information then displays in the drive list After you finish the configuration press this softkey to save the configuration results on both CNC and drive Note The control system restarts after you press this softkey Press this softkey when the following dialog appears to exit the drive configuration window The drive and motor configuration have D finished completely Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 2 4 Tuning drive performance The control system provides facilities to tune the drive performance for the additional axis by automatically modifying the control loop parameters The tuning is performed based on frequency response measurements of the dynamic response of the machine The following steps are also applicable to tuning the feed axes if necessary Operating sequence N 1 Select the desired operating area on the PPU SHIFT ALARM Tuni 2 Press this horizontal softkey to open the window for drive tuning uning a test ae 3 Switch to JOG mode Note that the drive tuning can be performed in JOG mode only UL JOG A uM 4 Select the additional axis using the cursor keys 5 Press this softkey to enter the window for selecting the tuning options Options 6 Use this key to select a desired tuning objective and measurement and interpolation options for the additional axis For more information
19. Shielded encoder cable grounding When making an encoder cable you should strip the outer insulation sheath for a maximum distance of 3 cm and connect the cable shield to ground as shown in the following figure O 0 Max 3cm 10 to 20 cm Cable shield Drive side 4 2 5 Connecting an external braking resistor DCP R1 The SINAMICS V70 has been designed with an internal braking resistor to absorb regenerative energy from the motor When the internal braking resistor cannot meet the braking requirements you can connect an external braking resistor For more information about the selection of braking resistors see Section Options Page 22 Connecting an external braking resistor NOTICE Damage to the drive Before connecting an external resistor to DCP and R1 remove the connection between terminals DCP and R2 otherwise the drive may be damaged Connect the external braking resistor as follows SINAMICS V70 External braking resistor Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 65 4 3 System connection overview 4 3 1 Connecting the CNC controller PPU 160 2 161 2 SINAMICS V70 SINAMICS V70 Drive Bus SINAMICS V70 SINAMICS V70 Inverter or servo spindle drive Spindle pindo enegder Electronic Handwheel handwheel 1 Electronic handw
20. i Desktop a ji SINUMERIK 8 vee ult 8080 Commissic Once the remote control has been started a monitoring window opens showing the HMI screen contents of the connected control system You can find a Fs symbol in the tip area of the HMI screen 3 Closing the monitoring window or selecting from the main window menu as follows stops the re mote control Save as picture Pest h ri hed RD mpf a a i FELE Bookmarks 5 inet H E a Bs z a Wiel Vlad E Nit 1e i ve F LF k Edit View Connection r i j ee ee ee File eee xE a 4 B Stop N oz Save as picture ESL J a SINUMERIK8 T WIZARD mpf oa d 808D_Commissic Commissioning Manual 292 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 8 3 1 Operating the HMI via remote control If the remote control has been started you can use your mouse to operate the HMI by clicking on the softkeys displayed in the monitoring window 808D Remote Control lo AS ea 14 46 17 REEPOINT 2414 86 36 Service axis Following error nn Systen deviation nn Contour deviation Caxial mm Servo gain factor calc 1866 min Active measuring systen Position act val meas systen 1 Position setpoint Abs conpens value meas system 1 Compensation sag temperature Speed actual value to max speed Speed setpoint to max speed Spindle speed setpoint prog Spindle speed setpoin
21. re S ne E MENEREN 7 L1 1 AC 220 V OL1 1 AC 220 V i LON devices LON devices ae Es I SPANDANPANDAND PECETE Neutral N busbar l Ground Ground Note that the PE PEN busbar in the cabinet must connect to the ground through a grounding cable with a cross section 2 10 mm as illustrated below PE PEN busbar in the cabinet Grounding conductor copper bar recommended Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 15 2 2 PPU and MCP Components in the panel processing unit PPU package Quantity pieces Illustration Order number PPU 1 Horizontal awe Turning 6 C5370 2AT02 0AA0 English PPU161 2 PP variant 6FC5370 2AT02 0CA0 Chinese U160 2 PPU161 2 nean an i TE Milling 6FC5370 2AM02 0AA0 English 6FC5370 2AM02 0CA0 Chinese Vertical vari Turning 6FC5370 2BT02 0AA0 English ant 6FC5370 2BT02 0CA0 Chinese HOO HEO KRDA gaon Bao A opnan OBS AGLA OGG a BODOG HOE ARA BEES BoB PHE 6FC5370 2BM02 0CA0 Chinese PPU160 2 7 a Milling 6FC5370 2BM02 0AA0 English Drive Bus ter 6FC5548 0BA21 OAA0 minator Mounting e PPU161 2 8 clamps with e PPU160 2 10 amp screws Connectors e O connectors 7 e 24V power input connector 1 User documen 1 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Operating and Programming Turning Chinese tation SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Operating and Programming Milling Chinese Components in the machine control panel MCP package es M
22. 3 Fix the cables Cable clamp Grounding lug Cable shield Commissioning Manual 68 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Danger to life due to fire or electric shock when using unsuitable residual current protection devices The drive can cause a current to flow in the protective conductor This current can cause the residual current device RCD or residual current monitoring RCM to incorrectly trip nuisance trip In the case of a fault ground fault the fault current can contain a DC component which prevents the RCD RCM from tripping with the risk of subsequent fault or electric shock Use only the type B RCD in the supply system for the SINAMICS V70 drive 7 Noy ers Death or severe personal injury from electrical shock The earth leakage current for the drive can be greater than AC 3 5 mA which may cause death or severe personal injury due to electrical shock A fixed earth connection is required to eliminate the dangerous leakage current In addition the minimum size of the protective earth conductor shall comply with the local safety regulations for high leakage current equipment Adjusting cable orientations from the motor side From the motor side you can adjust the orientation of the power cable encoder cable and brake cable to facilitate cable connection Note Before adjusting the power cable orientation keep this part loosely tightened Rotate the screw rings clockwise to Rotate the conn
23. Commissioning Manual 86 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Commissioning status You can check the commissioning status via the status symbols from the main screens of the commissioning wizards Status symbol Meaning S Commissioning diagram The diagram below shows the general commissioning procedure for the NC START Commissioning the machine with the default PLC application Commissioning the NC Data backup Production archive Start up archive for the prototype 2 NC data compensation Data backup Start up archive back up to USB Original status archive for delivery A Commissioning the prototype machine Series production Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 87 7 Commissioning the prototype machine Note The control system constantly creates restoring points during operation In case of data loss due to power failure or other problems the control system automatically restores the last autosaved system data upon startup with an alarm appearing on the screen Overview of commissioning procedure The following shows you the basic commissioning procedure for prototype machines using the sample PLC Step 1 gt Checking the scope of delivery Page 13 Step 2 gt Mounting Page 2 Step3 gt Wiring Page 41 Step 4 gt Pag Step 5 gt Pag Step 6 gt ivati i Pagelen Step 7 gt Page 8 Step 8 gt 1 1 Commissioning the PLC 7 1 1 Setting PLC related parameters Use either o
24. Fault reactions The following fault reactions are defined NONE No reaction when a fault occurs OFF 1 Servo motor ramps down to stop OFF2 Servo motor coasts down to stop OFF3 Servo motor stops quickly emergency stop ENCODER Encoder fault causes OFF2 Fault acknowledgements The acknowledgement methods for faults are specified as follows Acknowledgement POWER ON The fault is acknowledged by a POWER ON switch servo drive off and on again NOTE If this action has not eliminated the fault cause the fault is displayed again immediately after power on IMMEDIATELY Faults disappear immediately after the fault causes have been eliminated NOTE e These faults can also be acknowledged by a POWER ON operation e If this action has not eliminated the fault cause the fault will continue to be displayed after acknowledgment PULSE INHIBIT The fault can only be acknowledged with a pulse inhibit The same options are available for acknowledging as described under acknowledgment with IMMEDIATELY A 6 2 2 List of faults and alarms This section lists common faults and alarms that may occur on the SINAMICS V70 Fault list F1000 Internal software An internal software error has occurred Evaluate fault buffer error Carry out a POWER ON power off on for Reaction OFF2 all components Acknowledgement POWER Upgrade firmware to later version ON Contact the Hotline Replace the Control Unit F1001 Floating
25. Improper firmware files will cause update failure When the update fails the RDY indicator flashes red at 2 Hz and the COM indicator becomes red on An update failure is probably caused by improper firmware files or files missing e lf the firmware files on the SD card are corrupt the servo drive cannot start up after power on e lf the firmware on the SD card is the same with the current firmware of the servo drive only a restart is performed When a failure occurs try to update the firmware again using proper firmware files If the failure persists contact your local distributor Note Update the firmware by restarting the drive After inserting the SD card with proper firmware files you can also update the firmware by restarting the drive A 1 4 Status indicators Status LEDs on the SINAMICS V70 drive Two LED status indicators RDY and COM are available to indicate drive readiness status and communication status respectively Pee ee ee ee ee eB ee ee ee ee eS X E Off eee ei ee ee eee Green Off i Flashing red l E Slow flashing i M Red i E Fast flashing l L E Red SIEMENS _ RDY COM Commissioning Manual 148 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 You can find detailed information about the status indications in the table below Status indicator Color Stats Description RDY for 24V control board power supply is missing ange an interval of 0 5 s for Communication with CNC is no
26. Negative RxD TxD of Drive Bus 2 2 ee O y 3 PB Positive RxD TxD of Drive Bus o ooo 5 PB_RTS_ _ Requesttosend oS prve PUS e fms ermua S Connecting Drive Bus interfaces on the SINAMICS V70 X10 X11 Illustration Pin No Signal Description S 1 JA Differential signal A P5PB Bo Differential signal B NC Notassigned Cci ro Commissioning Manual 50 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Connecting example The Drive Bus terminator must be installed on the last Drive Bus interface Drive Bus terminator Drive Bus Drive Bus Drive Bus Drive Bus cable Drive Bus cable Drive Bus cable Drive Bus cable Drive Bus trailing cable trailing cable trailing cable trailing cable SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED PPU SINAMICS V70 SINAMICS SINAMICS SINAMICS V70 V70 V70 Note You must install the Drive Bus terminator that ships with the PPU on X11 of the last servo drive otherwise the servo system cannot work properly 4 1 7 Analog spindle interface X54 spindle encoder interface X60 Interface X54 is for connecting the PPU to the inverter or servo spindle drive Interface X60 is for connecting the PPU to the spindle encoder Pin assignment X54 Type Sub D 9 pin female Cable Max length 10 m illustration Pin Signal__ Comment S a AO Analogvoltage o not assigned notassigned o ee electrically o X54 Analog drive enable contact electrically isolated n o contact Commissioni
27. Program Delete Delete Read in Federate override erse over ty limiting level abort number of distance disable disable active 3 ride active subroutine to go cycles NC stop at NC start NC start block limit disable Activate machine related protection zone Activate machine related protection zone po te t0 Are Suppress NC stop start lock axes plus spindle 10 Activate channel specific protection zone 11 Activate channel specific protection zone po rea to Area Do not Deactivate Activate fixed feedrate counter Commissioning Manual 218 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 block tool No tool Activate Negative Simulate Activate contour handwheel bit binary change associated direction for contour coded commands M01 contour handwheel handwheel 1 simulation Invert con tour hand wheel direction Program branches GOTOS 1 Select single block type selection using the softkey 2 31 positions Gray code Controls signals to axes in Work DB3200 Signals to NCK channel r w PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit4 Bito 1000 Axis 1 in Work Traversing keys keys Rapid trav Traversing Feedrate Activate handwheel eo a coded Plus Minus erse over key dis stop ride tance disa ble Axis 1 in Work Machine function 2 Continuous Var INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC i 1002 1003 ee Handwhee
28. function of safety door milling when the function of safety door is active it can be triggered by M01 M02 milling handwheel assignment with the MCP HMI 14512 17 turret turning tool magazine milling clamping function turning tail stock function turning selection between handwheel and hand held unit 0 handwheel 1 hand held unit 14512 18 Special configurations for machines Bit 2 automatic lubrication at power on Bit 4 external signal for spindle stop Bit 5 fixed spindle direction Bit 6 the hardware limit is independent from a PLC program Bit 7 each feed axis has a hardware limit switch activated when Bit 6 0 14512 19 Bit 1 function of spindle braking Bit 2 password clearing by power on 0 delete the password 1 do not delete the password Bit 7 manual machine function this function becomes active if you have installed licensed turning machine system and called it with a PLC subroutine 14512 20 Bit 0 grey coded switch 0 spindle override controlled by the grey code 1 spindle override con trolled by triggering user keys Bit 1 spindle disable mode 0 disable by pressing the spindle stop key 1 disable when detecting the standstill speed 1 Bit 2 activate the first additional axis 0 disable the additional axis control 1 enable the addition al axis control Bit 3 the first additional axis as the second spindle and does not need to be kept enabled 1 as the second spindle and does not need to be
29. gagp T Press this softkey to enter the main screen of HMI data data Start up archive Oo EQNCK PLC data File for license key 8 Enter the folder related to HMI data y 9 Navigate to the folder highlighted as follows Hane Type Length Date E Customized bitmaps User cycle files D EasysLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnp Q Extended user text file falme txt C70EM HD description file md_descr txt Cj0EM manual Coemmanual pdf3 CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt Oo C70EH R variable name file rparan_name txt C7Service planner task name file svc_tasks txt a 10 Press this key to open the folder 11 Paste the copied language folders with this softkey Paste 12 Press this key combination to play the slide show CTRL D FN P Note You can set the time interval between slides using MD9001 TIME_BTWEEN_SLIDES This parameter can be found through the following operations SYSTEM AN N Tanl Hach Expert Display SHIFT ALARM gt MD data list gt HD es For languages rather than Simplified Chinese and English name the folder containing slide show files with the corresponding abbreviations For more information see Section Loading system languages Page 85 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 109 9 2 Defining the service planner With the service planning function you can specify the service timer and define your own serv
30. password Note Clear the password before the machine is delivered otherwise end users can start the controller with the standard data which can initialize the control system As a consequence the machine will not run 6 5 Setting the date and time At delivery the system date and time remain at the factory settings and thus you must manually modify the date and time Operating sequence A N 1 Select the desired operating area on the PPU SHIFT ALARM 2 Open the date and time setting window through the following softkey operations me PF cine 3 Enter the date and time in the specified format Current 2064 07 61 61 59 23 Format YYYY MM DD HH HH S5 Hew 2015 702Z ZBZ i4 56 E f 4 Press this softkey to confirm your settings OK Commissioning Manual 82 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 6 6 Activating the optional functions The following optional functions can be purchased for the control system e Additional axes e Contour handwheel e Bidirectional leadscrew error compensation Manual Machine Plus for turning variant only Transmit Tracyl Gantry BASIC To use a purchased option you must first activate it with a license key on the control system Note The control system supports up to two additional axes for the turning variant and one for the milling variant After you purchase the desired option s you can obtain the corresponding license key from the Web License Manager For more information a
31. s03 S S S S T S Signals to technology functions DB3800 Signals to axis spindle r w 3803 PLC gt NCK interface Bye Bt7 Bite Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Bt4 Bito 5000 Torque equalization controller on 5001 eee 5002 5003 Stop a 5004 5005 Ct r t g o a oo 5006 spin i Automatic Setpoint direction of rota Spindle dle positioning gear stage tion stop change Counter Clockwise clockwise Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 225 5007 cou synchro nism over 5008 SISI TECH 5009 SISI TECH 5010 sou a Signals from axis spindle General signals from axis spindle DB3900 Signals from axis spindle r 3903 NCK gt PLC e Byte Bit7 Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Bitt Bito me Referenced Encoder limit freq ex Spindle no ceeded i Rantoul exact With exact Synchro Synchro stop fine stop nized 2 nized 1 coarse Current Speed Position Axis spindle Followup Axis ready Traversing controller controller controller stationary mode ac for opera requests active active active N lt Mmm tive Force fixed Fixed stop Activate Measure Handwheel stop limited reached travel to ment active override fixed stop i AxStop active Travel GA Handwheel active bit binary coded a a E Active machine function Continuous Var INC 10000INC 1000INC 100INC 101NC 1 INC Contour handwhe
32. 10 ms max delay 5 min Ki_1 Ki_6 BOOL Input of hold switch 1 input of hold switch 6 Ki_7 Ki_8 BOOL Inputs of delay switches 7 and 8 Outputs Name Type Cd Description S Ko_1 Ko_8 BOOL Output of switch 1 output of switch 8 Assigned global variables K1ist1 K8st1 MB245 State 1 of the hold switch K1st2 K8st2 MB246 State 2 of the hold switch K1on K8on MB247 On state of the hold switch Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 63 OME TOGGLES Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 217 A 7 5 PLC alarms Diagnosing of the machine is important Complete diagnosis of the external electrics can help users understand the cause and location of breakdown immediately 8 2 amp Ji T amp O Q i g Cooling Q pump motor 8 a Q as Q gt 8 A S Protective door lock 8 Cooling motor thermal protecion Cooling liquid level detection Cooling pipe pressure test User alarms in the PLC subroutines System provides users with 128 PLC user alarms Every user alarm has a corresponding NCK address bit DB1600 DBX0 0 to DB1600 DBX15 7 The address bit 1 can activate the corresponding alarm and reset 0 can cancel the alarm In the PLC cross reference you can find the reason for the PLC alarm through looking up reference addresses to make the corresponding modification Some user alarms are activated in a subroutine In
33. 35110 1 5 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO rom 1 500 Maximum speed for gear stage change 2 1000 3 2000 4 4000 5 8000 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO rom 1 50 Minimum speed for gear stage change 2 400 3 800 4 1500 5 3000 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT rpm 1 500 Maximum speed of gear stage 2 1000 3 2000 4 4000 5 8000 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT rpm Minimum speed of gear stage lt gt 34220 0 ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO 34230 0 ENC_SERIAL_NUMBER 35120 1 5 35130 1 5 35140 1 5 36200 1 5 AX_VELO_LIMIT rom 31944 Threshold value for velocity monitoring 36300 0 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT Hz 333000 Encoder limit frequency Motor rated velocity 60 x Encoder resolution Commissioning Manual 8 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 ce 7 4 Creating series archives Creating series startup archives is a prerequisite for series machine commissioning The series startup archives contain data from the prototype machine commissioning which bring the series machine to the same state gt ens B9 45 50 REEPOINT 2015 02 09 Last Set spindle parameters Create ser Next Set SW limit start up archive Archive creator MAX MUSTERMAN Create Archive version 8 1 archive Machine type Turning machine Comment My archive Archive content Production data archive Creation date 2015702709 This step creates a series start up archive which includes Machine and setting data
34. 5 Use the cursor keys to select the following option to restore a start up archive ALY Create series start up archive Create start up archive Create start up archive in the default directory J 6 Press this softkey to confirm and the file opening dialog appears OK 7 Select the USB folder and press this key to enter it Start up archive E 0EM files Oo CjUser files J 8 Navigate to the system language file you desire to load and press this softkey to confirm OK Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 85 J 9 Press this softkey to confirm the archive information and then the following message appears OK Do you want to read in start up data Hotes Please block all enablest After the read in the control is booted as usualt Ta 10 Press this softkey to confirm and start loading the archive The control system restarts to com OK plete restoring the system language archive 11 Power off on the control system to activate the loaded language Then you can find the new language and select it through the following operations oN Change o A gt language 6 8 Overview on commissioning and operation wizards The control system has two commissioning wizards and one operation wizard e The commissioning wizards require a manufacturer access level They are designed to help you commission the basic machine tool functions on the prototype machine and series machines e The operation wiza
35. Activates the modified values O Proceeds to the next step Resets the value of the selected parameter to default Axis specific parameters No Name Unit Range Description 30130 0 CTRLOUT_TYPE JOto3 Output type of setpoint 30240 0 ENC_TYPE JOto5 Encoder type aa ENC_RESOL i ae Encoder lines per revolution 31030 LEADSCREW_PITCH mm 20 Pitch of leadscrew 31050 0 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 1 to 2147000000 Number of the gearbox teeth at drive end de nominator of the deceleration ratio Commissioning Manual 94 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 No Name Unit Range Description S 31060 0 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA 1 to 2147000000 Number of the gearbox teeth at leadscrew end numerator of the deceleration ratio 32000 MAX_AX_VELO mm min Maximum axis velocity 32010 JOG_VELO_RAPID mmimin Rapid traverse in jog mode 32020 JOG_VELO mm min Jog axis velocity 32100 AX_MOTION_DIR 1 to 1 Traversing direction not control direction e 1 Motor runs clockwise e 1 Motor runs counter clockwise 32260 0 RATED_VELO rpm fo Rated motor speed 34200 0 ENC_REFP_MODE 0to8 Referencing mode 36200 0 AX_VELO_LIMIT mm min Threshold value for velocity monitoring 36300 0 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT Hz Encoder limit frequency Motor rated veloci ty 60 x Encoder resolution Note The value of MD36200 should be 10 higher than that of MD32000 otherwise alarm 025030 occurs 7 3 2 C
36. Bito 1000 1008 1009 1010 Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 1011 Setting mask for NCK outputs Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 DB2800 Signals at fast inputs and outputs r w PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 _ Bite Bit5 _ Bit4 Bt Bit2 Bit4 Bito 1000 Block external digital NCK inputs Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9 1001 Value from PLC for external digit NCK inputs Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9 1008 Block external digital NCK outputs Commissioning Manual 216 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Output 16 Output15 Output 14 Output13 Output12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9 1009 Overwrite mask for external digital NCK outputs Output 16 Output15 Output 14 Output13 Output12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9 1010 1011 Signals from fast inputs and outputs DB2900 Signals from the fast inputs and outputs r PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit1 Bito Actual value for digital NCK inputs input 3 input2 inputi ee ees ce es Genres Genes es E Setpoint for digital NCK outputs Pp Output DB2900 Signals from fast inputs and outputs r NCK gt PLC interface Byte s Bit7 s Bite Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 itt Bito 1000 Actual value for external digital NCK i
37. Each scan SM0 0 HANDWHL SBR39 Selecting a hand wheel through the interface signal DBB1900 DBB1xxx Each scan SMO 0 AXIS_CTL SBR40 Coordinate enabling control hardware limit etc Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 283 Call Conditions Subroutine Name Each scan SM0 0 SPINDLE SBR42 Spindle control Each scan SM0 0 COOLING SBR44 Cooling control Each scan SM0 0 TURRET1 SBR46 HALL effect device turret control Each scan SMO 0 ServPlan SBR48 Maintenance plan example first task Setting the relevant PLC machine data 14512 17 Turret function Clamping function Tailstock function Selection between handwheel and hand held unit 0 handwheel 1 hand held unit 14512 18 One time automatic lubrication after the power on External signal for spindle stop Fixing the direction of a spindle Hardware limit is independent of the PLC application One hardware limit triggered per axis enabled when bit 6 0 14512 19 Function of spindle braking Bit2 2 Password clearing by power on 0 delete the password 1 do not delete the password Bit 7 MM Manual Machine Plus function enabled when the MM has been licensed and soled ae PLC subroutine has been called 14512 20 Spindle disable mode A 7 6 2 PLC sample application milling This sample application is applicable to machines with the following configurations e Three axes axes X Y and Z with a hardware limit switch respectively in the posit
38. Operation temperature C 25 to 80 Shielding Minimum bending radius static 6 x outer diameter mm Minimum bending radius dynamic 155 mm Commissioning Manual 134 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A Appendix A 1 Operation and display A 1 1 Elements on the PPU The PPU for the control system is available in the following variants Panel layout Applicable control system PPU161 2 Horizontal English version SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T turning M milling Horizontal Chinese version PPU160 2 Vertical English version SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T turning M milling Vertical Chinese version Horizontal panel layout PPU161 2 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANC POK POY TEMP OoOoOr goo Hag Boao ogag Deo aoe GPOO oee ARE B0B i 1 SIELA E Q m p EES TEE EEn ee oe OFoof vie MOE Ap V Vertical panel layout PPU160 2 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCEDT Poc ror raup see Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 135 Elements on the PPU front The following illustration uses PPU161 2 as an example to show control elements available on the PPU SINUMERIK 808D POK ROY TEMP ADVANCED T gopor agg Y v Q gag A r agga ngao Deun TIT aang X EEE oa Te A HHHH Ee mens aas Vertical and horizontal softkeys Calls specific menu functions Return key Returns to the next higher level menu Menu extension key Opens the next lower level menu Alphabetic and numeric keys Co
39. Relevant PLC machine data No Value Description S 14512 16 7 Handwheel assignment with the HMI co 1 Handwheel assignment with the MCP Example for calling subroutine 39 HHL_ACT HANDY AL i EM Commissioning Manual 248 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 4 13 Subroutine 40 AXIS_CTL controlling the spindle and axes Purpose Subroutine 40 is used to control the drive pulse enable DB380xDBX4001 7 and controller enable DB380xDBX2 1 monitoring the hardware limits and the reference cam signals and controlling the enable signal for the spindle according to a spindle command for example SPINDLE CW SPINDLE CCW M03 M04 SPOS etc The motor brake is automatically controlled by the SINAMICS V70 drives This subroutine provides two ways to realize the hardware limit control e PLC solution MD14512 18 bit 6 0 Each feed axis has one MD14512 18 bit 7 1 or two MD14512 18 bit 7 0 hardware limit switches This subroutine activates the NCK hardware limit function via the NCK interface DB380xDBX1000 0 or DB380xDBX1000 1 according to the configurations of the hardware limit switches and thus makes the NCK produce a feed stop signal to an over distance axis Furthermore you can also connect the output OVImt of this subroutine with the input HWL_ON of subroutine 33 to activate the Emergency Stop automatically once the hardware limit of any axis has been reached e Hardware solution MD14512 18 bit 6 1 This so
40. i SINAMICS V70 servo drive I I a Puse aronit breaker l SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED option I I I l k imi l e Drive Bus cable Drive Bus trailing cable I Ji 1 Q amp S 1 CURAR Line filter option l 0 I i l l ge o P Braking resistor option ab M Absorbs excess regenerative n energy in the DC link when the i 24 VDC power supply capacity of the internal braking l resistor is insufficient ay L m m ems es lll A iis J jt i ol j i Ji d i Options not included in the delivered l package ie i Connections not necessarily required SIMOTICS S 1FL6 servo motor Cable shield Note e The line supply cable Drive Bus cable Drive Bus trailing cable power cable and encoder cable are shielded e The part of the line supply cable between the line filter and the drive must be shielded and shorter than 1 m e The maximum length for all cables must be shorter than 30 m e For more information about the connection of the external braking resistor see Section Connecting an external braking resistor DCP R1 Page 65 e For more information about the connection of the STO terminals see Section Connecting the 24 V power supply STO X6 Page 60 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 67 Personal injury and damage to property from improper connections Improper connections have high risks of electrical shock
41. or dust lt 1000 m without derating Altitude 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 Altitude m IP20 Class 2 Vibration Operation Shock Operational area ll Degree of protection Degree of pollution Output power Peak acceleration 5 g Duration of shock 30 ms Operational area II 10 Hz to 58 Hz 0 075 mm deflection 58 Hz to 200 Hz 1g vibration Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 129 Transport amp Vibra 5 Hz to 9 Hz 7 5 mm deflection storage 3 9 Hz to 200 Hz 2 g vibration Vibration class 2M3 transportation CE fe FL Mechanical Outline dimensions W x H 80 x180 x200 100 x 180 x 220 140 x 260 x240 design x D mm Weight kg 1 When the SINAMICS V70 works with a motor with brake the voltage tolerance of 24 VDC power supply must be 10 to 10 to meet the voltage requirement of the brake 10 3 SIMOTICS S 1FL6 servo motors General technical data Parameter Description Type of motor Permanent magnet synchronous motor Thermal cass S B O Shock resistance m s 25 continuous in axial n 50 continuous in radial direction 250 in a short time of 6 ms Rated voltage V 24 10 Rated current 1FL6040 0 88 1FL606U 1 44 1FL609U 1 88 Holding brake torque Nm 1FL6040 3 5 1FL6060 12 1FL6090 30 Holding brake ms ms stops 20000 to 30000 when load factor lt 80 and at 30 C 3 Positive rotation Clockwise
42. 0 0 User alarm 08 50 700008 0 0 User alarm 09 4 50 700009 0 0 User alarm 10 50 700010 0 0 Handheld unit active 50 700011 0 0 Tool clamping timeout 50 700012 0 0 Spindle being braked 50 700013 0 0 Operation not allowed chuck unclamped 50 700014 0 0 Gear stage change timeout 50 700015 0 0 No gear stage signal 50 700016 0 0 Drives not ready 50 700017 0 0 Chuck operation not allowed spindle prog running 50 700018 0 0 Cooling motor overload 50 700019 0 0 Coolant level too low 50 lt 100 Q 8 Find the alarm number that needs to be edited and type your own text Save and close the file after editing the alarm text 9 Remove the USB stick from the PC and connect it with the USB interface on the front panel of the PPU again 10 Copy the edited alarm text back to the PLC alarm text folder and overwrite the original file 281 4 N 11 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM 12 You can check the editing result through the following PPU operations Edit PLC puc PLC i gt alarm txt Editing a PLC user alarm via the HMI For how to edit a PLC user alarm via the HMI see the topic Editing PLC alarm texts Page 91 A 7 6 PLC sample applications A 7 6 1 PLC sample application turning This sample application is applicable to machines with the following configurations e Two axes axes X and Z with a hardware limit switch respectively in the
43. 104 10 11 For the first tuning only the following measurement option is available which enables a new measurement with all preliminary measurement steps The following additional measurement options are available only if you have performed drive tuning for this axis e Performs a new measurement without carrying out the preliminary steps e Uses the existing measurement results Besides you can also specify the axis axes for interpolation path tuning by selecting the corresponding interpolation option Press this softkey to confirm the selections and return to the main screen of drive tuning Press this softkey to enter the preparation screen before the tuning Use the axis traversing keys to move the axis axes to be tuned to safe positions Position Direc Lin Lin Mx1i 29 798 16HH ale 1668 HZ1 200 002 2000 L 2666 Press this softkey and the drive tuning starts automatically Press this key on the MCP to start the measurement when the following message appears during the tuning process l Press this on HCP a start the measurement Press this on HCP AS To cancel and return RESET The axes nove during the tuning Please clean up your workbench to avoid collision After the drive tuning finishes successfully the tuning results appear on the screen in the form of a parameter list for example HxX1 Data before tuning Data after tuning Pi434 0 1 666866 H 7H7H71
44. 15 25 34 2615 62 68 Axis feedrate F 6 668 70 6 6686 mm min Se ee G566 6 Act val REL Act val Act v Fil Mach MCS da Set Heas kal mef f kee To use your own machine logo proceed as follows 1 Prepare your own machine logo and save it on a USB stick The control system supports the machine manufacturer machine logo in the BMP format with a maximum size of 124x19 pixels WxH Name the image as mtbico bmp Note that a machine logo with the size of 124x19 pixels can make the best effect Insert the USB stick into the USB interface on the front panel of the PPU 3 Locate the machine logo file in the USB stick through the following softkey operations Oo Sys fe data gt P USB is Fetal sd B 4 Copy the file with this softkey Copy N agp 5 Press this softkey to enter the main screen of HMI data o data Start up archive Oo EQNCK PLC data File for license key 6 Enter the folder related to HMI data 114 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Navigate to the highlighted folder shown below Hane Type Length Date ea Oo User cycle files CjEasysxLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnp Q Extended user text file falme txt C70EM HD description file md_descr txt CI0EM manual Coemmanual pdf3 CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt CI0EM slideshow bnp pngq C
45. 2 GOTOF FINISHING SBLOF RET FINISHING SBLON GO X DIAF G1 Z ENDP G1 X DIA VRT GO G91X VRT Z VRT G90 Z STAP 2 SBLOF RET LL1 IF P_EP Z lt STAP GOTOF END1 GOTOB LL3 END1 SETAL 65000 STOPRE MO RET END2 SETAL 65001 STOPRE MO RET 9 4 5 Creating the user cycle alarm file The user cycle alarm file is required to display alarm numbers and alarm messages for user cycles Naming rule alc_ lt LANG gt txt Here lt LANG gt refers to the language denotation for example eng a details on how to name a user cycle alarm file see Section Multi language support for the machine manufacturer s HMI ata Text definition rules When defining the texts you must follow the rule below lt AlarmNumber gt lt Text gt lt chars amp lines gt e lt AlarmNumber gt here you define the alarm number The number ranges from 65000 to 79999 e lt Text gt here you define the actual alarm text e lt chars amp lines gt here you specify the available space for the text in the GUI in number of characters and lines You can start a new line by inserting the character of n Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 119 Examples 65000 Current tool position is incorrect 34 gt one lines with thirty four characters space 65001 DIAF is bigger than DIA 23 gt one line with twenty three characters space 9 4 6 Creating the user cycle bitmap file The cycle icons must be stored
46. 2015 Copy the file with this softkey Press this softkey to enter the main screen of HMI data Start up archive Oo EQNCK PLC data File for license key Enter the folder related to HMI data Navigate to the highlighted folder shown below Hane Type Length ea Oo User cycle files D EasysLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnp CjExtended user text file falme txt C70EM HD description file md_descr txt Cj0EM manual Coemmanual pdf3 CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt CI0EM slideshow bnp pnq C70EM R variable name file Crparan_nanme txt 7Service planner task name file syvc_tasks txtJ Enter the folder and the default startup screen and machine logo files are placed in this folder Hane Type Length E OEM machine logo ntbico bnp 2 DEM start up splash screen startup bnmp Press this softkey to replace the default startup screen file with your own file Press these two keys to restart the HMI You can see your own startup screen during the startup of the control system 70 Start HMI Window Manager 113 Note To restore the default startup screen delete the customized bitmap file Startup bmp from the control system Using the machine manufacturer machine logo The default machine logo is displayed in the following operating area oat Wy M Sot NC MPF A Reset Position Rep of fset MX 1o 0 006 er MZ10 e
47. DOUTO X201 DOUT1 1 24 V 24 V 24 V input 20 4 V to 28 8 V 2 000 Q0 5 Q0 7 Connecting according to the default PLC program Working lamp S 4_Tailstock forward a 5 Tailstock backward 6 Cooling pump Lubrication pump z 8 Chuck output 1 9 Chuck output 2 2 Working lamp S i 5 2Disk magazine magazine rotating CW 3 Disk magazine magazine rotating CCW 2 4 Chip forward g 2 4 Disk magazine magazine in spindle positio 5 Chip backward i S 5 Disk magazine E Cooling pump S j z 6 Disk magazine Lubrication pump S 8 Safety door open Note End sleeves are necessary if you use two cables per connection Fasten the cables to the screw terminals and plug the terminals into interfaces X200 X201 correctly Commissioning Manual 44 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 1 3 Fast input output X21 Pin assignment Type Mini Combicon 10 pin Cable Shielded cable Max length 10 m Max cross section 1 5 mm when use one cable per connection Inputs Permissible level including ripple High level 20 4 V to 28 8 V Low level 3 V to 5 V llustration Pin signal Comment 24 V input 20 4 V to 28 8 V 24 V NCRDY_K1 NCRDY_1 NC ready signal contact 1 NCRDY_2 NC ready signal contact 2 4 bAa Digital input for connection to probe 1 Digital input for connection to probe 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 11 2 FAST 1 0 Mo Ground O Ground Connecting You can connect the fast I O to the inverter to control
48. Feed 1 approach to program speed limit fixed stop test ing stop 5 Machine function 1 Var INC 1000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC i a 7 Contour handwheel direction of rotation inverted a ee ee a ee ee po E a a Ooo e a o 4 Traversing keys Rapid trav Traverse Feedrate erse over key disable stop spindle 10 1 The machine function is only entered if the signal INC inputs in the operating mode signal range active DB2600 DBX1 0 is set Signals to axis DB3800 Signals to axis r w pits Bits Bits Bt2 Biti Bito 1000 Delay Ref Module limit 1001 ooo 1002 Suppress program test os a a a Commissioning Manual 224 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Signals to spindle DB3800 Signals to axis r w 3803 PLC gt NCK interface pee E feats eases et att ato 2000 Delete S No speed ae T Gear Actual gear Actualgearstage value monitoring changed A for gear 2001 Invert Resynchro Feedrate M3 M4 nize during override for positioning spindle valid a sansa direction of rota Oscillation Oscillation a sansa speed controlled Counter Clockwise by PLC clockwise Spindle override Pp oH e F E db en B A Signals to drive DB3800 Signals to axis spindle r w 3803 PLC gt NCK interface Bye Bt7 site Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Bitt Bito 4000 Holding brake 4001 Pulse ena Integrator ble disable Speed con troller a ee ee az
49. Hane Type Length Date E Customized bitmaps User cycle files D EasysLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnmp Q Extended user text file falme txt C70EM HD description file md_descr txt CI0EM manual Coemmanual pdf3 CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt CI0EM slideshow bnp pnq CI70EM R variable name file rparan_nanme txt rank eta ie cel NLA ek bien anaes ahd emnied U Pee gt Press this key to open the folder o Hane Type ea B svc tasks _eng txt 6 Copy the desired service planner text Copy eee 7 Press this softkey to enter the screen form of user cycle cycle 8 Press this softkey to paste the copied text into the screen form of user cycle Paste a 9 Press this key to view the service task Editing the service task To edit the created service task proceed as follows SYSTEM oy A SHIFT ALARM 2 Press this key on the PPU to view the extended softkeys o_ Enter the desired operating area ay TEn 3 Enter the main screen of service planning planr Ch 4 Press this softkey to enter the screen form of task change ange task Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 111 5 Change the task description in the following box as desired change task Task description Interval h 18 First warning hl 1 Humber of warnings 1 wf 6 Confirm the above input to complete changing the task OK Note You can use the ser
50. IP DHCP Yes Cnpt nane HONAKE_HCU IP address 176 16 ZBZ z Subnet mask 255 255 255 Gateway You can configure DHCP with the following key Note If you select No for DHCP you must enter the IP address which must belong to the same network as that of your PC and subnet mask manually Press this softkey to save the configuration If you select Yes for DHCP you also need to restart the control system to activate the network configuration Start PLC Programming Tool on your PC and click this button in the navigation bar to open the following dialog Communications Links Communications Setup Nong Address Double click the icon representing the PLE to my Double Click communicate with to Refresh Double click the interface icon to change communication parameters Double click the modern icon to setup the modem parameters or dial to stark modem communications Communication Parameters Remote Address 2 Local Address Module COM 1 Protocol PPI Transmission Aate Mode 11 bit Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 9 None Address 0 10 Double Click 11 to Refresh Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Double click the access point symbol and the following Set PG PC Interface dialog is displayed Set PG PC Interface Access Path LLDP DCP PNIO Adapter Info Access Point of the Application PLC Programming Tool Intel R 82579
51. InSecton Instructons Examples Basics History Extra Bit LAD STL Q BOOL Memory areas Supported Mnemonics instructions If the assign bit value directly instruction L bii is executed then A i PIE Sean l the physical output bit or OUT is set The address of each instruction can be edited at any time by highlighting the instruction SBA21 TEMP 300R 5 BA 23 ini SBF az SBR33 ER37 Network 4 turning or milling setting for the following program oM0 0 M255 0 R The data can be broken down into three areas Data management e Non retentive data e Retentive data e Machine data for the PLC all active at POWER ON Most data such as the process image timer and counter is non retentive and cleared each time the control system is restarted For the retentive data there is a data range of 1400 0000 to 1400 0127 This location can be used to save all the data which is to remain valid after POWER OFF ON With the aid of the PLC machine data see the user interface you can pre assign your program with data or parameterize various parts of the program Program organization During the PLC programming you must structure your program into finished program parts Subroutines The programming language for the S7 200 offers you the capability to set up your user program in a structured manner There are the following two types of programs e Main program e Subroutine Eight levels of programming are possi
52. Installation personnel commissioning engineers and ser vice and maintenance personnel Function Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals Parameter Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals Service Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical profession als commissioning engineers and service and maintenance personnel My Documentation Manager MDM Under the following link you will find information to individually compile your documentation based on the Siemens content ww siemens com md Standard scope This manual only describes the functionality of the standard version Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool manufacturer Technical support Country Further service contact information 49 911 895 7222 e Global Web site China 86 400 810 4288 https support industry siemens com sc us en sc list of countries oid2044 e Chinese Web site http www siemens com cn 808D 1 You can find more hotline information at the global Web site given above EC Declaration of Conformity ation of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at ttp www siemens com automation service amp support Here enter the number 67385845 as the search term or contact your local Siemens office Commissioning Manual 2 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Table of contents sce E ee Te ee ee E 1 DAlOly INS
53. J PATI Note For a motor with incremental encoder the operating principle of the holding brake is configured during motor selection for a motor with absolute encoder it is configured automatically NOTICE Shortening the service life of motor brake The motor brake is used for holding the load in position only Frequent emergency stops with the motor brake can shorten its service life Unless absolutely necessary do not apply the motor brake as an emergency stop or deceleration mechanism 5 Set the Jog speed p1058 with a value between 0 and the rated speed of the connected motor If you want to use the default Jog speed 100 rpm skip this step Commissioning Manual 76 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Operating display Change aborted OK Target parameter OK Default value lt 4 oO moe Para P usib h K Desired value g nnna wees l ha a a a M 0002 200 000 rpm Note For more information about the rated speed of a motor see section SIMOTICS S 1FL6 servo motors S 1FL6 servo motors Page 130 ie Save the parameter settings as follows For a motor with an absolute encoder and without a holding brake if you use the default Jog speed 100 rpm you can skip this step Operating display G aoFF Functions OK A fuat H rhosr e 5 Long press oK l Flashing for around 15 seconds Run the connected motor with the Jog function and
54. Overrun step size 2 mm 4 Conp Feed speed SoA nn min Unidirectional compensation is now used O after inputting correct values ues Returns to the last step Proceeds to the next step Opens the window for entering the compensation val You can press this softkey to switch to bidirectional compensation to realize more precise compensation if required The unidirectional compensation is used by default Note This softkey is active only if the optional bidirectional leadscrew error compensation has been activated with the license key For more information about this software option refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual Use these softkeys to select an axis Specify the following parameters as desired Start point HCS 4 6668 mm Number of runs End point HCS GABA BAB nm Pause tine Interval 1068 666 mmh Overrun step size Humber of points 6 Feed speed Press this softkey to enter the compensation screen 5 d 2 nr GAA nn rmin Follow the instructions in the help window to perform the compensation for the selected axis Press this softkey and repeat the above operations for the rest axis axes until all axes are compensated Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 7 6 Tuning drive performance This commissioning step provides facilities to tune the drive performance for each axis by automatically modifying the control loop parameters The tuning is pe
55. P1i466 6 4 816982 8 16845 P14621T6 54 46008 16 6668 Pi6S6 LH AH 1H P1657 2 1 PiES 8 707006 707106 Pi6686 H 1999 BB6HH8 lt HBE gogy HD3ZZ LH 8 137634 4 HH0008 HD32646 6 1 H 1 HD3231608 H HHJH 8 82237 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Axis Axis Accept Cancel Hext step Note You can check the tuning results of other tuned axis axes if any with these softkeys Press this softkey to save the tuning results and write the modified parameters into the drives Pressing this softkey aborts the tuning and deletes the results After it returns automatically to the main screen of drive tuning press this softkey to proceed to the next step The following softkey operation is also available on this screen Export results Saves the trace files during the tuning process to a USB flash disk if inserted For the machine data that are changeable only with a manufacturer password the settings made during drive tuning cannot be restored after an NC restart in case of power failure or unexpected abortion of the tuning process 1 1 VA Last Drive tuning Archive creator Archive version Machine type Comment Archive content Creation date start up archive Turning machine Start up data archive This step creates a complete data backup which includes Compensation data Machine and setting data PLC data e g PLC p
56. PLC data e g PLC program PLC alarm texts User cycles and part programs Tool and work offset data R variables HMI data e g OEM OnlineHelp OEM Manual Drive and motor configuration Note Fill the archive information and press Create archive a new archive with specified name will be generated Operating sequence 1 Specify the properties of the archive as required Archive creator HAX MUSTERMAN Archive version A i Hachine type Turning machine Comment Hy archive Archive content Production data archive Creation date 2615 82 69 eueare 2 Press this softkey to open the window for saving the archive file You must select a directory from Echoes this window C7Start up archive DEH files EUSB The default name of the data archive is arc_product arc You can use your desired name for it J 3 Press this softkey to create the archive OK Note If you choose USB as the target directory do not remove the USB stick during the data saving Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 99 7 5 Setting compensation data 7 5 1 Setting software limit switch data The software limit switches are used to limit the maximum traversing range on each individual axis You can set the software limit switches for each axis by configuring parameters 36100 and 36110 under this commissioning step Softkey functions E PE 89 46 53 REEPOINT 2015702709 Last Create ser Step Set W linit Next B
57. To use this function proceed as follows Long press Functions OK ce Funt gt Raar 5RuE Pasa v Flashing for around 15 seconds NOTICE Plugging or unplugging the SD card will cause saving failure Do not plug or unplug the SD card during saving otherwise the saving operation will fail Note If an SD card has been inserted the parameter set will be saved onto the SD card simultaneously Reference Editing parameters Page Setting parameter set to default This function is used to reset all parameters to their default values To reset all parameters to their default values proceed as follows Long press Functions o Funt R e dEFU z Dark for around 25 s Operating display oF mn T sone moe paar Flash for around 15s Functions NM Fund Note You must save the parameter set after resetting it otherwise the default values will not be activated Reference Saving parameter set in drive RAM to ROM Page 146 Commissioning Manual 146 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Transferring data drive to SD card You can transfer the parameter set from the drive to an SD card with the BOP To do this proceed as follows Long press Functions ay ee a a EE qr F nt haar gt oS Flash for around 3 s NOTICE It is forbidden to use this function when the servo is ON Use this function when the servo is OFF NOTICE Plugging or unplugging the SD card will
58. about the options see section m performance Page 103 J T Press this softkey to confirm the selections and return to the main screen of drive tuning OK meee 8 Press this softkey to enter the preparation screen before the tuning tune 9 Use the axis traversing keys to move the axis to a safe position Position Direc Lim Lim H X1 3 500 1000 ale 1666 HZ1 4 666 3000 all 3688 HAL 6 601 1e 68 ale 16 88 REST 10 Press this softkey and the drive tuning starts automatically tune 11 Press this key on the MCP to start the measurement when the following message appears during the tuning process f Press this on HCP AR start the measurement Press this on HCP Af To cancel and return RESET The axes nove during the tuning Please clean up your workbench to avoid collision 12 After the drive tuning finishes successfully the tuning results appear on the screen in the form of a parameter list Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 153 You can check the tuning results of the additional axis with these softkeys Axis Axis 13 Press this softkey to save the tuning results and write the modified parameters into the Accept drives Pressing this softkey aborts the tuning and deletes the results Cancel peasant It returns automatically to the main screen of drive tuning after the tuning finishes You can Pee nuite use this softkey to save the trace files during the tuning proce
59. and STO2 triggers safe pulse suppression with its switch off signal path e fa motor holding brake is connected and configured the connected brake is not safe because there is no safety function for brake such as safe brake Commissioning Manual 62 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Behaviors of the STO function Action sSs sT High level High level The servo motor can normally run when you power on the servo drive Low level Low level Safe The servo drive starts up normally but the servo motor cannot run High level Low level Unsafe Alarm occurs and servo motor coasts down Low level High level Unsafe Alarm occurs and servo motor coasts down For more information about the STO function see the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual 4 2 3 Connecting the holding brake X7 Holding brake drive side Illustration Signal Description o Brake interfaces PA B 24 V motor brake voltage positive P Phase B B 0 V motor brake voltage negative Maximum cable cross section 1 5 mm2 Input voltage tolerance 24 V 10 Holding brake motor side Illustration Signal Description O Z OZ O O O O OO Brake connector Phase Brake Wiring Drive side Motor side Terminal strip Socket connector 4 2 4 Connecting the encoder X9 The SINAMICS V70 servo drive supports two types of encoders e Incremental encoder e Absolute encoder NOTICE Cable shielding The encoder cable must be shielde
60. are involved in the tool change control that is tool return tool retrieval and tool change 1 The tool return operation is to return the tool on the spindle back to the tool magazine disk when compiling TO and a tool is located on the spindle 2 The tool retrieval operation is to get the desired tool from the tool magazine disk and install it on the spindle when compiling Tx x 0 and no tool is on the spindle 3 The tool change operation is to first return the tool on the spindle back to the tool magazine disk and then get the desired tool from the tool magazine disk when compiling Tx x 0 x number of the tool on the spindle For details please refer to the tool change subroutine Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 213 When setting 14512 19 3 to 1 the maintenance mode is enabled in which you can perform the following operations e When the tool magazine is in the spindle position axis Z only moves upward to the tool change position e When axis Z is under the tool change position the tool magazine cannot move to the spindle position e When the tool magazine is rotating the tool magazine needs to go home if the emergency stop button is pressed The following machine data is involved in this subroutine MD10715 M_LNO_FCT_CYCLE 0 MD10716 M_LNO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 0 MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE Local variable definition Inputs Named Type Description Magazine enter spindl
61. cause transferring failure Do not plug or unplug the SD card during transferring otherwise the transferring operation will fail Note Write protection function is not supported by the SINAMICS V70 Data in the SD card will be overwritten even if the write protection function of the SD card is enabled Transferring data SD card to drive You can also transfer the parameter set from an SD card to the drive To do this proceed as follows Long press Functions Flash for around 5s NOTICE It is forbidden to use this function when the servo is ON Use this function when the servo is OFF NOTICE Plugging or unplugging the SD card will cause transferring failure Do not plug or unplug the SD card during transferring otherwise the transferring operation will fail Note Parameter inconsistency If the parameters on the SD card are inconsistent with existing parameters in the drive memory you must save and restart the servo drive to apply the changes Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 147 Updating firmware With the firmware update function of the BOP you can update drive firmware To do this you have to store proper firmware files on an SD card and insert it into the SD card slot After that proceed as follows Functions Long press f nt hoor E panee gt Wait for around 4 minutes until the two indicators flash red at 0 5 Hz and then remove the SD card and re power on the drive
62. check the Jog speed or Jog torque J d y og spee Long press Functions oe _ a Speed value Jog torque T Note When you run the servo motor with an incremental encoder in JOG mode the servo motor makes a short buzzing sound indicating that it is identifying the magnetic pole position of the rotor 6 1 2 Configuring Drive Bus addresses To configure the Drive Bus addresses on the SINAMICS V70 drive set parameter p0918 default 10 with the drive BOP as required You must set a proper address according to the actual application of the drive e 11 X axis e 12 Y axis or additional axis for the turning variant of the control system e 13 Zaxis e 15 Additional axis Lona SATP eR Desired value Functions 0k 0k Default value A Flint Long press A m Flashing for around lt gt go Cc 15 seconds Aut Note Do not switch on the 24 VDC power supply for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED before you finish setting the Drive Bus addresses for all connected drives After setting a proper address you must save the parameter and then restart the drive to apply your setting Note After the Drive Bus communication is established for the first time the internal communication parameters are automatically changed and hence a dot appears on the display as follows Para You must perform a save operation to remove the dot Note After the Drive Bus communication is established the BOP is protect
63. conductive surfaces table with ESD surface conductive ESD foam ESD packaging ESD transport container Commissioning Manual 10 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 1 1 3 Industrial security Note Industrial security Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants solutions machines equipment and or networks They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept With this in mind Siemens products and solutions undergo continuous development Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions it is necessary to take suitable preventive action e g cell protection concept and integrate each component into a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Third party products that may be in use should also be considered For more information about industrial security visit this address Danger as a result of unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation Software manipulation e g by viruses Trojan horses malware worms can cause unsafe operating states to develop in your installation which can result in death severe injuries and or material damage e Keep the software up to date You will find relevant information and newsletters at this address http support automation siemens com Incorporate the automation and drive components into
64. control system automatically restores the last autosaved system data upon startup with an alarm appearing on the screen 6 3 Synchronizing drive data files between NC and drive The NC always compares its data backup with the drive data upon every startup e lf no data backup files can be found the NC creates a new backup file automatically with the following dialog displaying on the screen There is no drive setting backup file found in 68D a backup file is being created now oO e fthe drive data differs from the NC data backup a data synchronization is required for synchronizing the drive data files between the NC and the drives Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 19 Operating sequence CE Accept 11 C 80 Press this softkey to enter the setting window when the following data synchronization dia log appears Note a password input field appears in this dialog if you have not set an access level on the control system For more information see Section Setting the password Page 81 If you cancel the data synchronization with the following softkey this dialog appears again on next NC startup Cancel Select a drive for which you desire to perform the data synchronization Press this key to choose a synchronization method for the selected drive reate a new backup in 8808D Press this softkey to confirm your settings and start the data synchronization After the synch
65. corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Division Digital Factory Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015
66. current setpoint filter If not all of the filters are required then the filters should be used consecutively starting from filter 1 Dependency The individual current setpoint filters are parameterized as of p1657 p1657 Currentsetpointfiterttype 1 2 ft b me m _ ru Description Sets the current setpoint filter 1 as low pass PT2 or as extended general 2nd order filter e 1 Low pass PT2 e 2 General 2nd order filter Dependency Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656 0 and parameterized via P1661 p1658 Current setpoint filter 1 denom 0 5 16000 0 1999 0 Hz Float T U inator natural frequency Description Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 PT2 general filter Dependency Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656 0 and parameterized via p1657 p1661 p1659 Current setpoint filter 1 denom 0 001 10 000 0 700 Float IM T U inator damping Description Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 1 Dependency Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656 0 and parameterized via p1657 p1661 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 167 Par No Max Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed 01660 p1661 Current setpoint filter 1 numer 0 5 16000 0 1999 0 Float T U ator natural frequency Description Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 general
67. duration 6 shocks in each of the 3 axes vertical to each other Certification CE KCC 1 and EAC CE and EAC 1 The KCC certification is released along with Siemens inverter G120 and currently valid only for PPU161 2 10 2 SINAMICS V70 servo drives Max output current A se so 13e 15 9 234 330 396 Output frequency Hz 0 to 330 Power supply Voltage frequency 3 phase 380 VAC to 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Permissible voltage fluctu 15 to 10 ation Permissible frequency 10 to 10 fluctuation Rated input current A 1 7 Power supply capacity kVA Inrush current A 80 24 VDC power Voltage V 24 15 to 20 supply Maximum current A 1 A when using a motor without a brake 3s 58 jee jos fias fies al a0 4o 4o fan 25 25 3 A when using a motor with a brake Commissioning Manual 128 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Overload capability Imax 3 x In Control system Braking resistor Built in Protective functions Earthing fault protection output short cut protection overvolt age undervoltage protection t detection IGBT overtemperature protection Environmental conditions air tempera ture 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 Temperature CC 40 C to 70 C Ambient lt 90 non condensing humidity 90 non condensing Operating environment Indoor without direct sunlight free from corrosive gas combustible gas oil gas
68. en Without 3 3 5 1 5 6 8 3 8 3 11 0 13 6 15 3 19 7 24 3 33 2 coder brake motor kg Weight of With 4 4 6 2 8 3 11 0 11 0 13 6 16 3 20 9 25 3 29 9 38 7 absolute brake encoder without 4 9 5 3 10 7 13 3 14 8 19 3 23 9 32 7 motor kg brake 1 When the surrounding air temperature is higher than 30 C the 1FL6096 motors with brake will have a power derating of 10 Note The data of stall torque rated power and maximum torque in the above table allow a tolerance of 10 Power derating For deviating conditions Surrounding air temperature gt 40 C or installation altitude gt 1000 m above sea level the permissible torque power must be determined from the following table Surrounding air temperatures and installation altitudes are rounded off to 5 C and 500 m respectively Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 131 Power derating as a function of the installation altitude and surrounding air temperature Installation altitude above sea Surrounding air temperature C sche k 30 to 40 450 50 1000 ao7 noo fff 1500 2000 100 fos 0o90 fe 2500 0o96 090 0o86 8B 3000 Torque speed characteristics Torque Nm 0 O 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 Speed rpm 1FL6042 1AF6 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 Speed rpm Speed rpm 1FL6044 1AF6 1FL6061 1AC6 N oO N oO Torque Nm on Torque Nm o1 0 0 1000 2000 3000 0 Speed rpm 1FL6062 1AC6
69. export the PLC project in the pte format Additionally you can read write the PLC project in the pte format from to a USB stick directly on the control system Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 191 PLC Programming Tool PLC application pte Download upload co compare Q ra USB stick o 8 z x ol PLC application i E a pte SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Download You can write the transferred data into the permanent memory load memory of the control system with PLC Programming Tool or a USB stick To download a PLC application with PLC Programming Tool proceed as follows 1 Establish the communication between the control system and PLC Programming Tool You can establish the connection by using the following methods Z Select from the main screen menu as follows or click the toolbar button A to start the download PLC Programming Tool DASINUMERIK 808 D808 D turning ptp EQ File Edit View PLC Debug Tools Windows Help i Mew Ctrl N Open Ctrl 0 Close Save Cirl S Save As Import Export Upload Ctrl U Download iS Ctrl D Page Setup Commissioning Manual 192 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 ok 3 Click this button on the download dialog to proceed directly You can also select the follow ing checkbox for data blocks to include the actual values of the data blocks and then click this button W Data Blocks only actual values WA All
70. extended user text file is required for the display of respective screen texts cycle messages and softkey texts Naming rule almc_ lt LANG gt txt Here lt LANG gt refers to the language denotation for example eng For details on how to name an extended user text file see Section Multi language support for the machine manufacturer s HMI data Text definition rules When defining the texts you must follow the rule below lt Identifier gt lt Text gt lt chars amp lines gt e lt lIdentifier gt here you define the identifier with a number The number ranges from 83000 to 84999 e lt Text gt here you define the actual text e lt chars amp lines gt here you specify the available space for the text in the GUI in number of characters and lines You can start a new line by inserting the character of n A maximum of 2 lines with 9 characters each are available for softkey texts Examples 83000 User nCycles 2 9 two lines Each line with nine characters space 83002 CYCLE10 9 gt one line with nine characters space 9 4 2 Creating the user cycle softkey index file The user cycle softkey index file cov com file is required to define the softkeys for the user cycle You can create the cov com file with a text editor like the WordPad or Notepad Text definition rules Sx y z identifier bitmap cycle Xx 6 The fifth horizontal key yoo 4to8 o The first to eighth vertical key in the first lev
71. from technology functions DB3900 Signals from axis spindle r Bye Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bt3 Bt2 Biti so00 So o o o o ee a sor fF a OoOo E fd a 5002 Accelera Velocity Superim Actual tion warn warning posed mo value cou ing threshold tion pling threshold reached reached 5003 Max accel Max veloci Synchroni Axis is Synchro eration ty reached zation in accelerat nism over reached progress i 5004 Jooo S S Synchro nism over ride is factored in Active special axis ining pt Aise Axs5 Axisa Axis3 Axis2 Axsi A 7 2 11 PLC machine data INT values MD 14510 USER_DATA_INT DB4500 Signals from NCK r16 NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bt7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit4 Bito Int value WORD 2 byte Int value WORD 2 byte Int value WORD 2 byte 6 Int value WORD 2 byte Int value WORD 2 byte Int value WORD 2 byte HEX values MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX DB4500 Signals from NCK r8 NCK gt PLC interface Bye Bit7 Bite Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Bit Bito 1000 Hex value BYTE 1001 Hex value BYTE 1002 Hex value BYTE 1003 Hex value BYTE 1030 Hex value BYTE 1031 Hex value BYTE Commissioning Manual 228 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 FLOAT values MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT DB4500 Signals from NCK r32 NCK gt PLC interface Bye Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Biti Bito 2000 Float value REAL
72. is called only during the first PLC cycle the subroutine PLC_ini_USER_ini is also only called during the first PLC cycle Local variable definition None Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 31 OME PLC_ini_USR_ini EM A 7 4 8 Subroutine 32 PLC_INI PLC initialization Purpose Subroutine 32 is executed at the first PLC cycle SM0 1 This subroutine sets NCK interface signals according to the machine settings defined by PLC machine data In this subroutine the following interface signals are set e DB3200 DBX6 7 feed override of the NCK channel becomes active e DB380x DBX1 5 measurement system 1 of the axes is active Commissioning Manual 244 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 e DB380x DBX1 7 feed override of the axes is active e DB1700 DBX1 3 active ROV The following signals are reset e DB1700 DBX0 6 reset DRY At the end of this subroutine subroutine 31 PLC_ini_USR_ini is called You can program the initialization of customer PLC project in the subroutine 31 Local variable definition None Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 32 Network 1 Initialization SCAN_1ST PLC_INI EN A 7 4 9 Subroutine 33 EMG_STOP NOTICE Program safety Check whether this subroutine complies with the relevant safety requirements or not Purpose Subroutine 33 handles emergency stop Pressing down the Emergency Stop button produces an emergency stop alarm an
73. is not accessible in operation e When maintenance is required allow the motor to cool down before starting any work e Use the appropriate personnel protection equipment e g gloves Danger to life from electromagnetic fields Electromagnetic fields EMF are generated by the operation of electrical power equipment such as transformers converters or motors People with pacemakers or implants are at a special risk in the immediate vicinity of these devices systems e Ensure that the persons involved are the necessary distance away minimum 2 m 1 1 2 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices ESD Electrostatic sensitive devices ESD are individual components integrated circuits modules or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge NOTICE Damage through electric fields or electrostatic discharge Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual components integrated circuits modules or devices e Only pack store transport and send electronic components modules or devices in their original packaging or in other suitable materials e g conductive foam rubber of aluminum foil Only touch components modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the following methods Wearing an ESD wrist strap Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring Only place electronic components modules or devices on
74. kept enabled Bit 5 define the spindle override startup value 0 the startup spindle override is always 100 1 recode the spindle override value of the last machine turn off for the next startup Bit 6 7 define the spindle override shift speed Note When you set MD14512 you can use the following key to open the editor for bit setting SELECT 1 When the position control mode is active do not disable the spindle by detecting the standstill speed Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 89 MD14514 PLC interface Unit Range Function Machine data Float 14514 0 DB4500 DBD2000 a 3 40e38 to 3 40e38 Tool magazine spindle poisoning angle 14514 1 DB4500 DBD2004 3 40e38 to 3 40e38 Tool magazine preparation position of Z axis for tool change 1451412 DB4500 DBD2008 3 40e38 to 3 40e38 Tool magazine tool changing position of Z axis 14514 3 DB4500 DBD2012 3 40e38 to 3 40e38 Tool magazine velocity of Z axis go to tool chang ing position 14514 4 DB4500 DBD2016 3 40e38 to 3 40e38 Tool magazine velocity of Z axis back to tool change preparation position Note PLC interface signal addresses are represented with the V structure on the HMI while the manual shows them by the DB structure See the following table for the relationship between the two representations V Structure DB Structure Bit 38000002 1 DB3800 DBX2 1 VB38000002 DB3800 DBB2 VW38000002 DB3800 DBW2 Double Word VD
75. limit switch of 3rd axis NC _3LMTn BOOL Negative hardware limit switch of 3rd axis NC _3REF BOOL Reference cam of 3rd axis NO _SREF BOOL Reference Cam of 5th axis NO 1 The hardware limit is used for the input if there is only one hardware limit switch or when the hardware solution is used Outputs Names Type Description S OVImt BOOL Any of the axis over hardware limits Assigned global variables SP_CMD M138 1 Spindle start command CW or CCW Relevant PLC machine data No Value Description S 14512 18 6 Overtravel employs the hardware solution Overtravel employs the PLC solution 14512 18 7 Each axis has only one hardware limit switch iol Each axis direction has an hardware limit switch 14512 20 1 C Disable by pressing the spindle stop key Disable when detecting the standstill speed 1 1 When setting bit 1 to 1 make sure that the speed control mode is active Note By default the value of MD30350 is 0 indicating that the NC will run in the real axis mode When performing the axis control related operations on a stand alone controller without any connection to the motor or drive you need to set MD30350 to 1 for each axis which indicates that the axis will run in the simulated state and thus the PLC will not detect the drive ready signal otherwise an alarm will be thrown out indicating axis enable missing Commissioning Manual 250 6FC5397 4EP 10 0BA4 08 2015 Example for calling sub
76. machine turret type position de tection with encodings SPINDLE Spindle control including the spindle braking function 43 MEAS _JOG Tool measurement in the JOG mode ret2_BIN_T Turret3_CODE_T TOGGLE Six key operated switches K1 to K6 Two delay switches K7 K8 34 36 57 61 62 Reserved for the OEM Lathe and milling functions PLC sample subroutines for lathe functions For turning only SBR 51 Turret1_HED_T HED turret control SBR 52 Turret2_BIN_T Bi direction turret binary coded SBR 53 Turret38_CODE_T Bi direction turret coded by turret supplier SBR 55 Tail_stock_T Tailstock control SBR 56 Lock_unlock_T Chuck control PLC sample subroutines for milling functions For milling only SBR 60 Disk_MGZ_M Disk magazine control w o automatic tool changer Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 239 A 7 4 1 PLC machine data USER_DATA_INT No Unit Description oo 14510021 f Layoutofthetraverse keys o 14510120 f Maximumnumberoftoos S USER_DATA_HEX No Descriptions 14512 16 function of chip conveyor milling function of safety door milling when the function of safety door is active it can be triggered by M01 M02 milling handwheel assignment with the MCP HMI 14512 17 turret turning tool magazine milling clamping function turning tailstock function turning selection between handwheel and hand held unit 0 handwheel 1 hand held unit 14512 18 Specia
77. main program The measuring in the JOG mode function is automatically deactivated if you have changed the operating mode when the function becomes active Local variable definition Inputs T ACT DWORD Transfer the active tool into interface Assigned global variables MEAS_OPAUT M240 0 Measuring in the AUTO mode CHL_HMI M240 2 From HMI signals mode changes during measurement NO_KEY FDI_MEASJOG ON_MEASJOG PROBE_ON JOG_MEASJOG AUT_MEASJOG CHL_MEASJOG KEY_MEASJOG RES_MEASJOG ESC_MEASJOG DRY_MEASJOG SBL_MEASJOG Single block Meas_JOG Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 43 CINE MEAS JOG DA1 400 DAD64 471 ACT Commissioning Manual 254 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 4 17 Subroutine 44 COOLING cooling control Purpose Subroutine 44 is used to start stop cooling using the buttons on the MCP in the JOG mode or to start using the auxiliary function MO7 MO8 in the part program or to stop using the MO9 in the part program cooling in the AUTO MDA mode Cooling is forbidden in case of EMERGENCY STOP cooling motor overload program test or under the simulation mode This subroutine can activate the following alarms e Alarm 700018 motor overload for the cooling pump e Alarm 700019 low coolant level Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description S O BYTE BOOL Switch key holding signal OVload BOOL Cooling motor overload NC BOOL Coolant level low
78. motor cannot be operated The servo drive in use does not support the Motor ID The servo drive in use does not support encoderless operation Commissioning of the servo motor has failed The incremental encoder motor is connected but fails to commission Motor ID is downloaded wrong during manufacture The software of the servo drive does not support the Motor ID Incorrect absolute encoder data e Check the encoder cable Does the encoder supply signals and the associated inverted signals Check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC Check the plug connections If the Hall sensor is used as an equivalent for track C D check the connection Check the connection of track C or D Replace the encoder or encoder cable Check the encoder type used incremen tal absolute and the encoder cable If relevant note additional fault messages that describe the fault in detail The servo motor will be automatically config ured after the acknowledgement of this fault Use a suitable absolute encoder motor e Check the encoder cable connection be tween the servo drive and the servo motor e Use a servo motor with encoder Configure the motor ID by setting the parame ter p29000 e Update the software e Use a correct absolute encoder motor Contact the Hotline Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Alarm list A1009 Control module over temperature A1019
79. positive and negative directions of each axis e An analog spindle SP e HALL effect device turret with six working stations e PLC controlled timely and quantitatively lubrication system e PLC controlled cooling system Assignment of inputs and outputs Signal escription Remark 10 0 Emergency Stopbutton Normally closed Limit switch in the direction of axis X os oo o SO los o Limit switch in the direction of axis Z 10 6 Limit switch in the direction of axisZ Normally closed oono o S 12 0 2 o Reserved S O Reserved Reserved S O Commissioning Manual 282 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Signal escription Remark S Reserved Reserved S O Bs Reserved Be Jooo Reseved Reserved S O Handheld unit enabled Valid at a high level Q0 0 Working lamp a e a Tailstock forward S Tailstock backward S 90 4 Cooingpume S as Lubricationpump O O O SSS 906 Chnuckoutputi S Q07 Chuekoutput2 S Q10 __ Turret motor rotating clockwise S o Turret motor rotating counter clockwise Bd Q12 Reserved for other types ofturets S Q13 Reservedforothertypesofturets S o o a Gear shift low gear level SBR49 GearChg1_Auto Gear level status SBR50 GearChg2_ Virtual Gear shift high gear level SBR49 GearChg1_Auto TE Definition of user defined keys on the MCP Structure of the sample application OB1 Each scan SM0 0 MCP_NCK SBR37 Transferring MCP and HMI signals to the NCK interface
80. r0037 2 Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures r0037 11 12 The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter depletion layer or rectifier 0068 Absolute current actual value Arms Fioat Description Displays actual absolute current For A_INF S_INF the following applies e The value is updated with the current controller sampling time The following applies for SERVO e The value is updated with a sampling time of 1 ms e Absolute current value sqrt Ilq 2 Id 2 e The absolute current actual value is available smoothed r0027 and unsmoothed r0068 Dependency r0027 r006910 6 Phase currentactualvalue da Fo e do Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 163 Par No Max Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed Description Displays the measured actual phase currents as peak value 0 Phase U 1 Phase V 2 Phase W 3 Phase U offset 4 Phase V offset 5 Phase W offset 6 Total U V W In indices 3 5 the offset currents of the 3 phases which are added to correct the phase currents are dis played The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6 r0079 0 1 Torque setpoint total k db db Nm Fot fj oo Description Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller before clock cycle interpola tion e 0 Unsmoothed e 1 Smoothed r0632 Motor t
81. restart Example for calling subroutine 46 OME PI_SEVICE EN nodef ASUF1Run p ASIPI run ASUF1_tr ASUF2RUn p ASUP 2 run ASLUP tr Erri PASUP 1 err Er PAsUP err A 7 4 20 Subroutine 47 PLC_Select_PP PLC selects a subroutine Purpose Subroutine 47 is used to select a part program You firstly need to create a PLC program calling table and assign a program index to each part program in this table In subroutine 47 you can assign DB1700 DBB1000 to the Program index to select the corresponding part program Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description Part program number 1 100 user 101 200 OEM 201 255 Siemnes Outputs Name Type Description S BOOL PLC selects a part program successfully BOOL PLC selects a part program incorrectly Commissioning Manual 258 6FC5397 4EP 10 0BA4 08 2015 Assigned global variables SelPP_FinOm BOOL M239 6 Indicates that a part program has been selected SelPP_ErrOm BOOL M239 7 Indicates that an error occurs when selecting a part program Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 47 OME PL Select_PP EN PartProhr4PP_num Finish SelPP_fin Errore SelPP_err A 7 4 21 Subroutine 48 ServPlan service planner Purpose To use subroutine 48 you must have created a service plan on the control system When the pre alarm time arrives the machine outputs a notification message When the final alarm time arrives the machine outp
82. the case that such an alarm is generated you can search the following list for the subroutine wherein the alarm is activated 700011 DB1600 DBX13___ Toolclamping timeout fF o 700015 DB1600 DBX1 7 Gear position signal error 700016 DB1600 DBX2 0 Drives not ready SBR33 EMG_STOP 700017 DB1600 DBX2 1 Chuck operation not allowed spindle prog SBR56 Lock_unlock_T running 700018 DB1600 DBX2 2 Cooling motor overload SBR44 COOLING 700019 DB1600 DBX2 3 Coolant level too low Commissioning Manual 278 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 SBR51 Turret_HED_T SBR52 Turret2_BIN_T SBR53 Turret3_CODE_T No tool position signal from turret Tool change timeout 700033 DB1600 DBX4 1 Magazine rot failed magazine spindle not SBR60 Disk_MGZ_M ready 700034 DB1600 DBX4 2 BIk search finds tool on spindle lt gt tool pro SBR60 Disk_MGZ_M grammed 700035 DB1600 DBX4 3 Spindle positioning to unclamping position SBR60 Disk_MGZ_M timeout 700036 DB1600 DBX4 4 Spindle positioning to clamping position timeout SBR60 Disk_MGZ_M 700050 DB1600 DBX6 2 Reference point of Z axis not reached SBR58 MM_MAIN 700051 DB1600 DBX6 3 Spindle direction illegal SBR58 MM_MAIN 700049 DB1600 DBX6 1 Reference point of X axis not reached SBR58 MM_MAIN 700052 DB1600 DBX6 4 Monitoring time for JOG operation exceeded SBR58 MM_MAIN 700059 DB1600 DBX7 3 NC start not possible safety door not closed SBR22 AUX_SAFE_DOOR 700060 DB1600 DBX7 4 PRT AFL change not possibl
83. the spindle rotating direction unipolar Inverter or servo spindle drive x o Spindle CCW DQ L dhom ska NC readiness is in the form of a relay contact NO It must be integrated into an EMERGENCY STOP circuit The connection diagram is shown as follows X21 Pin Relay 1 Max current 0 25 A 1 When the NC is not ready the contact is open otherwise the contact is closed Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 45 Connection cables End sleeves are necessary if you use two cables per connection Fasten the cables to the screw terminals and plug the terminal into the interface X21 You can buy the shielded cables from a third party manufacturer Note To ensure optimum interference immunity use only the shielded cable to connect the FAST I O terminals X21 4 1 4 Distributed I O X301 X302 Pin assignment Type 50 pin socket Inputs Permissible level including ripple High level 20 4 V to 28 8 V Low level 3 V to 5 V Outputs Rated digital output current 250 mA Pin Signal Comment Pin Signal Comment X301 DISTRIBUTED I O 1 a M xternal ground 26 57 Digtalinput 2av 24Voutput a Notassigned 3 Bo _ Digitainput 28 Notassigned a B1 Digitainput 29 e o fNotassigned 5 82 Digital input 30 Notassigned_ e B3 Digitalinput 31 Q20 Digital output 7z i Digital input 32 ft Digital output 8 i385 Digitalinput 33 Q22 Digital output 9 B6 Digital in
84. this job e Always observe the country specific safety rules Generally six steps apply when establishing safety 1 Prepare for shutdown and notify all those who will be affected by the procedure 2 Disconnect the machine from the supply Switch off the machine Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed Check that it really is in a no voltage condition from phase conductor to phase conductor and phase conductor to protective conductor Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de energized Ensure that the motors cannot move Identify all other dangerous energy sources e g compressed air hydraulic systems or water Isolate or neutralize all hazardous energy sources by closing switches grounding or short circuiting or closing valves for example Secure the energy sources against switching on again Ensure that the correct machine is completely interlocked After you have completed the work restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence Danger to life through a hazardous voltage when connecting an unsuitable power supply Touching live components can result in death or severe injury e Only use power supplies that provide SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage or PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage output voltages for all connections and terminals of the electronics modules Danger to life when live parts are touched on damaged motors devices Improper handling of motors dev
85. to a SINAMICS V70 drive A N a N N Screw driver cross head for M4 ii screws Line filter Minimum clearance y Wire diameter range 24 AWG to 8 AWG 7 SINAMICS V70 SD card An SD card can be used to copy drive parameters or perform a firmware update You are recommended to use the Siemens SD card order number 6E S7954 8LB01 OAA0O You can also select other high quality SD cards with a maximum capacity of 2 GB from manufacturers such as KINGMAX Kingston or SanDisk which are not tested by Siemens Commissioning Manual 24 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Toolbox DVD Under the Toolbox DVD root directory it contains a file setup exe After starting this file the program guides you installing the following software to the PC e SinuComPCIN SinuComPCIN is a tool that allows the commissioning engineer to exchange files between the PC and the control through RS232 interface e Access MyMachine Access MyMachine AMM is a tool that allows the commissioning engineer to exchange files between the PC and the control very easily through the Ethernet interface For data transmission the control can be connected to the PC directly or via the local network e PLC Programming Tool PLC Programming Tool makes a connection between the programming tool and the control system The commissioning engineer can program and debug the PLC inside the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED e Config DATA Config_D
86. to separate the different characters Note that you can also define different pictures for the characters 5 Separator 6 Default value Value passed in the cycle if no entry is made 7 Separator 8 Help information the identifier defined in the cycle text file 9 End of variable declaration 10 Start of description 11 Short text The text displayed in the parameter screen form defined in the cycle text file 12 Separator 13 Text in the screen Text preceding the input screen A maximum of 5 charac ters in length 14 End of description 15 Line specific image B name bmp Note Separators start and end identifiers must always be entered The lines 4 6 and 15 can be left blank If no texts are stored with the identifier three question marks appear in the associated fields on the screen Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 117 Example ICN1 CYCLE100 R O 99999 999 83002 83003 DIA R O 99999 999 83004 83005 DIAF R 9999 999 99999 999 83004 83004 STAP R 9999 999 99999 999 83025 83005 ENDP R O 99999 999 83026 83006 MID R O 99999 999 83027 83007 UX I 0 1 2 0 83028 83008 MACH B CN1 R 1 99999 999 1 83029 83009 VRT M17 9 4 4 Creating the user cycle file You can create a user cycle file according to different machining functions It is a subroutine program that can be used at calling a cycle Naming rule CYCLExxx SPF Here xxx refers to the cycle n
87. unit min L_time Timer for very lubricating time duration unit 0 01s max 327 67 s Relevant PLC machine data No Unt Range Description S 14510 24 Min Lubricating time interval 14510 25 100 to 2 000 Lubricating time duration Example for calling subroutine 45 CINE LUBRICAT MD_INT_24 4Li L_out PO0 5 MD_INT 25 L LED RM_cK3 P_M_CK3 ONE 27 26 Commissioning Manual 256 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 4 19 Subroutine 46 PILSERVICE Purpose Subroutine 46 is for realizing functions like ASUP Asynchronous Subroutine Program and deleting a password e ASUP function The ASUP function means the execution of PLCASUP1 SPF or PLCASUP2 SPF called by the PLC The control system provides two ASUPs for the PLC The two ASUPs cannot be simultaneously executed and the PLCASUP1 SPF has a higher priority over the PLCASUP2 SPF In a program firstly you can initialize the ASUP1 and ASUP2 by setting PI index DB1200 DBB4001 and NCK read write start DB1200 DBX4000 0 and then use a rising edge to trigger ASUP1 start DB3400 DBX0 0 and ASUP2 start DB3400 DBX1 0 Note Important The control system provides two user ASUPs In the sample application ASUP1 is used for manual tool change and ASUP2 is used for the MANUAL MACHINE of the workpiece on a turning machine with the Manual Machine Plus function e Deleting a password To use this function you need to only execute the PI service Here no
88. was re commissioned The motor with integrated and adjusted encoder was replaced The firmware was updated to a version that checks the encoder serial number One of the filter natural frequencies is greater than the Shannon frequen cy 2KHz Filter 1 01658 p1660 Filter 2 01663 p1665 Filter 3 01668 p1670 Filter 4 01673 p1675 After the standstill monitoring time expired the drive left the standstill window Position loop gain too low Position loop gain too high instabil ity oscillation Mechanical overload Connecting cable motor drive convert er incorrect phase missing inter change If the encoder mounting was changed re adjust the encoder Replace the defective motor encoder Correctly set the motor stator resistance cable resistance and motor stator leakage inductance Calculate the cable resistance from the cross section and length check the induct ance and stator resistance using the motor data sheet measure the stator resistance e g using a multimeter and if required again identify the values using the station ary motor data identification With pole position identification activated check the procedure for pole position iden tification and force a new pole position identification procedure by means of de selection followed by selection Re causes 1 2 Carry out an automatic adjustment using the pole position identification routine Acknowledge the faul
89. 00 s Float IM T U ramp down time 00 Commissioning Manual 164 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Par No Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed Description The ramp function generator ramps down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed p1082 down to standstill setpoint 0 in this time Further the ramp down time is always effective for OFF1 Dependency p1082 tion Description Sets the holding brake configuration e 0 No motor holding brake being used e 1 Motor holding brake according to sequence control e 2 Motor holding brake always open e 3 Motor holding brake like sequence control Dependency p1216 p1217 p1226 p1227 p1228 time Description Sets the time to open the motor holding brake After controlling the holding brake opens the speed velocity setpoint remains at zero for this time After this the speed velocity setpoint is enabled This time should be set longer than the actual opening time of the brake which ensures that the drive cannot accelerate when the brake is applied Dependency p1215 p1217 time Description Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake After OFF1 or OFF3 and the holding brake is controlled the brake closes then the drive remains closed loop controlled for this time stationary with a speed setpoint velocity setpoint of zero The pulses are suppressed when the time expires This time should be set longer than the actual c
90. 002 3003 A 7 2 6 Signals from to HMI Program control signals from the HMI retentive area DB1700 Signals HMI r w HMI gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bt3 Bit2 Bit1 Bito Dry run M01 se DRF se feedrate lected lected selected Program Feedrate test selected override selected for rapid trav Skip block 7 Skip block Skip block Skip block Skip block Skip block Skip block Skip block selected 6 selected 5 selected 4selected 3 selected 2 selected 1 selected 0 selected Skip block Skip block 9 selected 8 selected urement value not finished 7 Reses NC stop o NCstat o Program selection from PLC retentive area DB1700 Program selection r w PLC gt HMI interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit4 Bito 1000 Program selection from the PLC Program number 1001 Command job from the PLC Command oz a a a 1003 ooo o S S e S S S Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 209 Checkback signal Program selection from HMI retentive area DB1700 Program selection r HMI gt PLC interface Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit4 Bito 2000 Error pro Program gram selec selected 2001 Error com Execute mand exe command 2002 Signals from HMI DB1800 Signals from HMI r HMI gt PLC interface signals are only present for PLC cycle Byte pit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bi
91. 021 Ground fault Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F30027 Precharging DC link time monitoring Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY Check the power cable connections Check the motor The power unit DC link was not able to be pre charged within the expected time There is no line supply voltage con nected The line contactor line side switch has not been closed The line supply voltage is too low The pre charging resistors are over heated as there were too many pre charging operations per time unit The pre charging resistors are over heated as the DC link capacitance is too high The pre charging resistors are over heated The pre charging resistors are over heated as the line contactor was closed during the DC link fast dis charge through the Braking Module The DC link has either a ground fault or a short circuit The pre charging circuit is possibly defective Check the line supply voltage at the input ter minals F30036 Internal over temperature Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY The temperature inside the drive converter has exceeded the permissible temperature limit e Insufficient cooling fan failure e Overload Check whether the fan is running Check the fan elements Check whether the surrounding air temper ature is in the permissible range Notice e Surrounding air temperature too high This fault can only be acknowledged once t
92. 0H 0 to OxOFF BYTE HEX 0 31 User data HEX USER_DATA_F 0 000000 3 4e 038 to DOUBLE LOAT O 7 3 4e 038 User data float e Turning 0 to Ox1FFFFF DWORD 283H e Milling OH 20360 TOOL_PARAM Definition of tool parameters 20700 REFP_NC_STA 1 BOOL RE RT_LOCK NC start disable without reference point 30100 CTRLOUT_SE 1 1 to 5 BYTE GMENT_NRIO ETER_DEF_M ASK Setpoint assignment bus segment number 0 Setpoint assignment Setpoint output on drive submodule module PE Output type of setpoint 30134 IS UNIPOLAR_ 0 to 1 OUTPUT O0 Setpoint output is unipolar NUM_ENCS BYTE PO 5o ME of encoders 30210 ENC_SEGMEN 1 1 to5 BYTE T_NR O Actual value assignment Bus segment number 30230 ENC_INPUT_N 1 1 to2 BYTE RIO Actual value assignment Input on drive module meas circuit board 30240 ENC_TYPE jo 0to5 BYTE o oo Encoder type of actual value sensing actual position value 30350 SIMU_AX_VDI_ FALSE BOOL OUTPUT Axis signals output for simulation axes Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 15 N No Name Defaut Activating 30600 FIX_POINT_PO 0 000000 DOUBLE mm degrees S 0 3 Fixed value positions of axis with G75 Encoder lines per revolution 31030 LEADSCREW_ 10 000000 20 DOUBLE mm PITCH Pitch of leadscrew CT Direct measuring no compilation to load position 31050 DRIV
93. 160 2 vertical operator panel English version e PPU160 2 vertical operator panel Chinese version Configurable MCPs are available in the following versions e Horizontal MCP English version e Horizontal MCP Chinese version e Vertical MCP with a reserved slot for the handwheel English version e Vertical MCP with a reserved slot for the handwheel Chinese version e Vertical MCP with an override switch for the spindle English version e Vertical MCP with an override switch for the spindle Chinese version Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 13 System configuration The following configuration shows a typical example of the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M controller with the SINAMICS V70 servo system Note that the devices with an asterisk are not included in the scope of delivery Inverter or servo spindle drive with analog interface Spindle motor Spindle setpoint is Handwheels a TLETT Cable shield SINUMERIK Digital 1 0 808D ADVANCED Mae PPU Fast I O BOSC 28 A oeeemee chy EGODE sae xam I Distributed I O P 24 VDC power LXU x3o X126 lt supply Drive Bus cable Drive Bus trailing cable connection MCP terminator 5 Bee Bee HHA Baa EG ag Brake cable Brake cable 5 5 P S SIMOTICS SIMOTICS SIMOTICS Sreend S 1FL6 S4FLG S 1FL6 1 2 For detailed information on cable shield conne
94. 2 0 deactivate 1 activate Example for calling subroutine 22 MD HEs_16_2 T_or_M ALA SAFE DOOR EM nodef DoorlprOd b PM CKS4Doork DoorLED FM CK IZ O4lsDoorcls MsgDoor PALARMBO WMD HEX 16 34M1 2 Ope A 7 4 6 Subroutine 23 AUX_CHIP chip conveyor Purpose Subroutine 23 is used to control the chip conveyor and can be called in AUX_MCP At first time pressing of the Chip Forward key the output ChipFwd is high at second time pressing of the Chip Forward key the output ChipFwd becomes low When the output ChipFwa is low the output ChipRev becomes high at pressing Chip Reverse key and becomes low at releasing the Chip Reverse key Local variable definition Inputs BYTE ChipFwdkK BOOL Chip forward key ChipRevK BOOL Chip reverse key Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 243 Outputs ChipFwdLED BOOL Chip forward led ChipFwd BOOL Chip forward output ChipRevLED BOOL Chip reverse led ChipRev BOOL Chip reverse output Relevant PLC machine data No Description S 14512 16 1 Selection of chip conveyor function 0 do not use 1 use Example for calling subroutine 23 MO_HE _16_1 T_or_M ALA CHIP H __ EM nodef ChipFwg ChipFwgdk ChipFwd ChipRevE ChipRevL ChipRey A 7 4 7 Subroutine 31 PLC_ini_USR_ini user initialization Purpose Subroutine 31 is used for user initialization and should be called in subroutine PLC_INI Since the subroutine PLC_INI
95. 38000004 DB3800 DBD4 Double word 7 1 2 Downloading and commissioning PLC programs To realize your own PLC functions you can upload the default PLC program and edit it With PLC Programming Tool installed on your PC you can download customized PLC programs into the permanent memory of the control system PLC Programming Tool is available in the Toolbox If you use the default PLC programs you can skip this step and move to the next step Softkey functions iter Last Set PLC Step Commission Next Check parameters 2 14 PLC I Os MCS Position Speed T F S 11 41 39 2615 62 66 C MX1 0 008 8 900 T D amp C MZ1 0 000 8 900 F a Apa 70 9 8988 nn reyv MSP1 0 009 0 008 S 1 ane Direct connection status Disconn Direct connect Last Note Press the softkey Direct connect to activate the connect Ee Enter IP address in View gt Communications of PLC Programming Tool Next step Activates deactivates the direct connection with PLC Programming Tool via the Ethernet interface Returns to the previous step Proceeds to the next step For more information about the communication settings on the PC end as well as downloading and commissioning PLC programs with PLC Programming Tool refer to Appendix PLC Programming Tool Page 181 Commissioning Manual 90 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Note You should upload the sample PLC blocks to the PC first then make the modifications to achiev
96. 4 byte 2004 Float value REAL 4 byte Float value REAL 4 byte Float value REAL 4 byte User alarm Configuring MD 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM DB4500 Signals from NCK r8 NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bt7 Bite Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Biti Bito Alarm response cancel criteria alarm 700000 3001 ire Note For more information about how to configure user alarms see Section Editing PLC alarm texts A A 7 2 12 Signals synchronized actions Signals synchronized actions to channel DB4600 Signals synchronized actions to channel r w PLC gt HMI interface Bye Bt7 Bite Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Bitt Bito Deactivate synchronized action with ID ws 7 w w m4 m m2 m Deactivate synchronized action with ID ID16 ID15 ID14 ID13 ID12 ID11 D10 D9 Deactivate synchronized action with ID ID24 ID23 ID22 ID21 ID20 ID19 ID18 ID17 Signals synchronized actions from channel DB4700 Signals synchronized actions from channel r NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 site Bits Bit4 Bits Bt2 siti Bito Synchronized action with ID can be blocked from the PLC m w7 ws s m4 ms m2 m a Synchronized action with ID can be blocked from the PLC Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 229 16 ID15 ID14 ID13 ID12 ID41 D10 D9 2 Synchronized action with ID can be blocked from the PLC ID24 ID23 ID22 ID21 ID20 ID19 ID18
97. 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 e bit6 1 bit7 0 Two times the standard speed The steps are 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 e bit 6 0 bit 7 1 About three times the standard speed The steps are 50 60 70 85 100 110 120 e bit6 1 bit 7 1 About four times the standard speed The steps are 50 60 80 100 120 Example for calling subroutine 62 SM0 DB4500 08681020 0 Trg_key_OR sn 04NODER LED1_S D81100 DBX2 2 DB1IO00 DBH 44incS_Key LED SPFDA81100 DBX2 3 DBIO00 DBK 24DecS_Key LED3_S 0D81100 DBX2 4 DB1000 DB 345_100_Key 04 Moderi 04 Modert Commissioning Manual 276 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 4 35 Subroutine 63 TOGGLES Purpose Two types of switches are provided in subroutine 63 more specifically a hold switch for switching a circuit on press and off press again and a delay switch for switching on a circuit and automatically switching it off after a certain time period A total of six hold switches and two delay switches are available in this subroutine with the delay duration being configurable The key inputs or outputs of the subroutine can be connected with any physical inputs or outputs The inputs and outputs of all idle switches are respectively ZERO and NULL_b M255 7 Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description Delay7 WORD For switch 7 unit 10 ms max delay 5 min Delay8 WORD For switch 8 unit
98. 6 06 7008 08 09 44 am Last Modified 03 04 2015 11 08 18 am Subroutine Library Falcon V00 01 16 fortuming cance _ Then in the version display on the control the added information is visible PLC Application turning ptp 16 26 69 16 2H14 Subroutine Library Falcon II Y66 61 16 for turning 69 16 2014 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 199 A 7 1 6 Compiling and monitoring programs Compiling PLC programs You can check for syntax errors after editing or modifying a PLC project using the compile function of PLC Programming Tool Proceed through the following steps to compile a PLC program 1 Open an existing or new PLC project in PLC Programming Tool and save it after editing or modifying as desired Start compiling by clicking the toolbar button or choosing from the main screen menu as follows ES File Edit View PLC Debug Tools Windows Help asgan i g i STOP gt gt 4 Jj lm Compile N Clear Information Compare Netw Program Block Es Type i ogee Ch CTAO rood Wait for several seconds until the compiling finishes Then you can check the results in the message window at the bottom of the main screen Monitoring a PLC program with the HMI A WN There are three ways for program monitoring in this operating area SHIFT ALARM J p c PLC bone WW AS VL JOG PLC status display
99. 70EM R variable name file rparan_nanme txt 7S5ervice planner task name file svc_tasks txt 8 Enter the folder and the default startup screen and machine logo files are placed in the folder Hane Type Length E B OEM machine logo ntbhico bnp 2 DEM start up splash screen startup bnmp 9 Press this softkey to replace the default machine logo file with your own machine logo file Paste 10 Press these two keys to restart the HMI You can see your own machine logo in the follow ing operating area ra wM 15 35 26 M gee 2015702708 NC MPF g Reset ROY Position Rep of fset MX1o ORG Cie memes ln D e Axis feedrate MZIGO 0 AGB 0 008 mn F 0 000 70 0 000 mm min S14 a i1 G566 6 G64 Act val Work WCS Act val Ag Hach MCS bez perj oo ooo doo iae Note To restore the default SIEMENS logo display delete the customized bitmap file mtbico bmp from the control system Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 115 9 4 Creating user cycles The control system is integrated with standard Siemens cycles If necessary you can also create your own cycles To create a customized cycle you must prepare the files shown below e User cycle file e Extended user text file e User cycle alarm file e User cycle softkey index file e User cycle parameter file e User cycle bitmap file 9 4 1 Creating the extended user text file The
100. 999 0 0 300 Nms r Float IM T U tation speed lower 00 ad Description Sets the P gain of the speed controller before the adaptation speed range This value corresponds to the basic setting of the P gain of the speed controller without adaptation p1462 Speed controller integral time 100000 0 20 00 ms Float IM T U adaptation speed lower 0 Description Sets the integration time of the speed controller before the adaptation speed range This value corresponds to the basic setting of the integral time of the speed controller without adaptation Torque limit upper motoring 2000000 Nm Float IM T U 1000000 0 00 00 Description Sets the fixed upper torque limit or the torque limit when motoring Note Negative values when setting the upper torque limit 01520 lt 0 can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrollable fashion p1520 The maximum value depends on the maximum torque of the connected motor Dependency p1521 Torque limit lower regenerative 1000000 Nm Float IM T U 20000000 00 00 Description Sets the fixed lower torque limit or the torque limit when regenerating Note Positive values when setting the lower torque limit 01521 gt 0 can result in the motor accelerating in an un controllable fashion p1521 The maximum value depends on the maximum torque of the connected motor Dependency p1520 bin Description Setting for activating de activating the
101. A a a a GO P ee ee ie 5 4 3 a 2 oo 1 a fct 1 h 1 _ Decoded M signals MO to M99 Note The signals are output for the duration of a PLC cycle DB2500 M functions from NCK channel r 2 NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit4 Bito Dynamic M functions Dynamic M functions M15 M8 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 213 Dynamic M functions Dynamic M functions 1 As the PLC user you must generate basic functions yourself from the dynamic M functions 2 The basic program decodes dynamic M functions MO to M99 Transferred T functions DB2500 T functions from NCK channel r NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bito 2000 T function 1 DINT 2004 2005 J ooo O 2008 J oo O 2007 Transferred M functions DB2500 M functions from NCK channel r NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit4 Bito M function 1 DINT ion 3 Extended address M function 4 byte Transferred S functions DB2500 S functions from NCK channel r NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bitz itt Bito 4000 S function 1 REAL DINT 4004 Extended address S function 1 byte 4008 S function 2 REAL 4012 Extended address S function 2 byte e s020 Commissioning Manual 214 6FC5397 4EP10 0
102. A0 20 6FX3002 5CL01 1AD0 3 6FX3002 5CL01 1AF0 5 6FX3002 5CL01 1AHO T 6FX3002 5CL01 1BA0 10 6FX3002 5CL01 1BF0 15 6FX3002 5CL01 1CA0 20 6FX3002 5CL11 1AD0 3 6FX3002 5CL11 1AF0 5 6FX3002 5CL11 1AHO T 6FX3002 5CL11 1BA0 10 6FX3002 5CL11 1BF0 15 6FX3002 5CL11 1CA0 20 6FX3002 5BL02 1AD0 3 6FX3002 5BL02 1AF0 5 6FX3002 5BL02 1AHO T Bi 6FX3002 5BL02 1BA0 6FX3002 5BL02 1BFO 6FX3002 5BL02 1CA0 MOTION CONNECT 300 incremental SINAMICS V70 to incremental 6FX3002 2CT10 1AD0 encoder cable encoder interface of the motor 6Fx3002 2CT10 1AFO 6FX3002 2CT10 1AHO i 6FX3002 2CT10 1BA0 2 6FX3002 2CT10 1BF0 6FX3002 2CT10 1CA0 Drive Bus trailing cable PPU analog spindle interface to Siemens inverter or third party drive with analog input MOTION CONNECT 300 power cable SINAMICS V70 FSA to motor SINAMICS V70 FSB FSC to motor MOTION CONNECT 300 brake cable SINAMICS V70 to motor holding brake interface Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 2 _ Length m MOTION CONNECT 300 absolute en _ SINAMICS V70 to absolute 6FX3002 2DB10 1AD0 coder cable encoder interface of the motor 6FXx3002 2DB10 1AFO 6FX3002 2DB10 1AHO are i 6FX3002 2DB10 1BA0 6FX3002 2DB10 1BFO 6FX3002 2DB10 1CA0 Note The MOTION CONNECT 300 cable spindle setpoint cable and Drive Bus trailing cable given above are suitable for use in drag chains For more information on how to lay cables properly in drag chains see Section No
103. A4 08 2015 27 Horizontal MCP Note All vertical MCP versions have the same outline dimensions Commissioning Manual 28 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Mounting the PPU and MCP with the companion clamps Use the companion clamps 8 for PPU161 2 10 for PPU160 2 6 for the horizontal MCP and 8 for the vertical MCP to fix the PPU and MCP to the cabinet panel You can find the mounting position marks black triangles on the back of the PPU and MCP See the mounting illustration below The following figures show all mounting position marks on the back of the PPU and the MCP They also show distances between a clamp and the edge of the PPU or MCP and between two holes of a clamp to make a hole for fixing the screw of a clamp Horizontal PPU and MCP 1m Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 29 Vertical PPU and MCP 222 45 67 198 293 Paar p Hetil ane fea inc konl anc tex 1 2 tes 112v Fca TeceecceceTisscscssscse y 200 E ano B 220 3 2000 E 200 Op i EEIT 3101 sn reJ 321 o 3 1 2 3 402 an2 fosl 4122 ior 4an2 o a1 X301 DISTRIBUTED YO 603 ena fo
104. ATA contains the configuration data setup The setup will install the configuration data for SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED to your PC The configuration data consist of the Siemens examples and the user documents Note For more information about the connection of the filter fuse circuit breaker and braking resistor see Section the drive and motor Page 67 Note Non Siemens products This document contains recommendations relating to non Siemens products The fundamental suitability of the non Siemens products is familiar to us It goes without saying that equivalent products from other manufacturers may be used Our recommendations are to be seen as helpful information not as requirements or dictates We cannot accept any liability for the quality and properties features of non Siemens products 3 Mounting 7 oy ers Danger to life when live parts are touched Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched e Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job e Always observe the country specific safety rules Before installing or removing the components of the control system make sure that the system is disconnected from the mains 7 Noy esi Death or serious injury from fire or electric shock If the equipment operates in an area subject to inflammables or combustibles water or corrosion hazards it contains high risk of fire or electric shock The fire or electric shock may lead to death or serio
105. B In case of any problems with respect to the licensing status of your control system contact Siemens service personnel Set the licensed options e For the additional axes enter 1 or 2 in the setting column and press the following key e For the other options press the following key to select Press this softkey to restart the NCK so that the licensed options are activated Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 6 7 Loading system languages You can load a new system language or update an existing language on the control system Siemens will provide each language in the form of an archive file The file name format is as follows 808_lang_ lt LANG gt _04060200yyy arc Where lt LANG gt stands for the language code for example lt chs gt for Chinese lt eng gt for English yyy refers to the version code The following table provides different language codes for your reference Spanish e Finnish fin Swedish a o Hungarian Pt S S OS 1 Factory default system languages that are already loaded on the control system at delivery a e sp Russian u Operating sequence Proceed through the following steps to load a system language 1 Copy the system language file to a USB stick 2 Insert the USB stick into the USB interface at the front of the PPU N 3 Select the desired operating area on the PPU SHIFT ALARM 4 Press this softkey to open the start up archive window Archy
106. BA4 08 2015 Transferred D functions DB2500 D functions from NCK channel r NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bita Bit3 Bitz itt Bito 5000 D function 1 DINT 5004 Transferred H functions DB2500 H functions from NCK channel r NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bito H function 1 REAL DINT Extended address H function 1 byte H function 2 REAL Extended address H function 2 byte H function 3 REAL Extended address H function 3 byte A 7 2 8 NCK signals General signals to NCK DB2600 General signals to NCK r w PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 itt Bito ae ae level Acknowled Acknowled Braking ato position 0 to 3 ge ge along the EMERGEN EMERGEN contour in CY STOP CY STOP case of EMERGEN CY STOP Request Request INC inputs axis dis axis actual in mode tances to values signal range ac a CY OFF active S pez Po Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 215 Inch meas uring sys NC ready Drive ready Drives in cyclic oper NO Change counter for motion handwheel 1 Modification counter for motion handwheel 2 gt Change counter inch metric measuring system Signals at fast inputs and outputs DB2800 Signals at fast inputs and outputs r w PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 _ Bite Bits Bit4 Bt3 Bit2 Bit1
107. CP 1 Horizontal MCP 6FC5303 0AF35 0AA0 English _ toe GFC5303 0AF35 0CA0 Chinese Vertical MCP with an 6FC5303 0AF35 2AA0 English override switch forthe I FF 6FC5303 0AF35 2CA0 Chinese spindle 7 AGS Vertical MCP with a 6FC5303 0AF35 3AA0 English reserved slot for the 6FC5303 0AF35 3CA0 Chinese handwheel A IS MCP connection 1 for connecting cable the MCP to the PPU Mounting Horizontal clamps with MCP 6 Screws Vertical MCP 8 pwdned 2 d o diadiod CEES it bodid e d dio dis ETE D neui DE TETE BAR Bae gag aoc Abs HAE Commissioning Manual 16 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Component Quantity piec Illustration Order number es 1 Pre printed saci MCP strip Mill lel bp ing BAC Blank strip pa 1 per A4 size qT User documen 1 Product Information for the MCP tation 2 3 Drives and motors Components in the drive package Component Quantity piec Outline dimen Rated output es sion Width x current A Height x Depth mm SINAMICS V70 80x 180x200 FSA 6SL3210 5DE12 4UA0 drive 6SL3210 5DE13 5UA0 100 x 180 x 220 FSB 6SL3210 5DE16 0UAO 6SL3210 5DE17 8UA0 6SL3210 5DE21 0UAO 140 x 260 x 240 FSC 6SL3210 5DE21 4UA0 6SL3210 5DE21 8UA0 Order number
108. Direct Ua displ gt control connect The following dialog pops up on the screen IP address 169 254 11 22 Subnet mask 255 255 60 6 an Start PLC Programming Tool on your PC and click this button in the navigation bar to open the T following dialog Communications Links Communications Setup Mone Address Double click the icon representing the PLC to i Double Click communicate with to Refresh Double click the interface icon to change communication parameters Double click the modern icon to setup the modem parameters or dial to stark modem communications Communication Parameters Remote Address 2 Local Address Module COM 1 Protocol PPI Transmission Aate Mode 11 bit Commissioning Manual 184 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 6 Double click the access point symbol and the following Set PG PC Interface dialog is dis OTe Address D played Set PG PC Interface Access Path LLDP DCP PNIO Adapter Info Access Point of the Application PLC Programming Tool Intel R 82579LM Gigabit Network Con Standard for PLC Programming Tool Interface Parameter Assignment Used Intel R 82579LM Gigabit Network Connect Properties in o Diagnostics a 82579LM or Network C PC Adapter Auto 1 2 rn WT F Parameter assignment of your NDIS F with TCP IP protocol RFC 1006 Interfaces Add Remove Select TCP IP with the Ethernet card name of your
109. E EEEE ceantanweaiwestatacansewecncausucsasteameceaniieres A 7 2 3 a EET a Cc i E eae a E E reo er mre Terr ne mre Tiree rT me me re E A 7 2 4 Retentive data Ql C Aedes sctesiiesecccnsetetaurietalevusenctanciesecdvubotatdnvieseleugiadendadeeteasqbetebeaceetecauntedabdnceesaneuntotabtaues A 7 2 5 SETA 19 ee er ne re er oe ee ne re ee se ons Ree eer en eee ee ee ee A 7 2 6 Signals from to HMI cceccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesseneeesaaeees Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 5 A 7 2 7 A 7 2 8 A 7 2 9 A 7 2 10 A 7 2 11 A 7 2 12 A 7 2 13 A 7 2 14 A 7 2 15 A 7 3 A 7 4 A 7 4 1 A 7 4 2 A 7 4 3 A 7 4 4 A 7 4 5 A 7 4 6 A 7 4 7 A 7 4 8 A 7 4 9 A 7 4 10 A 7 4 11 A 7 4 12 A 7 4 13 A 7 4 14 A 7 4 15 A 7 4 16 A 7 4 17 A 7 4 18 A 7 4 19 A 7 4 20 A 7 4 21 A 7 4 22 A 7 4 23 A 7 4 24 A 7 4 25 A 7 4 26 A 7 4 27 A 7 4 28 A 7 4 29 A 7 4 30 A 7 4 31 A 7 4 32 A 7 4 33 A 7 4 34 A 7 4 35 A 7 5 1 A 7 5 2 A 7 6 1 A 7 6 2 A 8 A 8 1 A 8 2 A 8 3 A 8 3 1 A 8 3 2 Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel NCK signals ccccccceeeecceseeecceeeeeesessessaaeees Channel signals ccscsscecsseseeeeeesesseeeeeees AXiS Spindle SIQnals cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees PLC machine data cccccccccseeeeeeeeeseeeeeees Signals synchronized actions c c00ce Axis actual values and distance
110. E_AX_RA 1 to DWORD TIO_DENOM O 2 147 000 000 5 Denominator load gearbox 31060 DRIVE_AX_RA 1 1 to DWORD TIO_NUMERA 2 147 000 000 0 5 Numerator load gearbox 32000 MAX_AX_VEL 10 000 DOUBLE mm min rom CF O mm min 27 77 rpm Maximum axis velocity 32010 JOG_VELO_R_ 10 000 DOUBLE mm min rpm RE APID mm min 27 77 rpm Rapid traverse in JOG mode 32020 JOG VELO e Feed axis DOUBLE mm min rom RE 2 000 mm min e Spindle 100 rpm Jog axis velocity 32060 POS_AX_VEL 10 000 DOUBLE mm min rom RE O mm min 27 77 rpm Initial setting for positioning axis velocity IR Traversing direction not control direction 32110 ENC_FEEDBA 1 to 1 DWORD CK_POL 0 Sign actual value control direction 32200 POSCTRL_GAI 1 000000 0 000000 to DOUBLE User defined N O 5 2000 000000 Servo gain factor AL 0 Rated output voltage Commissioning Manual 158 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 No Name Defauit Activating 0 Rated motor speed 32300 MAX_AX_ACC Feed axis gt 0 001 DOUBLE mm s2 rev s2 CF EL 0 4 1 0 Spindle 0 2 10 3 4 2 778 Maximum axis acceleration 32450 Backlash o 0 0 DOUBLE Backlash 32700 ENC_COMP_E BOOL CF NABLE 0 Encoder spindle error compensation 34000 REFP_CAML_IS 1 BOOL RE _ACTIVE Axis with reference point cam 34010 REFP_CAM_DI BOOL RE R_IS_M
111. Extin LED Err 10 6 OO M_CK4 M_CKS Foot swit ALAR M18 A 7 4 30 Subroutine 58 MM_MAIN Purpose To use subroutine 58 you must have licensed the optional Manual Machine Plus function for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T Turning The subroutines 46 58 and 59 must be used together This subroutine is used to control the manual machine function after the manual machine interface is activated Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description S Traverse key Z minus S TK_Z_M BOOL Traverse key Z minus RAPID BOOL Rapid traverse key SP_CW BOOL Start signal spindle CW SP_CCW BOOL Start signal spindle CWW Commissioning Manual 270 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Name Type Cs Description S SP_STOP BOOL Stop signal spindle NC_START BOOL NC start signal NC stop signal ROY n ROV in Manual chine Mode Outputs Name i Type C Description S Not approaching the reference point on axis X user alarm 03 Not approaching the reference point on axis Z user alarm 04 Incorrect start in the spindle direction user alarm 09 JOG program timeout user alarm 11 Spindle rate not 100 user alarm 12 Spindle not being started user alarm 13 Feed rate 0 user alarm 14 Spindle direction change in a thread not allowed user alarm 16 me global variables Byte Signal Byte7 Byte6 Byte5__ Byte4 Byte3_ Byte2 Byte1 Byteo MB170 HMI lt gt MM Request MM HMI MM HMI for MM enabled started HMI startup
112. For more parameters about the servo drive see SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED HMI All parameters beginning with p are editable parameters for example p29000 All parameters beginning with r are read only parameters for example r0018 Effective Indicates the conditions for making parameterization effective Two conditions are possible e IM Immediately Parameter value becomes effective immediately after changing e RE Reset Parameter value becomes effective after repower on Can be changed Indicates the state in which a parameter is changeable Two states are possible e U Run Can be changed in the Running state when the enable signal is available The RDY LED indicator lights up green e T Ready to run Can be changed in the Ready state when the enable signal is missing The RDY LED indicator lights up red Note When judging the state of the drive according to the RDY LED indicator ensure that no faults or alarms exist Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 161 Data type usaf 8 bits without sign S U32 32 bits without sign Float Parameter list The table below lists parameters visible on the BOP Par No Max Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed 0020 Speed setpoint smoothed pm Float fs booo o Description Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U f charac teristic after the interpolator S
113. ID17 Reading and writing PLC variables PLC variables r w PLC interface Byte Bt7 Bite Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Bit4 Bito Offset 0 Offset 1 Offset 2 4094 Offset 4094 4095 Offset 4095 Note The programming engineer NCK and PLC is responsible for organizing structuring this memory area Every storage position in the memory can be addressed provided that the limit is selected according to the appropriate data format i e a DWORD for a 4byte limit a WORD for a 2byte limit etc The memory area is always accessed with the information about the data type and the position offset within the memory area A 7 2 13 Axis actual values and distance to go DB5700 Signals from axis spindle r 5704 NCK gt PLC interface Bye Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Bitt Bito ot Axis actual value REAL Axis distance to go REAL Note The axis actual values and distances to go can be separately requested e DB2600 DBX0001 1 Request axis actual values e DB2600 DBX0001 2 Request axis distances to go If the particular request is set then the NCK supplies these values for all axes A 7 2 14 Maintenance scheduler User interface Initial start data Byte Bt7 Bite Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Bit4 Bito io Interval 1 h C Reserved C tnterva 2 Commissioning Manual 230 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Interval 32 h 250 Time of first warning 32 h 252 Nu
114. INUS Approach reference point in minus direction 34020 REFP_VELO_S 5 000 0 DOUBLE mm min rom RE EARCH_CAM mm min 13 88 rpm Reference point approach velocity 34040 REFP_VELO_S 300 0 mm min DOUBLE mm min rpm RE EARCH_MARK 9 833 rpm ER 0 Creep velocity 34050 REFP_SEARC BOOL RE H_MARKER_R EVERSE 0 Direction reversal to reference cam 34060 REFP_MAX_M 20 0 DOUBLE mm degrees RE ARKER_DIST 0 Maximum distance to reference mark 34070 REFP_VELO_P 10 000 00 DOUBLE mm min rom RE OS mm min 27 77 rpm Reference point positioning velocity 34080 REFP_MOVE_ 2 0 DOUBLE mm degrees RE DIST O Reference point distance 34090 REFP_MOVE_ DOUBLE mm degrees RE DIST_CORR 0 Reference point offset absolute offset HIFT Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 159 No Name Default Activating Coe Electronic cam offset for incremental measuring system 34093 REFP_CAM_M DOUBLE mm ARKER_DIST O Reference cam reference mark distance S 0 3 Reference point for incremental system 34200 ENC_REFP_M 1 0to8 BYTE ODE O Referencing mode 34210 ENC_REFP_ST 0 to3 BYTE IM ATE 0 Adjustment status of absolute encoder 34220 ENC_ABS_TU 1 1 to 100000 DWORD RNS_MODULO 0 Modulo range for rotary absolute encoder 34230 ENC_SERIAL_ DWORD NUMBERJ O Encoder serial number 35010 GEAR_STEP_ BOOL RE CHANGE_ENA BLE Param
115. LM Gigabit Network Con Standard for PLC Programming Tool Interface Parameter Assignment Used Intel R 82579LM Gigabit Network Connect Properties Intel R 82579LM Gigabit Network PC Adapter Auto 1 4 rr j Parameter assignment of your ND S CP with TCP IP protocol RFC 1006 Interfaces Add Remove Select TCP IP with the Ethernet card name of your PC and click the OK button Note You can find the name of your Ethernet card in the local area connection status under Control Panel on your PC Enter the IP address for the control system in the communication setting window for exam ple Communication Parameters Remote Address 172 16 202 200 Note that the IP address entered here must be the same as that you have set on the PPU Double click this symbol in the communication setting window to establish a connection to the specified IP address Wait until the information of the connected control system is identified as follows and then the connection is ready IHH TCPIP gt Intel A 82579LM Gigab q 8080 PPU1 Gx 187 Establishing a connection via the RS232 interface Proceed through the following steps to establish a connection between the control system and a PC 1 SYSTEM 2 aA SHIFT ALARM PLC STEP 7 connect Connect OH 188 Connect the control system with the PC using an RS232 cable Select the desired operating area on the PPU P
116. MB171 Hmic gt mM ooo e Ce ee ee a D S SS S O O S mB173 HMisomm FPP MB174 HMI lt gt MM Cone Cone Cone angle angle 90 angle 90 180 270 180 MB175 HMI lt gt MM Direction Spindle key ena rotated bled MB176 HMI lt gt MM Working Groove Thread Drilling Arc ena Cutting Thread step ena enabled chaining enabled bled enabled enabled bled enabled Mei77 HMisomm FE d S S S o o Me a mra o o o S S e S S S S oS MB180 Recutting Recutting Recut the canceled performed thread or Relevant PLC machine data No Unit Range Description MD14512 19 7 1 to enable the manual machine function 0 to disable the manual machine function Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 211 Example for calling subroutine 58 DB4500 D6X1019 7 H_1_TK_F N_1_TK_N N_3 TK_P N_3 TKN P_h_RAPIC P_M_SP_CW P_M_SP_CCW P_hi_SP_STOP P_hi_NCSTART P_h_NCSTOP ONE ONE manma_active 2 2 hihi MAIN ALAR MSO ALAR MMS 1 ALARMI Z ALAR MSS ALAR MJ ALAR MSS ALAR MSG ALAR MMS Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 4 31 Subroutine 59 MM_MCP_808D Purpose To use subroutine 59 you must have licensed the optional Manual Machine Plus function for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T Turning The subroutines 46 58 and 59 must be used together Normally the spindle will be stopped after you press the NC reset key However when a manual machine is started you do not want t
117. MCP and HMI to the NCK interfaces and thus to activate the specific operating mode and control sequences It has the following main functions e Selecting specific operating mode e Selecting override e Transferring signals from the HMI to NCK interfaces for instance program control handwheel etc e Controlling the axis traversing signal according to the PLC machine data Local variable definition Inputs BYTE AFL_Key BOOL Define the Auxiliary Function Lock at the MCP key 1 ConHw_Key BOOL Define the Contour Handwheel at the MCP key Commissioning Manual 246 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 SimConHw_Key BOOL Define the simulation contour handwheel at the MCP key NegDir BOOL Define the negative direction for simulation contour handwheel at the MCP key SimConHw_Key INCvar_Key BOOL Define the INCvar at the MCP key 1 When the Auxiliary Function Lock function is active all the outputs caused by auxiliary functions like T M or S code are disabled only with the axis moving as usual Outputs NegDir BOOL Define the negative direction for simulation contour handwheel at the MCP LED SimConHw_LED INCvar_LED BOOL Define the INCvar at the MCP LED Relevant PLC machine data No Description S O 14512 20 0 Grey coded switch 0 spindle override controlled by the grey mode 1 spindle override con trolled by trigger user keys 14512 20 2 Activate the first additional axis 0 disable the additional axis control 1 e
118. MD351 10 1 gear stage change dp MZ1 6 660 6 668 Minwelocity Activate MD351 20 2 gear stage MD35140 2 Min velocity Min velodty tor gear stage change MD35 12011 Min velocity MD3514011 MSP 1 8 080 8 980 3613616 CTRLOUT_TYPE SS po 30134161 IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT B po 3024910 ENC_TYPE 1 po 31020 0 ENC_RESOL 2500 po 4 Test 31858161 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 1 po p n Output type of setpoint 5 Nane CTRLOUT_TYPE Unit Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 97 Activates the modified values Switches to MDA mode for program test Resets the value of the selected parameter to default Returns to the last step GB Cancels the last change to the parameter Proceeds to the next step Relevant machine data Unit Default Description value 30130 0 CTRLOUT_TYPE 0 Output type of setpoint 30134 0 IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT Setpoint output is unipolar 302400 ENC_TYPE Encoder type of actual value sensing actual position value 3102010 ENC_RESOL f 2048 Encodderliines per revolution 310501 5 DRIVE_AX_RATIO DENUM 1 Denominator load gearbox 31060 1 5 DRIVE_AX_RATIO NUMERA 1 Numerator load gearbox 32020 rpm 32100 3211010 32260 0 pm Rated motor speed 34200 0 ENC_REFP_MODE 3421010 0 Adjustment status of absolute encoder _TURNS_ i 0 Encoder serial number 35010 0 Parameterize gear stage change 35100 rom Maximum spindle speed
119. MOTICS S 1FL6 ooo 1FL6042 1AF61 0001 noe ass 1FL6044 1AF61 0001 e Treoin 8 1FL6064 1AC61 0001 SIMOTICS S 1FL6 Servo Motors Installation Guide 1 For more information about order numbers see motor order number explanation described later in this section Commissioning Manual 18 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Motor rating plate SIMOTICS S 1FL6 3 Servo Motor 1P 1FL6067 1AC61 0AH1 1S sedans Mn 9 55 Nm in 5 9 Ae jnn 2000 r min ais i Mo15 Nmllo8 8 Ae inmax 3000r mi e Un 206 V Pes s H16 6 kg e PN2 kW Th CL 1 ID 31 ENCODER INC 251 500 ppf BRAKE 74V KE 2aVC kere SiamansStandefd Moin Maden Crina D 0 Oh WY 9 Rated power 00000 OW CO Motor type Rated current Order number Encoder type and resolution Holding brake Serial number Thermal class Motor ID Rated torque Degree of protection Weight Stall torque Motor operating mode Maximum speed OEQOOHO OPAOoeOOL0 000000 Rated voltage Stall current Rated speed Explanation of motor order numbers Data position of the order 10 11 12 13 114 15 16 ea Order number sd number Sent Pa mm CT fo fe S l pm oj ET Pp cm fo fo TT Tt f Stalltoque TT TE ET l T mo L eo e e oao 4Nm SH65 SH65 mee TPE 6 Nm SH65 22 Nm SH90 3 5 Nm SH45 8 Nm SH65 30 Nm SH90 mms PP 40 Nm SH90 15 Nm SH65 w a a Naturalcooing S J ET lS S Commissionin
120. Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Upload You can back up a PLC application from the permanent memory of the control system using PLC Programming Tool or a USB stick To upload a PLC application using PLC Programming Tool proceed as follows 1 Establish the communication between the control system and PLC Programming Tool You can establish the connection by using the following methods e Establishing a connection via the Ethernet interface Page 184 e Establishing a connection via the RS232 interface Page 188 2 Select from the main screen menu as follows or click the toolbar button to create a new and empty PLC application EE PLC Programming Tool D SINUMERIK 808D 808D turning ptp EQ File Edit View PLC Debug Tools Windows Help i Mew N Ctrl N a Y Open Ctri 0 Close Save Ctrl Save As 3 Select from the main screen menu as follows or click the toolbar button A to start the up load PLC Programming Tool Projectl SIMATIC LAD EQ File Edit View PLC Debug Tools Windows Help il New Ctrl N z Open Ctrl 0 Close Save Ctrl Save As Import Export Net Upload N Ctrl U Download Ctrl D ok 4 Click this button to proceed directly You can also select the checkbox for data blocks to include the actual values of the data blocks and then click this button W Data Blocks only actual values Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 195 5 T
121. NC Outputs Name Type Description S BOOL Cooling control output C_LED BOOL Cooling output status display Assigned global variables COOLon MB150 0 Coolant on off status Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 44 SM0 COOLING 0 C_outhao 4 DB1000 08 1 2 C_LEDPDB1100 0B 1 2 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 255 A 7 4 18 Subroutine 45 LUBRICAT control of lubricate Purpose Subroutine 45 is used to control the lubrication according to specific time interval and duration independent of the distance that the axis has travelled Meanwhile a manual button is available to start the lubrication and you can configure that the lubrication starts automatically each time that the machine is powered up Normally lubricating starts automatically and cyclically according to specified time interval Lintv and operates for a specific time Ltime at each cycle Lubrication stops in case of an Emergency Stop lubrication motor overload low lubricant level This subroutine can activate following alarms e Alarm 700020 lubrication motor overload e Alarm 700021 low lubricant level Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description WORD Lubricating time interval WORD Lubricating output time Outputs Name Type Description S BOOL Lubricating output L_LED BOOL For lubricating status display Assigned global variables Hu e Timer for the lubricating time intervals
122. PC and click the OK button Note You can find the name of your Ethernet card in the local area connection status under Control Panel on your PC T Enter the IP address for the control system that displays in the above link setup dialog in the communication settings dialog Communication Parameters Remote Address 169 254 11 22 y DoubleClick 8 Double click this symbol in the communication setting window to establish a connection to the to Refresh specified IP address Wait until the information of the connected control system is identified as follows and then the connection is ready IHH TCPIP gt Intel F 82579LM Gigab 8080 PPU1 Gx Establishing a network connection Proceed through the following steps to establish a network connection I Connect the control system with the local network using an Ethernet cable N 2 Select the desired operating area on the PPU 3 Press this key to view the extended softkeys Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 185 Service network Save 186 Enter the main screen of the service control options through the following softkey opera tions 1y Serv Service displ control Press this softkey to enter the window for the network configuration Note make sure the following vertical softkey is deactivated Direct connect Configure the network as required in the following window Hetwork configuration Local data Protocol TCP
123. POWER ON power off on for all components Upgrade firmware to the latest version Contact the Hotline Module booting was interrupted several Carry out a POWER ON power off on times As a consequence the module After switching on the module reboots from boots with the factory setting the valid parameterization if available Possible reasons for booting being inter Restore the valid parameterization rupted Examples e Power supply interrupted e Carry out a first commissioning save carry e CPU crashed out a POWER ON switch off switch on e Parameterization invalid Load another valid parameter backup e g l l l from the memory card save carry out a After this fault is output then the module is POWER ON switch off switch on booted with the factory settings Note If the fault situation is repeated then this fault is again output after several interrupted boots For active PC master control no sign of Contact the Hotline life was received within the monitoring time The drive integrated Safety Integrated Carry out a POWER ON power off on for SI function on the Control Unit CU has all components detected an error and initiated an STO Upgrade software Replace the Control Unit The reception of setpoints from the Drive Restore the bus connection and set the con Bus interface has been interrupted troller to RUN e Bus connection interrupted e Controller switched off e Controller s
124. Point excep An exception occurred during an operation Carry out a POWER ON power off on for tion with the Floating Point data type all components Reaction OFF2 Upgrade firmware to later version Acknowledgement POWER Contact the Hotline ON F1002 Internal software An internal software error has occurred Carry out a POWER ON power off on for error all components Reaction OFF2 Upgrade firmware to the latest version Acknowledgement Contact the Hotline IMMEDIATELY Commissioning Manual 170 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 F1003 Acknowledgement delay when accessing the memory Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F1015 Internal software error Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement POWER ON F1018 Booting has been interrupted several times Reaction NONE Acknowledgement POWER ON F1030 Sign of life failure for master control Reaction OFF3 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F1611 SI CU Defect de tected Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F1910 Drive Bus Setpoint timeout Reaction OFF3 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F1911 Drive Bus clock cycle synchronous operation clock cycle failure Reaction OFF Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A memory area was accessed that does e Carry out a POWER ON power off on for not return a READY all components Contact the Hotline An internal software error has occurred Carry out a
125. RESET SPINDLE SPINDLE SPINDLE ersing key START STOP RIGHT STOP LEFT 1x DBB4 Key 21 Axis trav Key 19 Axis trav RAPID Axis trav Key 15 4x gt z lt 2 DBB8 i ae Feed override value in Gray code po Spinde override value in Gray code To the MCP Byte Bit7 Bte Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bitz Bt4 Bito SINGLE BLOCK DBBO M01 PROGRAM MDA AUTO REF JOG HAND TEST POINT WHEEL DBB1 Key 7 TAIL INT EXT CHUCK TOOL COOLANT LAMP ROV STOCK CHANGE DBB2 100 INC 10 INC 14 INC Key12 Key11 Key 10 Key9 ___ Key8 Axis trav Key 13 CYCLE CYCLE RESET SPINDLE SPINDLE SPINDLE ersing key START STOP RIGHT STOP LEFT 1x DBB4 Key 21 Axis trav Axis trav Axis trav Key 15 4x gt Z z Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 205 pps tt SEG LED I peeo tt SEG LED 1 To ensure the correct display of the active tool number make sure that you set Bit 4 and Bit 5 to 1 2 You can set only values 0 to 9 for each 7 segment LED LED1 and LED2 A 7 2 2 Reading Writing NC data Reading writing NC data Job DB1200 Reading writing NC data r w PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 Bite6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bito Write varia Start ble Number of variables DB1200 Reading writing NC data r w 1203 PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bt7 Bite6 Bit5 Bit4 Bt3 Bit2 Bit4 Bito 1000 Variable index 1001 Area number rea number aooe o O Reading
126. S 1 AA 126 H H You can edit a PLC user alarm by using the following two methods e Editing via the USB e Editing via the HMI Reference point es Commissioning Manual 280 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Editing a PLC user alarm via the USB Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT 5 Sys 2 Press this softkey a data EHHI data 3 Locate the HMI data folder and then open it with the following key 4 Locate the PLC alarm text folder and then open it through the same method as the above Hane Type Length bi ea 5 alcu_chs txt 5 alcu_deu txt B 5 alcu_ptb txt 5 alcu_rus txt 5 Copy the PLC alarm text in the desired language by pressing this softkey Copy g 6 Press this softkey and then paste the copied alarm text via the following softkey Paste 7 Connect the USB stick with your PC find the PLC alarm text that is downloaded and then open it with the WordPad laj kd alcu_eng txt WordPad seal Home View o E Courier New via la a lE Ell lE s p E3 P aliia Paste B Z U abe X le A 5 Picture Poea Daang meet a Clipboard Font Paragraph Insert Editing i ms Hl wy Pet ee 1 i FERENCE E 1 ee ec 5 i ae Got 700000 0 0 ENG 50 f 700001 0 0 User alarm 02 50 700002 0 0 User alarm 03 50 700003 0 0 User alarm 04 50 t 700004 0 0 User alarm 05 50 7 700005 0 0 User alarm 06 50 700006 0 0 User alarm O07 50 700007
127. SF_INI OB 3303 SP_ACT DB3304 CTAL_E DB3306 Choose to download the PLC application when the PLC is in the run mode or in the stop mode Download Downloading the program during RUN mode should only be performed by authorized personnel who understand IN the limitations of downloading a program in RUN mode with respect to system operation Downloading the program during RUN mode can result in unexpected system operation causing serious injury death and or damage to equipment Place the PLC in STOP mode Download in Run Mode Cancel Caution You are recommended to download the PLC application when the PLC is in the stop mode Downloading the PLC application when the PLC is in the run mode can cause machine damages or even human injuries 5 Start the download which will take several seconds OK 6 The download finishes when the following message appears Then click this button to end your operations PLC Programming Tool 1 Download was Successful Note If you have chosen to download when the PLC is in the stop mode you can place the PLC at the run mode again with PLC Programming Tool click the button gt Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 193 To download a machine manufacturer s PLC application with a USB stick perform as follows 1 2 3 SYSTEM A N 4 SHIFT ALARM 5 6 Copy T mo 808D data 8 Paste 9 v OK 194 Select from the main screen menu as fol
128. SIEMENS SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken A WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken AXCAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The product system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of id
129. Select the desired operating area on the PPU SHIFT ALARM 3 Press this key to view the extended softkeys 4 Enter the main screen of the service control options through the following softkey operations 1y Serv Service displ control eamvicE 5 Press this softkey to enter the window for the network configuration network Note make sure the following vertical softkey is not selected Direct connect 6 Configure the network as required in the following window Hetwork configuration Local data Protocol TCP IP DHCP Yes o Q Cmpt nane HOHAHE_HCU IP address 176 16 2h2 26H Subnet mask 255 255 255 Gateway You can configure DHCP with the following key Note If you select No for DHCP you must enter the IP address which must belong to the same network as that of your PC and subnet mask manually Commissioning Manual 288 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 7 Press this softkey to save the configuration If you select Yes for DHCP you also need to Save restart the control system to activate the network configuration 8 Start the AMM on your PC 9 Select the new network connection option in the following dialog Selecting connection EB Please select the connection which you want to establish Available connections rect Lonnecononidied 254 11 47 Direct Connecton 169 254 11 22 Control information Direct Connection 192 168 215 1 Control IP 16974 Control n
130. UMICUOMNS 5 siicecande cede tsncawsaensapenadsanceaaazdssdsdnadenemensadensdssncedaasdsdsds beadenemensadennessnecdanzdsuies beadenemensanennessncecanzdsuiesas 1 1 Fundamental safety instructions ccccccccccseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeseeeseeseeeeeesaneeessneeesaaeees 1 1 1 General Safety instructions cccccccccssececceescecceuseccauececceeeecseeeessueesseuecesseueeessaeeessegeeessageesssgesessageeenas 1 1 2 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices ESD cccecccccsecececeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeseesaeeeeesaeeessaeeeeeaees 1 1 3 Mausa Se UNY esee E A EAE A ESSER 1 1 4 Residual risks of power drive SYSTEMS ccccccseecceseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesseeeesaanees 1 1 5 Residual risks during the operation of electric Motors ccceeccceseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeees 1 2 Caryng outof repas ats a pee ns ia oe stg erect ee de den yas A oe adc vee pss AEAEE RN EEEE SNEEN es essa 2 MCODS OF COIIV OMY PETETA E AT TA E T A TEE E T 2 1 VS I OWS IOW acts sasedsrescte seca eiyseeteegne aE aeei re aea a eiea ia nE aaraa 2 2 PPO AnA ME E or E ocd oe patassen teteee ones saeaetdsannen tees datencseees 2 3 DNOS ana MOO S ere E E E E A E A E 2 4 CADIC re E ETE uaeeleeteneanmeceeaeke 2 5 JOON ee E E E E ee ee eae ee ee ee een eee 3 MOUNUNO x oo cent camidonsnesagne assecetceseecdaceccetedecacenasesedecsesasecsdeesacenacesssccsestoesectnasanscanacanessne
131. Writing to the re movable data medium un successful A1032 All parameters must be saved A1045 Configuring data invalid A1920 Drive Bus Receive setpoints after To A1932 Drive Bus clock cycle synchronization miss ing for DSC A5000 Drive heat sink over temperature A7012 Motor temperature model 1 3 overtemperature A7576 Encoderless opera tion due to a fault active Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 The temperature of the control module Control Unit has exceeded the specified limit value The write access to the removable data medium was unsuccessful The parameters of an individual drive object were saved although there is still no backup of all drive system parameters The saved object specific parameters are not loaded the next time that the system powers up For the system to successfully power up all of the parameters must have been completely backed up An error was detected when evaluating the parameter files saved in the non volatile memory Because of this under certain circumstances several of the saved pa rameter values were not able to be ac cepted Output data of Drive Bus master set points received at the incorrect instant in time within the Drive Bus clock cycle There is no clock synchronization or clock synchronous sign of life and DSC is se lected Note DSC Dynamic Servo Control Cause The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverte
132. a holistic state of the art industrial security concept for the installation or machine You will find further information at this address http www siemens com industrialsecurity Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept 1 1 4 Residual risks of power drive systems The control and drive components of a drive system are approved for industrial and commercial use in industrial line supplies Their use in public line supplies requires a different configuration and or additional measures These components may only be operated in closed housings or in higher level control cabinets with protective covers that are closed and when all of the protective devices are used These components may only be handled by qualified and trained technical personnel who are knowledgeable and observe all of the safety instructions on the components and in the associated technical user documentation When assessing the machine s risk in accordance with the respective local regulations e g EC Machinery Directive the machine manufacturer must take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components of a drive system 1 Unintentional movements of driven machine components during commissioning operation maintenance and repairs caused by for example Hardware and or software errors in the sensors control system actuators and cables and connections Respo
133. a7 6 Digital input 42 95 3 Digital output 18 77 Digital input a3 Q54 Digital output so ogam fa fass pao 18 1 Digital input 455 6 Digital output a ee a es foonu 4 25 186 Digital input 50 1 Make sure that the current at pin 2 of X301 or X302 does not exceed the maximum current lout 0 25 A otherwise the controller could be damaged Connecting 7 Noy ers The 24 V power supply must be protective extra low voltage in accordance with EN60204 1 Section 6 4 PELV with M ground Note The 24 V output of X301 302 pin 2 comes from pins 47 to 50 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 47 Note Addressing ranges X301 IB3 IB4 IB5 QB2 QB3 X302 IB6 IB7 IB8 QB4 QB5 Note The connecting cable between the power source load current supply connection and associated reference potential M must not exceed the maximum permissible length of 10 m Digital inputs The diagram below shows you how to connect the connector pins of the digital inputs at interface X301 example You can connect connector X302 in the same way P240UTINT 24 VDC X301 Pin ra is recommended to use an I O 9 lt extension board to make the connection I 3 EE 4 i i l 26 1 24 V 4 M External power 3 ov supply 24 VDC Note When using an external power supply you must connect the 24 V permissible range 20 4 V to 28 8 V power supply for the digital outputs to all the four
134. ack lash ear start up archive 16 compensation o MCS Position Speed Help s M X 1 6 668 6 008 Y swima MD36100 SW limits MD36 pee ap MZ1 6 660 6 668 MSP1 6 668 6 668 36166 POS_LIMIT_MINUS 36116 POS_LIMIT_PLUS 1000000008 mn 6 lt tep Next 7 step Selects the next axis 6 Cancels the last change to the parameter Selects the previous axis Returns to the last step Activates the modified values O Proceeds to the next step Resets the value of the selected parameter to default Setting parameters No Name Sit Default value 36100 POS_LIMIT_MINUS 100000000 software limit switch 36110 POS_LIMIT_PLUS 100000000 software limit switch Commissioning Manual 100 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 9 2 Setting backlash compensation data In the case of axes spindle with indirect measuring systems mechanical backlash results in corruption of the traverse path causing an axis for example to travel too much or too little by the amount of the backlash when the direction of movement is reversed You can set the backlash compensation by configuring the parameter 32450 0 Softkey functions Ey a 09 47 14 REEPOINT 2615 62 89 Step Backlash Next Leadscrew O poe Last Set SW limit 11714 compensation err conp HCS Position Speed Help Axi amp MX 1 8 888 8 808 TE MZ1 8 800 B 080 AAT y G Activate MSP1 8 a00 8 908 n Backlash MD32450 4 Defaul
135. al bearing present up to 0 2 mm The permissible axial force can be approximately calculated using the following formula Fa 0 35 Fa Where Fa represents axial force and Fa radial force MA HYT E a r NST ah mf wN TX TT a a e eo Note 1FL6040 and 1FL609U have a 5 mm of shaft sheltered in sleeves and 1FL6060 has an 8 mm of shaft in sleeves Therefore the distances to flange in the above three figures begin respectively from 5 mm 8 mm and 5 mm Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 133 10 4 Cables 10 4 1 Drive Bus cable Drive Bus trailing cable for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Operation temperature static C 40 to 80 Operation temperature dynamic 25 to 80 C Shielding Minimum bending radius static 15 50 mm Minimum bending radius dynamic 155 mm Bending cycles 3000000 maximum acceleration 5 m s maximum horizontal speed 3 m s Oil resistance Limited mineral oil and fats resistance EN60811 2 1 fulfilled Flame retardant IEC60332 3 24 fulfilled IEC60332 1 1 to 1 3 fulfilled Certification 10 4 2 Technical data cables for the SINAMICS V70 servo system Parameter MOTION CONNECT 300 MOTION CONNECT 300 MOTION CONNECT 300 power cable encoder cable brake cable Jacket material Degree of protection motor side only Cross section of cores mm 4 x 1 5 for FSA 6x 0 22 4 x 0 25 4 x 2 5 for FSB FSC i Operation voltage V 600 1000
136. allow the remote operation monitoring of the HMI or forbid the remote access to the HMI SELECT Renote access right Select in HMI Pernit renote operation O 5 Set the behavior of the control system when it receives a remote access request Behavior for remote access confirmation 1 Confirmation dialog display duration ig Afterwards remote access is automatically Permitted O Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 291 Specify the duration of the following dialog displaying on the HMI Remote connection The following operations on the HMI are possible when this dialog appears x Press this softkey to reject the request Cancel J Press this softkey to permit the request OK 2 Use the following key to select the automatic response for the control system after the above dialog disappears with no softkey operations uf 6 Press this softkey to save the settings Starting stopping remote control Proceed through the following steps to start stop the remote control of the HMI 1 Start the AMM tool and establish an Ethernet connection to the control system see section Establishing an Ethernet connection Page 287 2 Click the J button in the toolbar or select from the main window menu as follows to start the re mote control ject active Bokara 4 ka Access MyMac Eiin menetin File EditenView Gonnection AARE xal ae amp By
137. ame not possible direct connection Remote display IP 169 254 11 22 Port 5900 This dialog can also be called with the button from the toolbar 10 The dialog for setting the new network connection appears Assign the parameters for a new network connection in this dialog Network connection settings B mE Available connections Contral IP control name i72 16 202 201 Fort ae Connection name Connection Password Jagon or SSH key file Remote monitor IP name 172 16 202 201 Same as the control Port 5400 Transmission mode OLAN Modem Delete Connection Save as new connection 11 Select the following button to save the settings Save as new connection 12 Select the following button and the AMM tool connects to the control system selected Connect Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 289 A 8 2 File management and transfer After an active Ethernet connection is established you can have a remote access to the control system s NC file system from your PC In this case you can easily manage the NC files with the AMM tool and transfer files between the control system and your PC we Access MyMachine P2P PC No project active File Edit View x fl File system of the PL Desktop a SINUMERIK 8 di 808D_Commissic J 808D_Commissi 808D_Commissic rae e08D_Commissic tae 808D_Diagnostic _ ci a su Connection Remote control Bookmarks Settings P
138. ameters for the additional axis milling Proceed as follows to set the parameters for an additional axis rotary axis SYSTEM Oo A SHIFT ALARM Search General HD HC basic list Search v OK Activate Note 1 10 Select the desired operating area on the PPU Open the channel machine data window through the following softkey operations Tal Hach Expert Channel MD data list HD Use this softkey or the cursor keys to search for the following machine data and assign the desired values e 20070 4 5 e 20080 4 A Open the general machine data window and set 19100 5 Press this key to return to the next higher level menu Open the basic machine data list Use this softkey or the cursor keys to search for 14512 USER_DATA_HEX 20 Select Bit2 by using this key and the cursor keys Press this softkey to confirm your input Press this softkey to activate the value changes Note that the control system restarts to ac cept the new values and the additional axis can be displayed in the system The factory default PLC program only supports one additional axis Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 151 A 2 3 Configuring the drive and motor Before starting the drive and motor configuration you must ensure the Drive Bus address is properly set p0918 via the drive BOP For more information about setting the Drive Bus address see section
139. and short circuit which will jeopardize personal safety and equipment e The drive must be directly connected with the motor It is not permissible to connect a capacitor inductor or filter between them The line supply voltage must be within the allowable range refer to the drive rating plate Never connect the line supply cable to the motor terminals U V W or connect the motor power cable to the line input terminals L1 L2 L3 Never wire up the U V W terminals in an interchanged phase sequence If the CE marking for cables is mandatory in some cases the motor power cable line supply cable and brake cable used must all be shielded cables For terminal box connection make sure that the clearances between non insulated live parts are at least 5 5 mm Route signal cables and power cables separately in different cable conduits The signal cables shall be at least 10 cm away from the power cables Cables connected may not come into contact with rotating mechanical parts Connecting the cable shields with the shielding plate To achieve EMC compliant installation of the drive use the shielding plate that is shipped with the drive to connect the cable shields See the following example for steps to connect cable shields with the shielding plate 4 Mount the shielding plate with two 2 Connect the line supply cable the power cable and the brake M4 screws cable Line supply cable Power cable Shielding plate
140. area 121 mo Sys data USB tea Press these two softkeys in succession Then select a user cycle file for example CYCLE100 with the following key Finally copy it with the following key Copy Press this softkey and then paste the file with the following Paste Length Importing the extended user text file SYSTEM MEDA SHIFT ALARM O Sys data gt USB O 868D data Note al Save the required file on a USB flash disk Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front of the PPU Select the desired operating area Press these two softkeys in succession Then select an extended user text file for example almc_eng txt with the following key Finally copy it with the following key Copy Press this softkey and access the folder HMI data gt Extended user text file Then paste the file with the following Paste After you import the cov com file sc com file alc_xxx txt file and almc_xxx txt file into the control a message appears prompting you to restart the HMI Then press the following key to restart the HMI so that the new data can be active v OK 122 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 9 4 8 Call the created user cycle After you transfer all the files necessary for your own cycle to the control system the cycle is created successfully Then you can use the cycle in the lt PROGRAM gt operating area Proceed a
141. as bitmap files bmp with a maximum size of 224 224 pixels in 16 colors The icon name must begin with an uppercase lowercase C and its length must not exceed 32 characters including the file extension e g CN1 bmp Note If 16 colors are not sufficient for the display you can also use 24 bit color depth bitmaps 9 4 7 Transferring the desired files to the control system Proceed as follows to transfer the required files to the control system Importing the cov com file and sc com file 1 Save the required file on a USB flash disk 2 Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front of the PPU 3 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM emcees 4 Press these two softkeys in succession FS data Then multi select the cov com and sc com files with the following key nm USB Finally copy them with the following key Copy gagp 5 Press this softkey and access the folder HMI data gt User cycle files FS data Replace the empty files with the following Paste a FaUser cycle bitmap file bnp FaUser cycle alarm file Calc txt B B User cycle parameter file sc conm Importing the user cycle alarm file 1 Save the required file on a USB flash disk 2 Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front of the PPU AN N 3 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM Commissioning Manual 120 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 D sys 4 O
142. as possible according to their weights and dimensions e Use webs to separate cables with different outer diameters e Keep cables untwisted in the drag chain Observing minimum bending radius requirements e Cables must be able to move without constraint especially in the bending radii of the chain e Observe the specified minimum bending radii Fixing cables e Make sure that cables in the drag chain are unattached and movable e Place the cable fixture in a dead zone at each end suitably far away from each end point of the moving parts Moving end PIIIIIIIID Fix the cable at the y moving parts O Fixed at each end 4 A FrrrrrrrrrA Ee SE ee ae Ee ER a ee eel c X Tie several cables Fixing end together Commissioning Manual 40 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 Connecting NOTICE Damage to the control system The high voltage components have strong interference on 24 VDC power supplies If the 24 VDC power supply is not isolated from high voltage components the control system may be damaged The 24 VDC protective extra low voltage must be generated as a protective extra low voltage with safe electrical isolation according to IEC 204 1 Section 6 4 PELV and grounded by with a PELV M signal connection to the central grounding point of the system 4 1 Interfaces on the PPU and MCP NOTICE Failing to connect PE terminals to the ground will cause safety problems The PE terminals on the PPU and MCP must
143. ase of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the system and or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly Note The components must be protected against conductive contamination e g by installing them in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54 according to IEC 60529 or NEMA 12 Assuming that conductive contamination at the installation site can definitely be excluded a lower degree of cabinet protection may be permitted For more information about residual risks of the components in a drive system see the relevant sections in the technical user documentation 1 1 5 Residual risks during the operation of electric motors The motors may be operated only when all protective equipment is used Motors may be handled only by qualified and instructed qualified personnel that knows and observes all safety instructions for the motors that are explained in the associated technical user documentation When assessing the machine s risk in accordance with the respective local regulations e g EC Machinery Directive the machine manufacturer must take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components of a drive system 1 Unintentional movements of driven machine components during commissioning operation maintenance and repairs caused by for example Hardware and or software errors in the sensors control system actuators and cables and connecti
144. ata gt list list gt H Before sence the Pena p1821 first set the drive parameter p10 3 when the drive is in servo off state Parameter A is accessible on the PPU through the following operations WN MD data Expert Drive o a IMD data ta list HD For detailed zte D aata about the drive parameters you can call the online help by pressing the following key on the corresponding drive parameter screen HELP 7 3 Setting basic parameters 7 3 1 Setting feed axis parameters You can set the axis specific machine data for each feed axis under this commissioning step Softkey functions 89 42 88 EA 2615 62 69 Last Drive config Step Set axis Next Referencing 1 E uration 6 14 parameters debugging MCS Position Speed Help Axis O MX 1 6 668 6 608 Activate the parameter changes HZ1 6 666 6 668 Set the selected par back to default ps weer ae Activate Undo Cancel the last parameter change MSP1 8 888 8 888 Axis velocity limit 36200 gt Max axis velocity 32000 Z De fault Rapid traversing JOG speed 3201 0 gt JOG speed 320 361366 CTRLOUT_TYPE 7 po Undo 36246 6 ENC_TYPE 1 po 3162616 ENC_RESOL 2500 po 31030 LEADSCREW_PITCH 18 mm po 31050 81 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 1 po p Output type of setpoint O Name CTRLOUT_TYPE Unit Next step Q Selects the next axis Cancels the last change to the parameter Selects the previous axis Returns to the last step
145. aw SIEMENS me 3 You can click the Readme button to read the indication information then close it and continue with Next or you can Skip the reading and click Next directly Product Notice Product notes display The product notes contain important information on installing and using this product Wie recommend you read these notes before installing Back Next gt Cancel 4 Accept the software license agreement and continue with Next License agreements Please read the following license agreement carefully Please note This software i protected under German andor US American Copyright Laws and provisions in International treaties Unauthorized reproduction and distribution of this software or parts of it is lable to prosecution Ik will be prosecuted according to criminal as well as civil law and may result in severe punishment andor damage claims Please read all license provisions applicable to this software before installing and using this software You will find them after this note If You purchased this software on a CD marked as Tral version or together with another licensed software for you this software may only be used for test and validation purposes according to the provisions of this Trial License stated after this note 4 prerequisite for this kind of use is the f accept the conditions of this license agreement f reject the conditions of this license agreement Back cancel
146. ax tool number of the turret e Alarm 700024 Wrong setting of the max tool number for the turret e Alarm 700025 No turret positioning signals available e Alarm 700026 Tool positioning time out Timing diagram Turret change command ee o Y o Y Y 0 Turret change completed ee Oe 0 Turret CW for tool change 0 Turret CCW for turret clamping 0 _ _ _ Commissioning Manual 262 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Local variable definition Inputs Names Type Description S WORD Number of tool on the turret only 4 6 are permitted WORD Turret clamping delay time unit 0 1 s WORD Monitor time for searching for a tool unit 0 1s Outputs Name Type Description S O Assigned global variables Relevant PLC machine data No Unit Description o 14510 20 Max tool number 4 or 6 14510 21 Turret clamping time 14510 22 Monitoring time for tool searching 14512 17 0 ed Activating the turret function of a turning machine Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 263 Example for calling subroutine 51 Network 3 Turret control MD HEX_17_0 Turret HED_T A 7 4 25 Subroutine 52 TURRET2_BIN_T turret with binary coding function Purpose Subroutine 52 is used to control the turret with encoder positioning signals and function of dual direction adjacent tool change Contact the turret vendor for the working theory and the timing diagram of a tool change Durin
147. bar button to create a new and empty PLC application USB iming Tool D SINUMERIK 808D 808D turning ptp Bc aa iew PLC Debug Tools Windows Help Ctrl S 9 med PLC F mming Tool DASINUM 808D turning ptp File Edit View PLC Debug Tools Windows Help 10 Click this button or double click the pte file in the following dialog It will take several sec onds to import the pte file 2 3 NPort GO a gt Computer gt Removable Disk F v 4 Search Removable Disk F Organize v New folder a Gil A Name Date modified Type Libraries Ea Documents a Music lee Pictures E Videos _ plc_app pte 3 4 2015 11 21AM __PTE File J amp E Computer Ge SYSTEM C 9 a Data D es Removable Disk GP I cn00l siemer 4 m j File name plc_app pte v Export files pte ard z I Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 197 11 After successfully importing the PLC application you can view the import results Network 1 turning or milling Setting for the following program OME Flag with defined ONE signal T_or_M M255 0 0 turning 1 milling Hetwork 2 Initialization Shi 1 PLi_ini EN SCAN 1ST Shi 1 First PL cycle 1 and following cycle 0 Network 3 Emergency control SMO O EMis_ STOP EN Compare You can compare the project in PLC Programming Tool with the project on the control system by performing th
148. be connected to the ground otherwise it will cause safety problems and unexpected system conditions Interfaces on the PPU PPU161 2 PPU160 2 Legend Interface Description PPU back X100 X101 X102 Digital inputs X200 X201 Digital outputs X21 FAST I O X301 X302 Distributed I O 6 X10 Handwheel inputs Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 41 S000000 PPU front Interfaces on the MCP Legend Note X60 X54 X2 X130 X126 X30 X1 Spindle encoder interface Analog spindle interface RS232 interface Ethernet interface Drive Bus interface USB interface for connection with the MCP Power supply interface 24 VDC power supply Slot for the system CompactFlash Card CF card PE terminal for connection with the ground USB interface Interface X10 a al E o al Description USB interface for connection with the PPU PE terminal for connection with the ground Reserved hole for plastic tie which is used to fix the USB cable connecting the PPU with the MCP Reserved hole for fixing the USB cable connecting the PPU and the MCP The two kinds of vertical MCP with a reserved hole for the handwheel and with an override switch for the spindle have the same mechanical interfaces design for the USB cable PE terminal and reserved hole for fixing the USB cable on the back The illu
149. be used with the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED controller The SINAMICS V70 is available in three frame sizes FS including FSA FSB and FSC Interfaces on the SINAMICS V70 FSA with detachable terminal blocks Readiness _ Communication LED seMens og Basic Operator Panel BOP X6 Safe torque off connector RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE PRESENT FOR UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER DISCONNECTION FROM POWER SUPPLYI SEE INSTRUCTIONS X6 Control power connector DANGER X7 Holding brake connector Line supply connector Motor power connector Braking resistor connector Shielding plate X9 Encoder X10 Drive Bus X11 Drive Bus Grounding terminals interface interface interface Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 57 Interfaces on the SINAMICS V70 FSB FSC with screw terminals Readiness LED Grounding terminal Cable clamp Basic Operator Panel BOP Line supply terminals Motor power terminals DANGIEIR RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZAR DOUS VOLTAGE PRESENT FOR UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER am DISCONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS fale Haenen A g l BRA Whe BE RP MA WAI Braking resistor connector Cable clamp Shielding plate interface Grounding terminals Note For more information about the connection of the X10 and X11 see Section Interfaces on the SIMOTICS S 1FL6 motor g Power connector Incremental encoder AY connector
150. ble Commissioning Manual 14 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 6 Initial commissioning NOTICE Plugging or unplugging the SD card will cause startup failure Do not plug or unplug the SD card during startup otherwise the drive will fail to start up NOTICE Firmware damage due to drive power off during data transfer Switching off the 24 VDC power supply for the drive during data transfer from the SD card to the drive can cause damage to the drive firmware e Do not switch off the drive power supply when the data transfer from the SD card to the drive is in process NOTICE Existing setting data may be overwritten by the setting data on the SD card during startup e When a drive is switched on with an SD card containing user setting data the existing setting data on the drive will be overwritten When a drive is switched on with an SD card containing no user setting data the drive will automatically save the existing user setting data onto the SD card Before starting up the drive with an SD card check whether the SD card contains user setting data Otherwise the existing data on the drive may be overwritten Note e Make sure that all cables are correctly connected and the connected servo system is in good condition with no faults before switching on e Prior to commissioning or operation read carefully Safety instructions Page 7 and Operating the SINAMICS V70 Basic Operator Panel BOP Page 138 e See Chapter
151. bout how to generate a license key via the Web License Manager refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual Operating sequence N 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM gt 2 Press this key to view the extended softkeys 3 Open the dialog for entering the license key through the following softkey operations Serv y License P displi E a pkey 4 Enter the license key generated by the Web License Manager in the following dialog Enter the licence key to activate the option The option is activated after Restartt CF card serial number SPG261206160639 Order Ho of the NCU module 6FC5612 16746 6A J 5 Press this softkey to confirm your entry OK Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 83 Options HCK reset po 84 Press this softkey to enter the window of available options You can find the licensing status in this window for example Option Set Licensed Additional axis basic 6FCS888 GAK70 8YB8 veo 2 A T m e S Y GRESETD G77 GE m e m A E b If you have licensed one or two additional axes you can find a figure of 1 or 2 in the col umn of licensing status For other licensed options a i symbol displays in this column Note The last option displayed in this window indicates the variant information and the licens ing status of your control system for example System software PPUI6x Turning Export 6FCS5812 1GYxx xYA
152. bout the mounting conditions see Section Technical data servo motors 3 3 1 Mounting orientation and outline dimensions Mounting orientation The SIMOTICIS S 1FL6 motor supports flange mounting only and it can be used in the following three types of construction IM BS IM V1 IM V3 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 35 Note When configuring the IM V3 type of construction pay particular attention to the permissible axial force weight force of the drive elements and the necessary degree of protection Motor dimensions Shaft height 45 mm with incremental encoder unit mm b without brake Center hole b1 with brake C type M6x16 ane Version with feather key 60 08 A aaa a ee a ae EE f 0 04 B C A i AAN 2 o S ioe ie x gt WILMA fa co PN Q a with brake K without brake K1 with brake Stall torque kA an o 154 5 i 169 5 35Nm 2015 248 2165 Shaft height 45 mm with absolute encoder unit mm b without brake Center hole b1 with brake C type M6x16 f 0 08 A Version with feather key 0 03 O19 h6 K without brake K1 with brake Stal torque kA ebp hm 203 5 ssm 204 os Commissioning Manual 36 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Shaft height 65 mm with incremental encoder unit mm b without brake b1 with brake Center hole C type M8x16 P AL i v Ta A os ILLY Ah me Dill m as 80 036
153. by 4 Double word size variables 4 bytes are always saved on offsets that are divisible by 4 Notes on the PLC interface signal address representation Currently PLC interface signal addresses are represented by the V structure on the HMI while the manual shows them by the DB structure See the following table for the relationship between the two representations V Structure DB Structure v38000002 1 DB3800 DBX2 VB38000002 DB3800 DBB2 VW38000002 DB3800 DBW2 Double Word VD38000004 DB3800 DBD4 Double word Commissioning Manual 204 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 2 1 Signals from to the MCP The figure below shows the front view of the horizontal MCP for the turning variant of the control system Note that labels K13 K15 K19 and K21 are not included in the pre defined MCP insertion strips The figure includes these labels so that when you read the information in the following two tables you know which keys on the MCP it refers to T1 M1 T2 M2 T3 M3 T4 M4 T5 M5 T6 M6 E nm Bee cdouanr E eee x _ fii i fai E WHEEL Bal REF PUNT CHUEK INT EXT TALS Z RAAD Z E a oO E o o Heal a ES RDD 0an From the MCP From the MCP r Byte Bit7 BiG Bit4 Bt3 Bt2 B DBBO M01 PROGRAM MDA SINGLE AUTO REF POIN JOG TEST BLOCK T DBB1 Key 7 TAIL INT EXT CHUCK TOOL COOLANT LAMP STOCK CHANGE DBB2 100 INC 10 INC 14 INC Key12 Key 11 Key 10 DBB3 Axis trav Key 13 CYCLE CYCLE
154. canecessok EAE aE 3 1 Mounting the PPU and MOP aiaseceueentercncsacecaserscocncscetenereetatenceneetondurbetateentocsndctteteceeheanussaeetecesbecaceente ts 3 2 VIO CIVGINIG AMGNONI 6 ca sracesacrtustassindestunticta tsi dtedbetinstanaurdattentiente stm a a 3 2 1 Mounting orientation ANd clearance cccceccccsseccssececeececeueeceecesececeeessueeseeecensaeeseueessseeensesensueeseaess 3 2 2 Drill patterns ANd outline GIMENSIONS c cece ceccceecceeeece eee eeeese cece eeeeeeese ease eeseeeeseeesaeeseeeeseeesaeeseeetaeeeaes 3 2 3 Mounting Ne diVer i e whi rachonbiente ameaaabrniadecdsnt 3 2 4 Electrical cabinet GOSI OWN rciciesn ites caus ceicdmanawad en butielddwan inves doaa vnenan axed KUEN ECEE ORAE EPEAN LAENA ENOAR EN EENEN An E AREENA 3 2 4 1 Correct installation of fans 20 00 cccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaaeeessaeseesaeeessaeeeeeas 3 2 4 2 Correct installation of cooling units ccceccccssececceseecceeececceeecceeueeeseaueecseseecseeeesseeesseneeesseesessegeeenas 3 3 Mounting the MOO cain ntacsssnieresaivatetasssbanenaivadanacinvaneguivacesasebanessiudaennalvbenoeadnnaessaubanoacinnauaesdubueeaainxawanannbes 3 3 1 Mounting orientation and outline dimensions cccccecccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeaeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeesueesneeeaaes 3 3 2 Mounting MSS MOTOT Sc ts sce ta ete sts rate sare i cn eats arated tn sao Suge nie aston a AEN dee gamnaies 3 4 Notes on the laying
155. ceeeeeeeeee wees Subroutine 56 Lock_unlock_T clamping control for turning MACHINE cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees Subroutine 58 MM_MAIN 0ccceeeeeeeees Subroutine 59 MM_MCP_808D Subroutine 60 Disk_MGZ_M disk style tool magazine Used for MilliNG ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees Subroutines 34 to 36 57 and 61 Subroutine 62 Trg_key_OR ccccsseeeeeees Subroutine 63 TOGGLES cece eeeees PLG GlAUINS ecciesia Alarm cancel reset and reaction 0 008 Alarm texts easier cosvnesvariesversnsevescxeesacedensuxseteasees PLC sample applications ccccccceeceeeeeees PLC sample application turning 00 PLC sample application milling 0 AMM communication tool cccccseeceneeeees Establishing an Ethernet connection File management and transfer 00008 Remote COntrol cccccccecccseecseeeceseseeeeeeeeees Operating the HMI via remote control Saving the remote control screen as a picture Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 1 Safety instructions 1 1 Fundamental safety instructions 1 1 1 General safety instructions AXDANGER Danger to life due to live parts and other energy sources Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched e Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for
156. cess quantity and may only be used as a display quantity Commissioning Manual 162 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Par No Max Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed r0032 Active power actual value kW Float smoothed Description Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power Significance for the drive Power output at the motor shaft 0033 Torque utilization smoothed Fot j doo Description Displays the smoothed torque utilization as a percentage Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity r0037 0 1 Servo drive temperatures h Je Fot j dbo 9 Description Displays the temperatures in the servo drive 0 Inverter maximum value 1 Depletion layer maximum value 2 Rectifier maximum value 3 Air intake 4 Interior of servo drive 5 Inverter 1 6 Inverter 2 7 Inverter 3 8 Inverter 4 9 Inverter 5 10 Inverter 6 11 Rectifier 1 12 Rectifier 2 13 Depletion layer 1 14 Depletion layer 2 15 Depletion layer 3 16 Depletion layer 4 17 Depletion layer 5 18 Depletion layer 6 19 Cooling system liquid intake The value of 200 indicates that there is no measuring signal e r0037 0 Maximum value of the inverter temperatures r0037 5 10 e 10037 1 Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures r0037 13 18 e
157. ch out disable the DC link voltage monitoring Check the line supply voltage Check the infeed module or the brake module Increase the upper DC link voltage thresh old Switch out disable the DC link voltage monitoring Connect the motor or check the motor contactor Check the DC link voltage Check the Motor Module Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 F7412 Commutation angle incorrect motor model Reaction ENCODER Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7414 Encoder serial num ber changed Reaction ENCODER Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7420 Drive Current set point filter natural frequency gt Shannon frequency Reaction NONE Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7450 Standstill monitoring has responded Reaction OFF 1 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 An incorrect commutation angle was de tected that can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller Possible causes The motor encoder is incorrectly ad justed with respect to the magnet posi tion The motor encoder is damaged Data to calculate the motor model has been incorrectly set Pole position identification might have calculated an incorrect value when ac tivated The motor encoder speed signal is faulted The control loop is instable due to incorrect parameterization The encoder was replaced A third party build in or linear motor
158. co eccccccecceeceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeesaaeeeesaneeesaenees 4 1 12 USB IMerngCE A I0 Seas eet anne ane one E eee ae ne ieee eee eee oe eee ee 4 1 13 Slot for the system CF Cal cxiccscc2nceessssiscasnasdsantncssacieetvienceetiidoseaniieseduscdicinadieaeeted daahenteaetedaeiiedcdcbtese des 4 2 Interfaces on the SINAMICS V70 Servo system ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeesaaeeesseeeeesaees 4 2 1 VISE CIRCUIT WIRING ee E E E A S 4 2 1 1 Wea IA CIFGUIL IWS WAG CS Secotan Er E a A T 4 2 1 2 Main circuit WINING tccaiansosnaauatetecaatiaieraiaiiseameiiiinausi4psiuanuoim aueliaciatinnhcuni4piiaumumigaueiiadieimianciaiiainemanaKe 4 2 2 Connecting the 24 V power supply STO XG ecccceecccseeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceseecesseeeseeeeeseeeeseeeesaneesseeees 4 2 3 Connecting the holding brake X7 ceccccseeccccseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeseaeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeas 4 2 4 Connecting the encoder X9 cccccccsssccccsececcseececseueeeceeucecseeeecseuseessuseesseeeesseueeesseeessegeeesseesessaneeenes 4 2 5 Connecting an external braking resistor DOP R1 cc cccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 3 4 3 System connection OVEN VICW 5 cicscdcicnssiess cccenczastneinetsnnedecanesecsasededsbencecudactanngiiedensebsaanuniocasetiedeaseuadeeeseoeece 4 3 1 Connecting the CNC Controller ccccccsescccc
159. cription file folder SYSTEM 4s IN n Sys m 868D SHIFT ALARM gt FS data Fa data HMI data folder es gt Hane Type Length Date E Customized bitmaps User cycle files CjEasyxLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnp Q Extended user text file falmec txt Oo Cj0EM manual Coemmanual pdf3 CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt CI0EM slideshow bnp pnq C70EM R variable name file Crparan_nanme txt 7S5ervice planner task name file syvc_tasks txt R In the factory setting the MD description files in the two default languages are prepared on the control but invisible to the machine manufacturer The machine manufacturer can load files of this type only after modifying the description of at least one of their MDs The detailed procedure is as follows N 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM MD Hach 2 Press these two softkeys in succession poate Then select a certain MD with the cursor keys and then press the following Edit Edit DEH descr HD text BS Commissioning Manual 124 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 3 In the following dialog edit the description text of the MD as desired for example USER_DATA_INT Then save the modification with the following OK we 4 Access the OEM MD description file folder by performing the steps mentioned above At this time a file containing the change log in the corresponding language e
160. ction refer to Section Analog spindle interface X54 spindle encoder interface X60 X60 interface X60 Page 51 3 For detailed information on cable shield connection refer to Section Connecting the drive and motor the drive and motor Connecting the drive and motor Page 67 lt e nnm QS aS Commissioning Manual 14 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Personal injury and damage to property from inadequate protection Inadequate protection may cause minor personal injury or damage to property e Using a copper protective earth conductor with a cross section of 10 mm to connect the PE terminal of V70 to the protective earth For the NC and 24 VDC power supply there are no special requirements of the cross section of the copper protective earth conductor For the inverter or servo spindle drive it is recommended to refer to the relevant specifications to confirm the cross section of the copper protective earth conductor Terminals for equipotential bondings that exist in addition to terminals for PE conductors must not be used for looping through the PE conductors e To ensure protective separation an isolating transformer must be used for the 380 VAC line supply system Cabinet grounding guide TN C grounding system TN S grounding system c binet o Cabinet o Hanna ms 3 AC 380 Vdevices 3 AC 380 V devices e9 SINAMICS V70 i jen SINAMICS V70 L2 L2 Q L2 Q L2 5
161. d disables the drive enable signal DB380x DBX2 1 If you want to clear the emergency stop alarm you must first release the Emergency Stop button and then press the RESET key on the MCP This subroutine activates the alarm below Alarm 700016 DRIVE NOT READY Timing diagram Emergency stop 5 DB2600 DBX0 1 Acknowledge 1 emergency stop 0 DB2600 DBX0 2 Emergency off 4 active 0 DB2700 DBX0 1 Reset DB3000 DBX0 7 O Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 245 Local variable definition Inputs BYTE E KEY BOOL Emergency stop key NC HWL_ON BOOL Any one of the hardware limit switches is active NO 1 SpStop BOOL Spindle stopped NO 2 NO Normal Open NC Normal Close 1 This input can come from signal OVImt of subroutine 40 and triggers emergency stop when the hardware limit appears 2 Before the drive system disables the control enable signal the PLC detects the spindle stop signal from NCK to ensure that the spindle has stopped Outputs NC_Ready BOOL NC being in the cyclic state and able to enable the drive Relevant PLC machine data No Value Description S 14512 18 4 Spindle has an external stop signal Spindle has no external stop signal Example for calling subroutine 33 SM0 EMG_ STOP MO Readye Mi 30 0 A 7 4 10 Subroutine 37 MCP_NCK MCP and HMI signal processing Purpose Subroutine 37 is used to transfer the interface signals from the
162. d limit and reference point etc By adding the desired subroutine module to the main procedure plus other supplementary procedures you can complete the PLC procedure design easily The PLC subroutine library consists of the following files e PLC project file SAMPLE_TURN PTP application program as examples for a turning machine e PLC project file SAMPLE_MILL PTP application program as examples for a milling machine Note Through these examples you can clearly realize how to create or invoke PLC subroutines You can reorganize PLC subroutines or modify networks to realize most machine functions test and debug subroutines of the library System resource __ Resource pe CC C CN Input 10 0 to 12 7 24 inputs on X100 X101 and X102 13 0 to 18 7 48 distributed inputs on X301 and X302 Output QO0 0 to Q1 7 16 outputs on X200 and X201 Q2 0 to Q5 7 32 distributed outputs on X301 and X302 PLC system resource Non volatile memory MD14510 32 NC resource MD14514 32 MD14514 8 Programming Subroutine 64 SBRO to SBR63 64 subroutines tool resource symbol table 32 SYM1 to SYM32 32 symbol tables Constant definition Constant input Symbol Constant 1 SMO 0 Constant 2 ZERO M251 0 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 237 Zero output definition Data type Symbol bit Structure of symbol tables All the addresses in the PLC subroutine library are programmed with symbols A
163. d to control forward or backward movement of the tailstock on a turning machine In the JOG mode press the Tailstock key to move the tailstock forward or backward Pressing Tailstock moves the tailstock forward and one more pressing moves the tailstock backward In the AUTO mode you can use M20 or M21 to control the forward or backward movement of the tailstock Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description S O BYTE TailCtrl_K BOOL Tailstock control key press 1st time advance 2nd time retract SP_status BOOL Spindle status Commissioning Manual 268 6FC5397 4EP 10 0BA4 08 2015 Outputs Name Types Description S TailAdv_O BOOL Tailstock advance ouput TailRet_O BOOL Tailstock retract output AdvRet_LED BOOL Tail advance retract flag Assigned global variables SP_RUNm BOOL M236 0 Indicate that the spindle is running TailAdv_m BOOL M229 2 Indicates that the tailstock is moving forward TailRet_m BOOL M229 3 Indicates tailstock is moving backward Relevant PLC machine data No Value Description S 14512 17 2 Enable tailstock in turning Oo Disable tailstock in turning Example for calling subroutine 55 MD HEs_17_2 Tail_stock_T EM nodef TallAdy OF 20 2 PM CKas4TailCtiEK TailRetOpPao s SF_RUMm A 7 4 29 Subroutine 56 Lock_unlock_T clamping control for turning machine Purpose Subroutine 56 is used to control the clamping or release for the chuck for a turning machine In th
164. d to meet the EMC requirements Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 63 Encoder connector drive side 14 pin socket connector incremental absolute encoder feedback interface X9 ilustration Pin No Signal____ Description S 1 Biss DataP__ Absolute encoder data signal positive O 2 Biss_DataN__ Absolute encoder data signal negative Z o o 3____ Biss_ClockN Absolute encoder clock signal negative o 4 ___ Biss_ClockP _ Absolute encoder clock signal positive ooo 5 Pav Encoderpower supply SV Encoder power supply 5V S Encoder power supply 5V Encoder power supply grounding 8 IM Encoder power supply grounding 9 Rp_ EncoderRphase positive signal S Bp Encoder B phase POSNE aigna m e Encoder A phase positive signal Note The screw type is UNC 4 40 plug in terminal block and the recommended tightening torque is 0 5 Nm to 0 6 Nm Encoder connector motor side 8 pin connector incremental encoder and absolute encoder Incremental encoder Sigpel__ Deserpon____ Signal_ Deseipfor____ _ 1 P Supply Power supply5V_ P_Supply Power supply5V _ a 6 B PhaseB Clock P_ Clock i O 8 R Phase Data N _ Inverteddata Wiring Incremental encoder Absolute encoder Motor side Drive side Motor side Drive side P_Supply M iole M Biss_ClockP y Biss ClockN L a at Biss_DataP F Biss_DataN Commissioning Manual 64 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015
165. data gt USB 868D 9 data Importing the bitmap file 1 2 SYSTEM A A 3 SHIFT ALARM D sys 4 data gt USB m 8680 9 o data Importing the user cycle file 1 gt SYSTEM A IN 3 SHIFT ALARM Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Press these two softkeys in succession Then select a user cycle alarm file for example alc_eng txt with the fllowing key Finally copy it with the following key Copy Press this softkey and access the folder HMI data gt User cycle files gt User cycle alarm file Then paste the file with the following Paste Save the required file on a USB flash disk Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front of the PPU Select the desired operating area Press these two softkeys in succession Then select a bitmap file for example cn1 bmp with the following key Finally copy it with the following key Copy Press this softkey and access the folder HMI data gt User cycle files gt User cycle bitmap file Then paste the file with the following Paste Type Length Date Time E B Eoicoibed DIR 12 61 66 83 11 39 foicoiz b DIR 12 61 66 83 11 39 foicoibbb DIR 12 61 66 63 11 39 Eoicob46 DIR 12 61 66 83 11 39 Eoicolbl DIR 12 61 66 83 11 39 Save the required file on a USB flash disk Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front of the PPU Select the desired operating
166. de 11 bit Alternatively you can call this dialog by double clicking the ge Communications icon in the pro ject tree or choosing from the main screen menu Ladder Symbol Table Status Chart Data Block a Blo ok MC Variables Cross Reference Communications R h ymbol Table Symbolic Addressing Ctrl Double click the access point symbol 189 190 Then the following Set PG PC Interface dialog is displayed Set PG PC Interface Access Path LLDP DCP PNIO Adapter Info Access Point of the Application PLC Programming Tool gt PLOSO2 PPI 1 Standard for PLC Programming Tool Interface Parameter Assignment Used PLC802 PPI 1 Properties SPC Adapter PROFIBUS 1 lt Active gt Parameter assignment of your serial interface for a PFI network Interfaces Check the interface being used For RS232 communication you must assign the interface PLC802 PPI 1 to PLC programming tool Double click the interface PLC802 PPI 1 or click the Properties button and the following property dialog is displayed Properties PLC802 PPI1 PPI Local Connection Station Parameters Address o Ea Timeout 100 Network Parameters i he Transmission rate 38 4 kbit s i i z 5 6 kbps Highest station address 19 2 kbps 36 4 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 152 kbit s range On the PPI tab page set the baud rate for the transmis
167. default setting in SINAMICS V70 servo drives Commissioning Manual 130 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Certification CE A Restricted emergency stop operation is permissible Up to 2000 braking operations can be executed with 300 rotor moment of inertia as external moment of inertia from a speed of 3000 RPM without the brake being subject to an inad missible amount of wear 2 This lifetime is only for reference When a motor keeps running at rated speed under rated load replace its bearing after 20 000 hours to 30 000 hours of service time Even if the time is not reached the bearing must be replaced when unu sual noise vibration or faults are found 3 This lifetime is only for reference When a motor keeps running at 80 rated value and the surrounding air temperature is 30 C the encoder lifetime can be ensured Specific technical data Order no 1FL60 42 44 fen e2 jes fee lez feo o f a Sialltorque Nm a a a a Maximum torque 7 2 10 7 1143 215 25 1 287 357 50 0 70 0 Nm Rated speed rpm 3000 s d 2000 sss 2000 4000 3000 3000 2500 2000 rpm EE a Rawdcurent A 12 2i 2s Jo Jas sa sa rs no ae foz Coo E ee ee eee ee ze far fse Jas Jes es Jos roa lis hs Moment of inertia with brake 104 kgm Recommended load lt 7 lt 500 lt 500 to motor inertia ol ada Moment of inertia 10 4 kgm Weight of With 4 11 3 11 3 14 0 16 6 21 3 25 7 30 3 39 1 incremen brake tal
168. dgement 6 edgement 5 edgement 4 edgement 3 edgement 2 edgement 1 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement 9 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 DB1800 Byte Bt7 Bite Bit5 Bit4 Bt3 Bitz Bit1 Bito 5000 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgement 8 edgement 7 edgement 6 edgement 5 edgement 4 edgement 3 edgement 2 edgement 1 5001 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement 9 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 Signals from maintenance planners DB1800 Warnings Alarms r Byte Bit7 B
169. e channel not SBR37 MCP_NCK reset 700061 DB1600 DBX7 5 Mgz in maint Read in amp rapid traverse disabled SBR60 Disk_MGZ_M 700062 DB1600 DBX7 6 Tool on spindle lt gt tool prgd mgz must be SBR60 Disk_MGZ_M referenced Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 279 A 7 5 1 Alarm cancel reset and reaction Conditions of alarm cancel reset After the cancel of an alarm you need to press one of the following two keys to clear the alarm finally Then the alarm displayed will disappear by itself AO or CANCEL RESET Alarm reaction There are the following two ways for alarm reaction PLC reaction the PLC program detects the reaction through the corresponding PLC interface such as canceling the axis enable when giving an alarm NC reaction every alarm has an eight bit configuration MD14516 0 to 127 You can set the cancelation condition and alarm reaction for every alarm according to the actual condition The system then makes the corresponding reaction when the alarm begins MD14516 n kai Bit 7 6 5 Read in disable Zonar ioi Feed disable Reset or cancel key Emergency PLC stop Alarm reset cancel condition A 7 5 2 Alarm texts Creating or editing alarm texts correctly and reasonably can make users clearly realize and understand the reason of a PLC alarm and then locate and resolve breakdown HC HPF Reset ROY MAxAlo 0 BOB i T Q D a MZ lo A WA nn F 8 080 9O H 666 mm min
170. e 0 Actual speed e 1 DC voltage e 2 Actual torque Firmware Version db b b b lsz fb b Description Firmware version Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 6 Diagnostics A 6 1 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms Some alarms may occur during the commissioning work For more information about the alarms see the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Diagnostics Manual Calling help information for an alarm You can call the help information for an alarm on the PPU by proceeding through the following steps SYSTEM 1 Select the desired operating area IN ALARM A 2 Select the alarm using the cursor keys T 3 Press this key to call the help information for the selected alarm HELP 4 Pressing this softkey exits the help system Exit A 6 2 SINAMICS V70 faults and alarms A 6 2 1 General information about faults and alarms Differences between faults and alarms The differences between faults and alarms are as follows Faults What happens when a fault occurs e Ifthe servo motor is running it stops running e Ifthe servo motor is not running it cannot run How to eliminate a fault e Remove the cause of the fault e Acknowledge the fault Alarms What happens when an alarm occurs e The servo motor can run normally How to eliminate an alarm e The alarm acknowledges itself If the cause of the alarm is no longer present it automatically resets itself Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 169
171. e JOG mode press the External Inside clamping key to select either external clamping or inside clamping and press Clamp or Unclamp key to clamp or release the chuck Furthermore you can also use the Foot switch to clamp or release the chuck Pressing the Foot switch for once release the chuck and one more pressing clamps the chuck In the AUTO mode you can execute M10 M11 to control the clamping or release of the chuck Note The chuck status should be kept when clamping outputs are zero Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description S WORD Delay if no in position sensor LckRel_k BOOL Lock release toggle signal ExtIn_k BOOL External internal lock key S_velo BOOL Spindle velocity 0 0 speed 1 spindle running Foot_switch BOOL Foot switch for clamp unclamp chuck Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 269 Outputs Name Type Description S O Lck1_O BOOL Clamping output 1 Lck2_O BOOL Clamping output 2 Lck_LED BOOL Clamping output indicate ExtIn_LED BOOL External internal lock LED BOOL Error 1 clamp unclamp not possible while spindle is operating Assigned global variables Relevant PLC machine data No Value Description 14512 17 1 Enable chuck in turning oO Disable chuck in turning Example for calling subroutine 56 Network 9 chuck function in turning ONE MO_HEs_17_1 Lock_unlock_T EN Delay EecKi_O LekRel_k Lek _0 Extin_k Eek LED S_ velo
172. e following steps 1 Select from the main screen menu as follows zten Compile Clear Information Compare hs Type You can also select the checkbox for data blocks to include the actual values of the data blocks W Data Blocks only actual values WA All SF_INI OB 3303 SP_ACT DBS304 CTAL_E DB3306 Commissioning Manual 198 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Begin 2 Click this button and the comparing begins Wait for a few seconds and then you can view the compare results Comparison Results Blocks MAIN OB1 Network 6 different MAIN OBT Network 7 different MAIN 0B1 Network 8 different MAIN OBT Network 9 different MAIN DBT Network 10 different MAIN DBT Network 11 different Data Blocks Passed Version display The transferred PLC application will be active in the working memory of the control after the system is started up Then you can view the detailed information about the currently active PLC application in the version display through the following a operations WN Serv Version o A gt a displ In PLC Programming Tool right click the ok the OB1 block and choose Properties In the comment text box of the opened OB1 property dialog you can add your own additional information for the PLC application Properties OB1 General Protection Name Author MAIN Block Number 0 Date Created O
173. e position key Magazine original position key Magazine reaches SP position Spindle releases tool position Outputs Name Type Description S Assigned global variables MgzCW_cmd BOOL M230 0 Command for clockwise rotation of the tool magazine MgzCCW_cmd BOOL M230 1 Command for counter clockwise rotation of the tool magazine Mgz_rot_CMD BOOL DB4900 DBB24 Tool change command from the tool change subroutine Commissioning Manual 214 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Relevant PLC machine data No Unit Range Description S MD14512 19 3 1 to enable the maintenance mode 0 to enable the normal mode MD14514 2 1 See 3 40e38 to 3 40e38 Tool magazine tool change position of axis Z 1 For the first time commissioning set MD14514 2 to an appropriate value so that axis Z can move freely during the commissioning When the commissioning is finished set MD14514 2 to the normal value Example for calling subroutine 60 DB4500 DBA1017 0 DISK_MGZ_M EN O0 nodef MazCW op Q1 0 I123Moz cnt 3 MgzCCW FO1 1 DB1000 DBX1 57MgzRefk MazSp_oFQ12 DB1000 DBX1 44MgzCW k MgzOrg_oFQ1 3 DB1000 DBX1 64MgzCCW SpRelToFQi4 DB1000 DBX2 14MgzSp_k RelT_En_o DB1100 DBX2 3 DB1000 DBX2 24MgzOrg_k MagzSp_L DB1100 DBX2 1 11 34 MgzSp_p MgzOrg_L DB1100 DBXxX2 2 11 44 MgzOrg_p MazRef_L DB1100 DB8xX1 5 11 547 _rel_pos 11 64T_Ick_pos DB1000 DBX2 44T_rel_k DB1000 DBX2 34T_rel_Enk M251 0 4 Reserved M251 04 Reserved M251 04Reserved3
174. e shielded chamber For a conductive emission test an external AC filter between the 380 VAC power supply and the drive will be used to meet the EMC requirement For the radiated emission and conductive emission test the length of the line supply cable between the line filter and the drive must be shorter than 1 m Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 33 Note Screw tightening Make sure you fix the screw to the terminal door of the drive after you have completed the installation work 3 2 4 Electrical cabinet design It may be preferable to always use cooling units as this allows the cabinet to be sealed which is the best option for stopping the entry of contaminants Within the cabinets it may also be necessary to install fans to ensure the air is circulated and prevent hot spots from forming The technical specifications of the individual hardware component will provide details of the power loss measured in Watts Calculations are made to see if the cabinet can dissipate the heat naturally The cabinet manufacturer can supply details of the heat loss of the cabinet Natural heat dissipation occurs through the cabinet walls providing the wall is in free air and not against a wall for example A general rule is that the energy dissipated is approximately 50 Watts m of free cabinet wall assuming a 10 C temperature difference between the cabinet and the outside air 3 2 4 1 Correct installation of fans For cabinets it
175. e the required functionality Upon completion you must put the PLC into stop and download the modified PLC into the PPU Then you need to restart the PLC TAs Checking I O address assignment You must check the I O address assignment in this step to ensure correct wiring Softkey functions oo __ REEPOINT Last Commission Step Check Next Create PLC 1 PLC 3 14 I Os alarm texts No Address a Value 2 Digital 19 8 1 output 16 1 11 42 25 2615 62 66 Digital Leal 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 I6 6 gt lt SERERREREE 20 my nn auy 16 7 Gls l2 a s ls 7 ls __ 5 Note Check the IZO status When checking outputs check only the relay output status for safety reasons Selects the digital inputs 4 Shows the I O addresses of the last byte Selects the digital outputs Returns to the previous step Shows the I O addresses of the next byte Proceeds to the next step 7 1 4 Editing PLC alarm texts PLC user alarms can be used as one of the most effective diagnosis methods The control system provides 128 PLC user alarms 700xxx You can edit the PLC alarm texts as required Operating sequence A M 1 Select the alarm text you desire to edit Edit 2 Press this softkey to activate the input field at the bottom of the screen and enter the de text sired text for example Note that the text of each PLC user alarm must be limited to 50 character
176. ectors to adjust the Rotate the screw rings counter loosen the connectors cable orientations clockwise to tighten the connectors Note Rotating the connectors All the three motor side connectors can be rotated only within 360 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 69 5 Toolbox software 5 1 Installing the software tools Software components In order to integrate the control system into a machine tool software tools are required These tools including service tools are supplied on a DVD The DVD is called the Toolbox DVD and is provided at delivery The following software tools are included on the Toolbox DVD AccessMyMachine AMM is a multifunctional tool used for data trans AMM fer service commissioning tasks and remote control PLC Programming Tool The tool provides a user friendly environment for commissioning the PLC With this tool you can develop edit and observe the logic to control your applications SinuComPCIN SinuComPCIN is a tool that allows you to transfer data between the PC and the control system through RS232 interface Config DATA Config DATA contains some PLC example files including default PLC programs for turning milling machines Supported operating systems The software tools above support the following operating systems e Windows Vista both 32 bit and 64 bit versions e Windows 7 both 32 bit and 64 bit versions Installing the software To install the software on yo
177. ed _ 12 Handheld unit axis Y selected en 13 Handheld unit axis Z selected External power External power 14 Handheld unit 4th axis sslacisao er 15 Handheld unit INC X1 supply 24 VDC supply 24 VDC 15 Handheld unit INC X1 PPly 16 Handheld unit INC X10 PPly 16 Handheld unit INC X10 17 Handheld unit INC X100 17 Handheld unit INC X100 18 Handheld unit enabled B 18 Handheld unit enabled X301 Milling Turning 4 1 5 Handwheel inputs X10 Pin assignment Type Mini Combicon 10 pin Cable Max length 3 m Mustration Pin Signal Comment S 2 5 V power output Ground Negative Track A handwheel 2 Track B handwheel 2 Negative Track B handwheel 2 HAND WHEEL e m Ground o eo 2A O s Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 49 Connecting You are allowed to connect at most two electronic handwheels at connector X10 on the PPU Handwheel 1 The handwheels must meet the following requirements Transmission procedure 5 V square wave signals TTL level or RS422 Signals Track A as a true and negative signal Ua1Ua1 Track B as a true and negative signal Ua2Uaz Max input frequency 500 kHz Phase shift between Track A to Track B 90 30 Supply 5 V max 250 mA 4 1 6 Drive Bus interface X126 Pin assignment Type IEEE 1394 6 pin female Cable Type Drive Bus cable Drive Bus trailing cable Max length 20 m or ee 1 PBN
178. ed axis at the specified feedrate override Keys for program start stop and reset Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 137 A 1 3 Operating the SINAMICS V70 Basic Operator Panel BOP A 1 3 1 BOP overview The SINAMICS V70 servo drive has been designed with a Basic Operator Panel BOP located on the front of the drive LED status lights RDY COM 6 digit 7 segment display Function buttons You can use the BOP for following operations e Standalone commissioning e Diagnosis e Parameter access e Parameter settings e SD card operations e Drive restart Button functions Button Description Remarks M button e Exits from current menu e Switches between operating modes in the top level menu OK button Short pressing e Confirms selection or input e Enters sub menu e Acknowledges faults Long pressing Activates auxiliary functions Sets Drive Bus address Jog Saves parameter set in drive RAM to ROM Sets parameter set to default Transfers data drive to SD card Transfers data SD card to drive Updates firmware 138 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Commissioning Manual Button Description Remarks UP button Navigates to next item Increases a value JOG in CW clockwise DOWN button Navigates to previous item Decreases a value JOG in CCW counter clockwise E 1 Moves the cursor from digit to digit for single digit editing including the digit of positive negative signs Button comb
179. ed from any operation except clearing alarms and acknowledging faults Commissioning Manual 78 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 6 2 Switching on the control system Preparation before switch on Make sure the following before switching on the control system e You have finished the mechanical installation of the whole system based on the information included in Chapter Mounting Page 25 e You have completed the wiring of the whole system according to the information included in Chapter Page 41 if you use the default PLC program Operating sequence 1 Switch on the 24 VDC power supply for the control system When the control system starts up for the first time the following two alarms appear AAA Ja2lZ Standard machine data loaded CHHEHHH1H1H BABEHHHSH HHBHHHHGH BEEEEEHAH AHAB jE Loss of remanent PLC data Zi Press this key or the key combination to clear the alarms For more information about the 47 alarms and system responses refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Diagnostics RESET Manual AO amp CANCEL gt RESET 3 When the control system enters the main screen check the status LEDs on the PPU e POK green e RDY green e TEMP off 4 Check the status LEDs on the SINAMICS V70 drive e RDY green e COM slow flashing green every two seconds Note The control system constantly creates restoring points during operation In case of data loss due to power failure or other problems the
180. ed tool positions and function of adjacent tool change The difference between the subroutine 52 and the subroutine 53 is that the subroutine 52 uses binary tool position codes while the subroutine 53 uses tool position codes made according to a specific common turret During a tool change the NC interface signal Feedhold DB3200 DBX6 0 is set this means that the part program can only continue to run only after the tool change The turret positioning is prohibited in the case of an Emergency Stop turret motor overload or program test simulation Local variable definition Inputs same _Type__Deserpgy Aa Boo Toolpositioncode tt B BOOL Toolpositioncode2 o D BOOL Tool position code4 o Tool position Tool position code A Tool position code B Tool position code C Tool position code D Outputs Name Type Description SS O Assigned global variables BOOL M156 4 Tool searching finished BOOL M235 6 Mark for turret CW rotation BOOL M235 7 Mark for turret CCW rotation BOOL M236 4 Mark for manual tool change BOOL M237 0 Current tool number is not 0 BOOL M237 1 Direction for searching for an adjacent tool Commissioning Manual 266 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Relevant PLC machine data No Unit Description O 14510 22 Monitoring time for searching for a tool Example for calling subroutine 53 MD_HEX_17_0 Turret3s_CODE_T MD INT 22 PM ck 2 3 4 5 16 7 2 0 A 7 4 27 Subroutine 54 Turret2_3_Too
181. eeeeecceseeecescecceseesseeeessueesseeeecseueeessuesessegeeesseseeesaeees 4 3 2 Connecting the drive and MOOR secescce ced castccetedeseedd cepciencasadanesenudassdstedaasneneeksenssedaandduadanttahuenosdenschaossecedee TOOIDOX SONWANE NAARAAN AE EEEREN AAE AENEA NARONA EENEN OARA AEEA AEAEE 5 1 Installing the software tOOIS cccccceccccssececceeeeecseeseccsececsegeeessauceesaeeesseeeessuseeesaueeessaneeessaesessageeesiass 5 2 Overview of PLC Programming ToOl ccccccssecccceseecceeececceusecceeeeecsuucesseueeessgeeessueeecsaueeessuseeesaaeees EGA COMMITS SOWING ssrin AAAA AE Nai 6 1 Switching on the SINAMICS V70 drive cccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaaeees 6 1 1 JOJ OS eea A A 6 1 2 Configuring Drive Bus ACCreSSES ccccccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeessaeeesaeeeesaeeeesseeeesaeees 6 2 Switching on the Control SYStOM cccccccsssccceeeeecceeececceesecceeueeessseesseuececseeeessasceesaueeecsegeeessseeesaaeees 6 3 Synchronizing drive data files between NC and drive cccccccsseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeesaaeees 6 4 Setting the PASSWOMC ici vs c0deeseddecd saveteeevneccuehendedesdsiedacthsndecnse ice lebesndeds w vaeddends da deeeedesieneeadereavaeciebdsededecks 6 5 Setting the date and time 0 2 0 eecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeessaeeeesaaeeessaeeeeeseeeeesaeeees 6 6 Activating the o
182. eeeseeeesanees Subroutine 41 MINI_LHHU handwheel on hand held Unit ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeesaees Subroutine 42 SPINDLE spindle control Subroutine 43 MEAS_JOG measurement in the JOG MOde cceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeseeeesaees Subroutine 44 COOLING cooling control Subroutine 45 LUBRICAT control of lubricate ce cccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeeseeeesaaes Subroutine 46 PI SERVICE 08 Subroutine 47 PLC_Select_PP PLC selects Subroutine 48 ServPlan service planner A SUDFOULINE sceccssecscsssssssessstesssssssesessttsessnsnseeeeee Subroutine 49 GearChg1_Auto automatic spindle gear CNANGE c cseccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenees Subroutine 50 GearChg2_Virtual virtual spindle gear change cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaees Subroutine 51 Turret1_HED_T turret with Hall effect device position sensor cccceceeeseeeeeee ees Subroutine 52 TURRET2_BIN_T turret with binary coding FUNCTION ceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeees Subroutine 53 Turret3_CODE_T tool change control for turret with coding function 06 Subroutine 54 Turret2_3_ToolDir tool Change GirectiOn ccccccceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesaees Subroutine 55 Tail_stock_T Tailstock control program for turning MACHINES cce
183. eeseueeseaeeeeaseesaeeeseueesneeessaeeess A 2 Configuring the Additional AXIS ccccccecccceccceeececeecece cece ceeseeeeseecessecesseeeeseeceseueesseeesseeesaeeeseeeessnees A 2 1 Setting parameters for the additional axis turning ccceeccceeeceeeeceeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseetsneeees A 2 2 Setting parameters for the additional axis Milling ccc cceecccseececeececeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeceseeeeseeesaeeeeaeeeees A 2 3 Configuring the drive and MOTOS cccccccceecccseeeeceeeecececeecesseeeesececeucesseeeeseueeseueessaeessaeeesueesaneessaees A 2 4 T nmg drive STORING Ce sessin oniiir EEEE EE EEE ENEE EEN EEEE TREN EASAN A 3 Cutting reserved holes in the MCP ccccecccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaaeees A 4 MP SID eet ea ee net eo er ee Ore eee eo eee A 5 PMO LOT WIG seecicecanatieaterasesancseens E E EE A E E E E E A E E A 5 1 Recommended machine CALA veces cccgcenedeceddss seed cerid iiini a a ieat eenias detentions A 5 2 SINAMICS V70 parametels cccccccccccsecccesceceeeeceeeeceeeceneeceeecseeesaeeeseeessusessueessageesaaeesausessaeessgeess A 6 DAGNO C een eee em eee EE oe ee E ee eee ee Aer A 6 1 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alr cccccccccecceceececeeeeeaeeeeeeeceseeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeesaneeeseeeees A 6 2 SINAMICS V70 faults and alarms cccccecccceeccceeececeeeeceeceseeeeeaeeeeseeceseeeesseeesaeeeeseeeeseeeeseneesanees
184. el ZZ atos ooo The first to eighth vertical key in the second level tidentifier ie oo i i Defined in the cycle text file bitmap cycle The bitmap for the user cycle The bitmap name must be followed with name of the user cycle Commissioning Manual 116 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Examples 5 0 0 83000 gt define a softkey identifier 83000 at the horizontal key 5 S 5 1 0 83001 CN1 CYCLE100 gt define a softkey identifier 83001 at the first vertical key of the first level when pressing the horizontal key 5 M17 9 4 3 Creating the user cycle parameter file The user cycle parameter file Sc com file is required to define the help information and the parameters for the user cycle You can create the sc com file with a text editor like the WordPad or Notepad Text definition rules The symbol indicates the beginning of a cycle description If you have created an image to display on the left of the screen at cycle start call the image at the first line The image is followed by the cycle name written in brackets Now define the parameters for the individual variables according to the format shown in the table below Line Description of the parameters Entry 1 Start of variable declaration 2 Variable type R REAL INTEGER C CHAR S STRING Separator e Minimum value space maximum value e Minimum value space maximum value e different values for selection e different characters use space
185. el direction of rotation inverted 11 POS_RESTO RED 2 RED 1 Commissioning Manual 226 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Signals from axis DB3900 Signals from axis r 3903 NCK gt PLC interface Bye Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 siti Bito 1000 Module limit enabled active hae walii a axis Positioning Path axis Lubrication in position axis in axis pulse position wos TP Signals from spindle DB3900 Signals from spindle r 3903 NCK gt PLC interface Bye Bt7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 siti Bito 2000 Change Setpoint a stage Actual Speed Spindle in Overlay Sa Speed limit direction of monitoring setpoint range limit Increased Limited exceeded rotation range violated clockwise 2002 Active spindle mode Rigid tap GWPS Const Control Oscillation Positioning PING active Cutting mode mode mode velocity active 2003 Spindle in Tool with position dynamic reached limiting Signals from drive DB3900 Signals from axis spindle r 3903 NCK gt PLC interface Bye Bt7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 siti Bito 4000 Holding RLI active brake opened 4001 Pulse ena Speed Drive ready bled controller integrator disabled 4002 nact Nset Nact lt Nx Nact lt Nmin Ma lt Max Ramp up completed 4003 Generator E lt operation alarm minimum threshold speed falled below Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 2217 Signals
186. emperature model C Float stator winding temperature Description Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model p0918 Drive Bus address aoo fs ho f ue RET Description Displays or sets the Drive Bus address for Drive Bus interface on the servo drive The address can be set as follows Using p0918 e Only if the address 00 hex 7F hex 80 hex or FF hex has been set using the address switch e The address is saved in a non volatile fashion using the function copy from RAM to ROM e A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON 00 Description Sets the speed velocity for jog 1 Jogging is level triggered and allows the motor to be incremen tally moved 00 0 Description Sets the highest possible speed Dependency p0322 p1083 Speed limit in positive direction 0 000 210000 0 210000 rom Float IM T U of rotation 00 000 Description Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction p1086 Speed limit in negative direc 0 000 rom Float IM T U tion of rotation 210000 0 210000 00 000 Description Sets the speed limit for the negative direction p1120 Ramp function generator 0 000 999999 0 10 000 s Float IM T U ramp up time 00 Description The ramp function generator ramps up the speed setpoint from standstill setpoint 0 up to the maximum speed p1082 in this time Dependency p1082 p1121 Ramp function generator 0 000 999999 0 10 0
187. empied L_ Stopped Stopped NCK alarm Channel Channel alaes o axes Stop re Start re with pro specific operational Stationary Referenced quest quest cessing NCK alarm stop pre is active sent Contour handwheel active bit binary coded me a as ict hace Invert con Protection tour hand zone not wheel guaranteed direction Machine related protection zone pre activated Machine related protection zone pre activated o S es es st Channel specific protection zone pre activated Commissioning Manual 220 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 oh a kc ee a Channel specific protection zone pre activated po re t0 Area Machine related protection zone violated Machine related protection zone violated E ee ee eee Channel specific protection zone violated Channel specific protection zone violated po re to Area Status signals axes in Work DB3300 Signals from NCK channel r NCK gt PLC interface Bye Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bita Bito 1000 Axis 1 in Work Oo o eaa gp ai 1001 Axis 1 in Work Machine function 2 Continuous Var INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC i 1002 1003 ee Contour handwheel direction of rotation inverted 1004 Axis 2 in Work Travel a Handwheel active bit binary coded Minus t 1005 Axis 2 in Work Machine function Continuous Var INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC 1006 1007 ee Contour handwheel direc
188. enetrate into the motor Besides when installing the motor horizontally make sure that the cable outlet faces downward to protect the motor from ingress of oil or water NOTICE Damage to the encoder Do not exert any shock at the shaft end otherwise the encoder may be damaged Note Using the eyebolts The 1FL609U motor 90 mm shaft height has two M8 screw holes for screwing in two eyebolts Lift the 1 L609U motor only at the eyebolts Eyebolts that have been screwed in must be either tightened or removed after mounting To ensure better heat dissipation install a flange between the machine and the motor You can install the motor onto the flange with four screws as shown in the following figure Flea 4xMe 270x270x10 Aluminum alloy Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 39 3 4 Notes on the laying of cables in drag chains The MOTION CONNECT cables between the drive and the motor and setpoint cables and Drive Bus trailing cables between the drive and the controller satisfy requirements for use in drag chains Observe the following notes when laying these cables in drag chains Laying cables separately in the drag chain e To ensure a long service life of the drag chain and cable lay cables made of different materials separately with separating webs in the drag chain e Fill the webs evenly to ensure that the position of cables does not change during operation e Distribute cables as symmetrically
189. entifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers are used these must be recommended or approved by Siemens Proper transport storage installation assembly commissioning operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with The information in the relevant documentation must be observed Siemens AG 2015 All rights reserved 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 1 Preface Applicable products This manual is applicable to the following control systems Control system SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T Turning V4 6 2 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M Milling V4 6 2 Documentation components and target groups Document Programming and Operating Manual Turning Programming and Operating Manual Milling Programming and Operating Manual ISO Turning Milling Programming and Operating Manual Manual Machine Plus Programmers and operators of turning machines MM Turning Diagnostics Manual Mechanical and electrical designers commissioning engi neers machine operators and service and maintenance personnel Manufacturer service documentation Commissioning Manual
190. et into the STOP state The global control telegram to synchronize Check the physical bus configuration ca the clock cycles has failed in cyclic oper ble connector Drive Bus terminator ation for several Drive Bus clock cycles shielding etc or has violated the time grid specified in Check whether communication was briefly the parameterizing telegram over several or permanently interrupted consecutive Drive Bus clock cycles Check the bus and controller for utilization level e g bus cycle time was set too short 171 F1912 Clock cycle synchro nous operation sign of life failure Reaction OFF 1 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7011 Motor overtempera ture Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7085 Open loop closed loop control parameters changed Reaction NONE Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7403 Lower DC link volt age threshold reached Reaction OFF 1 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7404 Upper DC link volt age threshold reached Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7410 Current controller output limited Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY 172 The maximum permissible number of errors in the controller sign of life clock synchronous operation has been exceed ed in cyclic operation Motor overloaded Motor surrounding air temperature too high Wire breakage or sensor not connect ed Motor temperature model incorrectly parameter
191. eterize gear stage change LIMIT Maximum spindle speed 35110 GEAR_STEP_ 0 1 500 DOUBLE rpm CF MAX_VELO 0 2 1 000 s 9 3 2 000 4 4 000 5 8 000 Maximum speed for gear stage change 35120 GEAR_STEP_ 0 1 50 DOUBLE rpm CF MIN_VELO 0 2 400 s 9l 3 800 4 1 500 5 3 000 Minimum speed for gear stage change 35130 GEAR_STEP_ 0 1 500 DOUBLE rom CF MAX_VELO_LI 191 4 000 MIT O 5 3 2 000 4 4 000 5 8 000 Maximum speed for gear stage Commissioning Manual 160 6FC5397 4EP 10 0BA4 08 2015 No Name Defaut Activating GEAR_STEP_ 0 1 5 DOUBLE rom CF MIN_VELO_LI 2 10 MIT O 5 3 20 4 40 5 80 Minimum speed for gear stage NUS 1st software limit switch minus Access level Manufacturer US 1st software limit switch plus AX_VELO_LIMI 11 500 DOUBLE mm min rom CF T O 5 mm min 31 944 rpm Threshold value for velocity monitoring ENC_FREQ LI 3 33e5 DOUBLE MIT O Encoder limit frequency MM_ENC_CO e Turning DWORD MP_MAX_POI 125 NTS e Milling 200 Number of intermediate for interpolar compensation SRAM The machine data followed by an asterisk have the access level of Customer while those without an asterisk have the access level of Manufacturer A 5 2 SINAMICS V70 parameters This chapter lists the parameters displayed on the BOP only
192. f the following softkeys on the main screen of prototype commissioning wizard to enter the window for setting the PLC related parameters Start Secret assistant Softkey functions ae 2018 02 06 Step Set PLC Next Commission 1 14 parameters PLC MCS Position Speed C MX1 6 668 6 668 C MZ1 6 668 6 668 PEETA MSP1 8 008 8 000 Oran 14516 6 USER_DATA_INT oeoo a po THA 14516 11 USER_DATA_INT B po n 14510 21 USER_DATA_INT a po 145163 USER_DATA_INT a po 1451614 USER_DATA_INT a po User data CINT Name USER_DATA_INT Unit Next step t Activates the parameter changes Note that the con Cancels the last change to the parameter trol system restarts to accept the new values Resets the value of the selected parameter to default 4 Proceeds to the next step PLC related parameters MD14510 PLC interface Unit Range Function Machine data Integer 14510 12 DB4500 DBW24 0to1 Layout ofthe traverse keys t 14510 13 DB4500 DBW26 5 to 200 Time for spindle braking Commissioning Manual 88 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 MD14510 PLC interface Unit Range Function Machine data Integer 14510 15 DB4500 DBW30 5 to 30 Spindle override 50 key holding on time defined 14510 16 DB4500 DBW32 1 to 30 Spindle override 100 key holding on time defined 14510 20 DB4500 DBW40 _ _ 2 to 64 Maximum number of tools MD14512 Function Machine data Hex 14512 16 function of chip conveyor milling
193. filter Dependency Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656 0 and parameterized via p1657 p1661 Current setpoint filter 1 numer 0 000 10 000 0 700 Float IM T U ator damping Description Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 1 Dependency Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656 0 and parameterized via p1657 p1661 r2114 0 1 System runtime total ke 02153 029000 029002 129018 168 Description Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit The time comprises r2114 0 milliseconds and r2114 1 days After r2114 0 has reached a value of 86 400 000 ms 24 hours this value is reset and r2114 1 is increment ed e 0 Milliseconds e 1 Days Speed actual value filter time 1000000 ms Float IM T U constant Description Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed velocity actual value The smoothed actual speed velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals Motor type selection o 54251 j ue jm t Description Motor type number is printed on the motor rating plate as motor ID For a motor with an incre mental encoder users need to manually input the parameter value ranging from 18 to 39 For a motor with an absolute encoder the drive automatically reads the parameter value ranging from 10009 to 10048 BOP operating display selec 2 tion Description BOP operating display selection
194. g Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 19 Ratedspeed d S e 2000rmm fe Ji SS ee eee eee Straight connectors with a fixed outlet direction P ft ft tT l am CCE ppr umn ONU A orisa T PP EE single turn 12 bit multi turn Mechanics ae eE E Ds en eae see a Sd a Seona eey wirobate Pf Pa Shaft with key with brake Protection level P65 with a shaft oil seal Device combination The table below lists ordering data of drives and configurable motors You can select the desired servo drive according to the motor configured SIMOTICS S 1FL6 servo motor SINAMICS V70 servo drive Stall torque Ratedspeed Shaft height Order number Order number Frame size Nm rpm s 1 9 42 po 3 000 a 000 FSB 1FL6094 1AC61 00IU1 6SL3210 5DE21 8UA0 1FL6096 1AC61 0LIU11 6SL3210 5DE21 8UA0 000 4FL6090 1AC61 0001 6SL3210 5DE21 0UA0 4FL6092 1AC61 0001 6SL3210 5DE21 4UA0 Commissioning Manual 20 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 2 4 Cables Drive Bus cable PPU to SINAMICS V70 drive 6FC5548 0BA20 1AHO 7 6FC5548 0BA20 1BA0 10 6FC5548 0BA20 1BF0 15 6FC5548 0BA20 1CA0 20 6FC5548 0BA21 1AD0 3 6FC5548 0BA21 1AF0 5 6FC5548 0BA21 1AHO T 6FC5548 0BA21 1BA0 10 6FC5548 0BA21 1BF0 15 6FC5548 0BA21 1CA0 20 6FC5548 0BA05 1AD0 3 6FC5548 0BA05 1AE0 4 6FC5548 0OBA05 1AF0 5 6FC5548 0BA05 1AHO T 6FC5548 0BA05 1BA0 10 6FC5548 0BA05 1BF0 15 6FC5548 0BA05 1C
195. g a tool change the NC interface signals Read in disable DB3200 DBX6 1 and Feedhold DB3200 DBX6 0 are set so the part program can continue running only after the tool change action The turret position action is forbidden in case of an emergency stop turret motor overload or program test simulation This subroutine can activate the following alarms e Alarm 700022 Turret motor overload Alarm 700023 Programmed tool number higher than the max tool number of the turret Alarm 700024 Wrong setting of the max tool number for the turret Alarm 700026 Not able to find expected tool in monitor time Alarm 700011 Not able to lock tool in expected time Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description SSS Commissioning Manual 264 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Outputs Name Type Description SSS Assigned global variables Relevant PLC machine data No Unit Description S 14510 20 f Max toolnumber 40r6 S O 14512 17 0 Activating the turret function ofa turning machine Example for calling subroutine 52 Hetwork 15 MO_HE_17_0 Turret _BIMN_T MODINT 20 is WO IMT 21 ee ay WMD INT 2 fe 11 241T_ 11 341T_ 11 441T_ 1 54T_ 11 6 i 11 7 7 0 l2 14F_ PM _CK4 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 265 A 7 4 26 Subroutine 53 Turret3_CODE_T tool change control for turret with coding function Purpose Subroutine 53 is used to control the turret with cod
196. gram from the Toolbox PLC Programming Tool Project File Edit View PLC Debug Tools Windows Help New Ctrl N a Open Ctri 0 b gt Hi 4H E Close O8D PPL1 6x Save Ctrl S im Block E Save As AIN 061 R 0SEROI 3 Select the following menu command to save this file under a new name to a desired folder so that the default program will not be overwritten Ek PLC Programming Tool C Users z0031e5c Desktop 808D SIN EQ File Edit View PLC Debug Tools Windows Help id Mew Ctrl N z Open Ctrl 0 Close Save Ctrl 5 Save As N Import Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 181 A 7 1 2 Changing the display language You can select the languages to be installed when installing the software Then you can change the display language as desired in PLC Programming Tool Perform the following steps to change the display language 1 Choose from the main menu as follows IRAC D me a e 1 ji L E LT F T ig ptp T Tools Windows Help a g turning 805D PPU168 06 01 Gy Program Block F a Symbol Table OK 2 In the appeared dialog select the desired display language and then click this button to con firm General Colors LAD Editing LAD Status NC Variables Default Editor Programming Mode STL Editor SIMATIC Ladder Editor EC 1131 3 FED Editor Mnemonic Set SIMATIC Variable me
197. he permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been fallen below F30050 24 V supply over voltage Reaction OFF2 Check the 24 V power supply Replace the module if necessary The voltage monitor signals an overvolt age fault on the module Acknowledgement POWER ON Commissioning Manual 176 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 F30074 Communication error between the Control Unit and Power Module Reaction NONE Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F31100 Zero mark distance error Reaction ENCODER Acknowledgement PULSE INHIBIT F31110 Serial communica tions error Reaction ENCODER Acknowledgement PULSE INHIBIT F31112 Error bit set in the serial protocol Reaction ENCODER Acknowledgement PULSE INHIBIT Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Communications between the Control Unit CU and Power Unit PU via the interface no longer possible The CU may have been withdrawn or is incorrectly inserted Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal 0 hex e a Control Unit with external 24 V sup ply was withdrawn from the Power Unit during operation with the Power Unit switched off the external 24 V supply for the Control unit was interrupted for some time 1 hex The Control Unit was withdrawn from the Power Unit during operation although the encoderless safe motion monitoring func tions are enabled This is not supported After reinserting the Control Unit in opera tio
198. he cursor keys to search for the following machine data and assign the search desired values e 20070 3 5 e 20080 3 SP2 eT 4 Open the general machine data window and make the following parameter settings MD e 10000 4 MSP2 e 19100 4 5 Press this key to return to the next higher level menu NC basic 6 Open the basic machine data window list fi Use this softkey or the cursor keys to search for 14512 USER_DATA_HEX 20 Search O 8 Select Bit2 by using this key and the cursor keys J 9 Press this softkey to confirm your input OK 10 Press this softkey to activate the value changes Note that the control system restarts to ac Activate cept the new values and the additional axis can be used in the system 11 Configure the additional drive in the system For more information refer to Configuring the drive and motor Pagel 152 aN N 12 Select the desired operating area on the PPU SHIFT ALARM 13 Open the axis machine data window through the following softkey operations Tal Hach Expert Axis MD data list gt HD Commissioning Manual 150 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Axis Axis Activate Note 15 Use these softkeys to set 35000 2 for the MSP2 axis Press this softkey to activate the value changes Note that the control system restarts to ac cept the new values The factory default PLC program only supports one additional axis A 2 2 Operating sequence Setting par
199. he upload has been completed when the following message appears PLC Programming Tool l Upload was Successful OK 6 Click this button and you can view the upload results Network 1 turning or milling Setting for the folloving program OME Flag with defined ONE signal T_or_M M255 0 0 turning 1 milling Network 2 Initialization ohid 1 PLO_ini EN SCAN 1ST Shi 1 First PLC cycle 1 and following cycle 0 Network 3 Emergency control SMo 0 EMG_STOP EN To upload a PLC application using a USB stick proceed as follows 1 Insert the USB stick into the USB interface at the front of the PPU N 2 Select the desired operating area on the PPU SHIFT ALARM 3 Access the screen for the 808D data through the following softkey operations Oo Sys Oo 808D FE data FE data 4 Access the folder for the NCK PLC data by pressing this hardkey Then select the machine E manufacturer s PLC application file pte Hane Type Te 5 Leadscrew error compensation 5 Global user data 5 Hachine data B 5 R variables B Setting data 5 Tool data 5 Work of fset 5 Press this softkey to copy the selected file Copy Commissioning Manual 196 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 6 Press this softkey and paste the pte file into the USB stick with the following softkey Paste T Unplug the USB stick and plug it into the USB interface of your PC 8 Select from the main screen menu as follows or click the tool
200. heel 2 Fast input output Digital inputs 10 0 to 10 7 11 0 to 11 7 12 0 to 12 7 Digital outputs Q0 0 to Q0 7 Q1 0 to Q1 7 Distributed I O 13 0 to 13 7 a S SE 15 0 to 15 7 X301 aaa ia aa Digital VO 16 0 to 16 7 17 0 to 7 7 18 0 to 18 7 Q4 0 to Q4 7 QB5 0 to Q5 7 Eua USB interface USB interface 24 VDC power supplies MCP MCP connection cable M P24 M_ P24 For the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T control system connecting to the third and fourth drives is optional and depends upon whether you activate the software option additional axis If you desire to configure the control system to control an additional linear axis connect the additional axis to the third or fourth SINAMICS V70 which connects to a servo motor For the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M control system connecting to the fourth drive is optional and depends upon whether you activate the software option additional axis If you desire to configure the control system to control an additional linear axis connect the additional axis to the fourth SINAMICS V70 which connects to a servo motor 66 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 3 2 Connecting the drive and motor Connection overview The connection illustration below shows you a system connection example where the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED controls one drive 3 phase 380 VAC line supply Drive Bus terminator L1 L2 L3 1
201. hout reference point REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS Direction for approaching the reference point e O e 1 34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM 5000 Velocity for searching for the reference cam 34040 0 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER Velocity for searching for the zero mark 34050 0 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVER Direction for searching for the zero mark SE 04 0 e 1 34060 0 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST 20 Checking the maximum distance from the refer ence cam 34070 REFP_VELO_POS mm min 10000 Positioning velocity for approaching the refer ence point 34080 0 REFP_MOVE_DIST 2 0 Reference point distance with marker 34090 0 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR Correction of reference point distance 34093 0 REFP_CAM_MARKER_DIST Distance between the reference cam and the first zero mark Note You must set the length of the reference cam based on the velocity set by MD34020 An axis can stop above the cam after it approaches the cam at the velocity set by MD34020 and then decelerates to 0 a mm mm 2 a 2 mm 34092 0 REFP_CAM_SHIFT mm Shift of the reference cam mm a mm 1 3 3 Setting spindle parameters The control system controls one analog spindle You can commission the spindle by setting the relevant machine data under this commissioning step Softkey functions 69 45 13 2615 62 69 Step Set spindle Next Create ser 8 14 parameters start up archive Position Help Max velocity MD35130 1 Max velocity for
202. ice information This section shows you how to define the OEM service planner Creating a new service task To create a new service task perform the following steps SYSTEM 4 SHIFT ALARM l 3 Gery D planer Hew 4 task J 5 OK Viewing the service task Enter the desired operating area Press this key on the PPU to view the extended softkeys Enter the main screen of service planning Create a new task Enter values in the respective fields Create new task Task description 1 TEST 2 Interval h 10 First warning h 1 4 Humber of warnings 1 The description of the service task set by the user Maximum time until the next maintenance in hours if this value 0 this data set is ac cepted by the PLC as a valid service task 3 Time of the first warning is displayed since the user defined the task This value must be less than that of the interval 4 Number of warnings that are output by the PLC Confirm the above input to complete creating the new task To view the created service task proceed as follows SYSTEM 4 oy A SHIFT ALARM Oo Sys a data a l 110 Enter the desired operating area Enter the main screen of HMI data Enter the folder related to HMI data Start up archive Oo EQNCK PLC data File for license key Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 Navigate to the highlighted folder shown below
203. ices can damage them For damaged motors devices hazardous voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components e Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport storage and operation e Do not use any damaged motors devices Danger to life through electric shock due to unconnected cable shields Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross coupling due to unconnected cable shields e As a minimum connect cable shields and the cores of cables that are not used at one end at the grounded housing potential Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 T Danger to life due to electric shock when not grounded For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with protection class I high voltages can be present at open exposed parts which when touched can result in death or severe injury e Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations Danger to life due to electric shock when opening plug connections in operation When opening plug connections in operation arcs can result in severe injury or death e Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a no voltage state unless it has been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation Danger to life due to fire spreading if housing is inadequate Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material damage e Install devices with
204. ignal Description O Power connector Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 59 4 2 1 2 Main circuit wiring Wiring diagram for SINAMICS V70 main circuit example 3 phase 380 VAC line supply L3 L2 L1 PE Fuse Circuit breaker option Line filter option Power cable Cable shield SIMOTICS S 1FL6 Note For more information about the wiring of the external braking resistor see Section Connecting an external braking resistor DCP R1 R1 Page 65 Note Filter A line filter is required so that the system can pass the CE certification radiated emission test or conducted emission test Circuit breaker You can install a circuit breaker to protect the system For more information about the order number of Siemens recommended filters and circuit breakers see Section Page 22 4 2 2 Connecting the 24 V power supply STO X6 Control circuit interfaces drive side Illustration Safe Torque Off STO interfaces Control power input interfaces Maximum connectable cross section 1 5 mm2 1 Maximum current consumption values without a brake power supply and with a brake power supply are respectively 1 A and 3A For more information about the 24 VDC power supply see Section Options Page 22 Commissioning Manual 60 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Wiring Material damages and personal injuries by the drop of a hanging axis When the servo system is used as a hanging ax
205. inations o O Button combinations Press this button combination for four seconds to restart the drive urrent display to the left page when F is displayed at the upper right corner for example a e Crei display to the right page when is displayed at the lower right corner for exam ple wu iio 8 8 8 8 8 8 Takes 20 s to 30s Drive is busy In the case of a task being executed In the case of a single fault Fault code of the first fault In the case of multiple faults In the case of multiple faults In the case of a single alarm Alarm code of the first alarm In the case of multiple alarms In the case of multiple alarms Parameter number Read only parameter Parameter number Editable parameter Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 139 Display P XXXXX XXX XXX sd dr Update 140 a LI Parameter number Editable parameter the dot means that at least one parameter has been changed Indexed parameter Figure after In indicates the number of indi ces For example In 01 means that this indexed parameter is 1 Negative parameter value Current display can be moved to left or right Current display can be moved to right Current display can be moved to left Operating display servo off Editable parameter group Editable parameter group The dot means that at least one parameter has been changed without saving Read only parameter group Function group Set Drive Bus address Jog func
206. initialization of the PI service is required By default MD14512 19 2 0 which indicates that the control system will automatically delete the password after NC restart If you want the control system to remember the last used password every time the NC restarts you need to set MD14512 19 2 1 Timing diagram PLCASUP 1 started DB3400 DBX0000 0 0 PLCASUP 1 being executed DB3400 DBX1000 1 0 PLCASUP1 completed DB3400 DBX1000 0 0 PLCASUP2 started DB3400 DBX0001 0 0 PLCASUP2 being executed DB3400 DBX1001 1 0 PLCASUP2 completed DB3400 DBX1001 0 0 Local variable definition e Inputs Name Type Description S BYTE ASUP1_trigger BOOL Start ASUP1 rise edge ASUP2_trigger BOOL Start ASUP2 rise edge Outputs Name Type Description S O ASUP1Run BOOL Indicates whether ASUP1 is running ASUP2Run BOOL Indicates whether ASUP2 is running Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 257 Name Type Description S BOOL ASUP1 error BOOL ASUP2 error Occupied global variables Relevant machine data 10702 IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK 11602 ASUP_START_MASK 11604 ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL 20116 IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP No Value Description 14512 19 2 The control system will not delete the password after NC restart oO The control system will delete the password after NC
207. irs Anywhere in the automation equipment where faults might cause physical injury or major material damage in other words where faults could be dangerous additional external precautions must be taken or facilities must be provided that guarantee or enforce a safe operational state even when there is a fault e g using an independent limit value switch mechanical locking mechanisms EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY OFF devices 2 Scope of delivery 2 1 System overview The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system is an economic numerical control system for milling or turning machines The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED controller coupled with the high performance SINAMICS V70 drive and the SIMOTICS S 1FL6 motor is able to control up to five axes including one spindle Control system versions e SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T turning version The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T control system is able to control up to two feed axes two additional axes software licenses required and one spindle e SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M milling version The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M control system is able to control up to three feed axes one additional axis software licenses required and one spindle Controller versions Both the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T and SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M controllers are available in the following versions e PPU161 2 horizontal operator panel English version e PPU161 2 horizontal operator panel Chinese version e PPU
208. is the axis will drop if the positive and negative poles of the 24 V power supply are connected inversely Unexpected drop of the hanging axis may cause material damages and personal injuries Make sure that the 24 V power supply is correctly connected Material damages and personal injuries by the drop of a hanging axis It is not allowed to use the STO with a hanging axis because the axis may drop Unexpected drop of the hanging axis may cause material damages and personal injuries Note Using the STO function The STO1 STO and STO2 are short circuited at the factory When the STO function is to be used you must remove the short circuit stick before connecting the STO interfaces The safety function of the servo drive is SIL 2 EN61800 5 2 If you do not need to use it any more you must reinsert the short circuit stick Otherwise the motor will not run The wiring for factory setting and using the STO function is shown as follows Servo drive Servo drive Factory setting Using STO function Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 61 If you use the STO function with the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system perform the wiring as illustrated below SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Drive Bus cable Emergency stop button Delay switch must be connected SINAMICS V70 SINAMICS V70 STO function In conjunction with a machine function or in the event of a fault the Safe Torque Off STO function is
209. is possible that the cooling can be achieved with fans drawing air from the outside via a filter Natural convection causes the warm air to exit via a filter The fact that air is being drawn directly from the outside means that this system can never be airtight Having a fan for the inlet side only ensures that the cabinet is positively pressurized which helps keep contaminants from entering It is extremely important that the filters are service regularly to avoid ingress of contaminants and to maintain the efficiency of the cooling process Outlet via filter Drive equipment Temperature measuring point Inlet via fan and filter unit Commissioning Manual 34 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 3 2 4 2 Correct installation of cooling units The cool air should be directed to the bottom of the drive The natural convection will draw the air through the drives The cool air from the cooling unit should not be directed straight onto into the drives it should be allowed to mix with the warmer air already in the cabinet this will minimise the risk of condensation forming Cabinet top mounted cooling units require a method of directing the cool air from the cooling unit to the bottom of the drives In the case of a door mounted unit it may be necessary to direct the cool air with the use of a baffle Outlet Drive equipment Baffle Temperature measuring point rm 3 3 Mounting the motor Note For more information a
210. is stopped with M05 MO2 during rotation When the spindle brakes the corresponding output becomes active meanwhile the spindle does not accept any rotary command until the braking completes Local variable definition Inputs Names Type ___ Desoripton ee C C RNCSS DELAY WORD Spindle brake delay time unit 0 1 s BOOL SP_EN BOOL Condition for spindle operation 1 allowed 0 not allowed BOOL Brake for spindle 1 enabled 0 forbidden Outputs Name Type Description S O SP_brake BOOL Spindle brake contactor SP_LED BOOL Spindle operating status LED Assigned global variables SP_B_CMD BOOL Spindle braking command TIMER Spindle braking timer Relevant PLC machine data No Type Description S 14510 13 BOOL Spindle braking duration unit 0 1 s 14512 19 1 BOOL Selection of spindle braking function 1 enabled 0 forbidden Example for calling subroutine 42 ohid O SPINDLE EN DA4500 DBW26 4 DELA oP_brakepPa WA SO 040rvEn oP_LEDPM236 0 M225 O47 SP_EN DAB4500 0841019 1 4lsBrake Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 253 A 7 4 16 Subroutine 43 MEAS JOG measurement in the JOG mode Purpose Subroutine 43 is used to process the measuring probe signal and realize the measuring in the JOG mode function You can use this subroutine to calibrate the probe and measure a tool The precondition for calling this subroutine is to call subroutine MCP_NCK SBR38 in the
211. ite Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bt2 Bit4 Bto 3000 3001 Alarm 16 Alarm15 Alarm14 Alarm13 Alarm12 Alarm11 Alarm 10 3002 Alarm 24 Alarm 23 Alarm 22 Alarm 21 Alarm 20 Alarm 19 Alarm 18 Alarm 17 3003 Alarm 32 Alarm 31 Alarm 30 Alarm 29 Alarm 28 Alarm 27 Alarm 26 Alarm 25 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 211 Signals from operator panel retentive area DB1900 Signals from operator panel r w HMI gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 itt Bito Switch over Simulation Ma active chine Work DB1900 Signals from HMI r HMI gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bit5 Bit4 Bt3 Bit2 Bitt Bito O a a 1000 1003 P O Axis number for handwheel 1 Machine Handwheel Contour C A axis selected handwheel 10040 fo Axis number for handwheel 2 Machine Handwheel Contour 1005 1006 wo e A A e A e d General selection status signals to HMI retentive area DB1900 Signals to HMI r w PLC gt HMI interface Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit4 Bito 5000 OP key T 5001 5002 measure ment in JOG 5008 O O 5003 5004 T number for tool measurement in JOG DINT 5007 5008 5011 Commissioning Manual 212 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 2 7 Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel Overview NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bit5 Bit4 Bt3 Bitz Bit1 Bto CE I L A e E e A
212. ive and negative directions of each axis e An analog spindle SP the fourth axis e PLC controlled timely and quantitatively lubrication system e PLC controlled cooling system Assignment of inputs and outputs Signal Description Remark 10 0 Emergency Stopbutton Normally closed Limit switch in the direction of axis X Limit switch in the direction of axis Y Lg 10 4 Limit switch inthe direction of axis Yo Limit switch in the direction of axis Z 06 Limit switch in the direction of axis Z Normally open Commissioning Manual 284 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Signal ipo Rea Tanz SSCS ali at ow evel noraty cose a A a nora open e T eserves reserves a a A reserves reserves o R 4 0 a0 wonge OOOO S Tor A a2 Ghiptoward OOO as chipbacward OOOO a4 cooingpump O p 005 Lubrication pump S SS 00 6 Safety door open es Tor E oro Magazine rotating dockwise O SS a11 Magazine rotating counterciockwise a12 magazine approaching spindle postion a1 3 Magazine approaching original positon a14 Tool release from the spine O JS Tas OOO Coas poo o7 Handheiduntvaid OOOO SOS Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 285 Definition of user defined keys on the MCP Structure of the sample application OB1 Each scan SM0 0 MCP_NCK SBR37 Transferring MCP and HMI signals to the NCK interface Each scan SMO 0 HANDWHL SBR39 Selecting a hand whee
213. ized Open loop closed loop control parameters have had to be changed for the following reasons e As a result of other parameters they have exceeded the dynamic limits They cannot be used due to the fact that the hardware detected not having certain features The DC link voltage monitoring is active and the lower DC link voltage threshold was reached in the Operation state The DC link voltage monitoring is active and the upper DC link voltage threshold was reached in the Operation state The condition l_act 0 and Uq_set_1 longer than 16 ms at its limit is present and can be caused by the following Motor not connected or motor contac tor open No DC link voltage present Motor Module defective Physically check the bus cables connect ors terminating resistor shielding etc Correct the interconnection of the controller sign of life Check whether the controller correctly sends the sign of life Check the permissible telegram failure rate Check the bus and controller for utilization level e g bus cycle time was set too short Reduce the motor load Check the surrounding air temperature and the motor ventilation Check the wiring and the connection Check the motor temperature model pa rameters It is not necessary to change the parameters as they have already been correctly limited Check the line supply voltage Check the infeed Reduce the lower DC link threshold Swit
214. l direction of rotation inverted 1004 Axis 2 in Work Traversing keys GE Rapid trav Traversing Feedrate Activate handwheel ees wae coded 1005 Axis 2 in Work Machine function Continuous Var INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC a 1007 O H Invert handwheel direction 1006 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 219 Axis 3 in Work Traversing keys Rapid trav Traversing Activate handwheel a coded stop Plus Minus erse over key disable ride Machine function Continuous Var INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC s handwheel direction The handwheel number is represented according to the MD_HANDWH_VDI_LREPRESENTATION machine data in a bit coded 0 or binary coded 1 manner 2 Machine function the machine function is only entered if the INC inputs in the operating mode signal range active signal DB2600DBX 1 0 is not set Axis 3 in Work Signals from NC channel Status signals from NC channel DB3300 Signals from NCK channel r NCK gt PLC interface Bye Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bt2 Bt1 Bito Last action MO M1 Approach i Forwards Backwards Execution block active active block active block active traverse traverse from exter active active nal active program M2 M30 Block Handwheel Rev feder Referenc test active active search override ate active ing active Channel status Program status Interrupted Aborted
215. l configurations for machines Bit 2 automatic lubrication at power on Bit 4 external signal for spindle stop Bit 5 fixed spindle direction Bit 6 the hardware limit is independent from a PLC program Bit 7 each feed axis has a hardware limit switch activated when Bit 6 0 14512 19 Bit 1 function of spindle braking Bit 2 password clearing by power on 0 delete the password 1 do not delete the password Bit 3 selection between normal mode and maintenance mode 0 normal mode 1 maintenance mode Bit 7 manual machine function this function become active if you have installed licensed turning ma chine system and called it with a PLC subroutine 14512 20 Bit 0 grey coded switch 0 spindle override controlled by the grey mode 1 spindle override controlled by trigger user keys Bit 1 spindle disable mode 0 disable by pressing the spindle stop key 1 disable when detecting the standstill speed Bit 2 activate the first additional axis 0 disable the additional axis control 1 enable the additional axis control Bit 3 the first additional axis as the second spindle and does not need to be kept enabled 1 as the second spindle and does not need to be kept enabled Bit 5 define the spindle override startup value 0 the startup spindle override is always 100 1 re code the spindle override value of the last machine turn off for the next startup Bit 6 7 define the spindle override shift speed 1 When the positi
216. l through the interface signal DBB1900 DBB1xxx Each scan SM0 0 AXIS_CTL SBR40 Coordinate enabling control hardware limit etc Each scan SM0 0 SPINDLE SBR42 Spindle control Each scan SM0 0 COOLING SBR44 Cooling control Each scan SM0 0 LUBRICAT SBR45 Lubrication control Setting the relevant PLC machine data 14512 16 Function of chip conveyor Function of safety door When the function of safety door is active it can be triggered by M01 M02 Handwheel assignment with the MCP HMI 14512 17 Tool magazine function Selection between handwheel and hand held unit 0 handwheel 1 hand held unit 14512 18 One time automatic lubrication after the power on External signal for spindle stop Fixing the direction of a spindle Hardware limit is independent of the PLC application One hardware limit triggered per axis enabled when bit 6 0 14512 19 Function of spindle braking Bit2 2 Password clearing by power on 0 delete the password 1 do not delete the password Bit7 MM Manual Machine Plus function enabled when the MM has been licensed and corre a PLC subroutine has been called 14512 20 Spindle disable mode Commissioning Manual 286 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 8 AMM communication tool With the communication tool Access MyMachine P2P AMM you can establish an Ethernet connection and realize data peek between the control system and a PC This tool is available in the Toolbox and is supported by Wind
217. lDir tool change direction Purpose Subroutine 54 is used to find out the direction of searching for an adjacent tool and the pre indexing position this is the previous position of the desired tool in the direction of an adjacent tool To find out the direction you need to know the max tool number of the turret and the programmed tool number You can use this subroutine to control the turret to search for an adjacent tool on a turning machine or a machine centre The turret tool position ranges from 2 to 64 For example Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 267 Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description DWORD Possible positions of the turret DWORD Programmed tool number DWORD Current tool number Outputs Name Type Description S O P 7 indexing position the previous tool position of the desired tool in the direction of Fe adjacent tool iD te Direction for tool change 1 for turret CW 0 for turret CCW Assigned global variables None Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 54 This subroutine is called by subroutine 52 and subroutine 53 Network 9 Make out the direction of turret as well as pre indexing position ONE TOOL_DIR EN 12 Tmax P_INDEXo P_C_TFUNC 4 Pnum T CURRENT 4 Pcurr PLINDEXo M20 1 A 7 4 28 Subroutine 55 Tail_stock_T Tailstock control program for turning machines Purpose Subroutine 55 is use
218. liance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for the respective component Danger of an accident occurring due to missing or illegible warning labels Missing or illegible warning labels can result in accidents involving death or serious injury e Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation e Attach any missing warning labels to the components in the national language if necessary e Replace illegible warning labels Commissioning Manual 8 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 NOTICE Device damage caused by incorrect voltage insulation tests Incorrect voltage insulation tests can damage the device e Before carrying out a voltage insulation check of the system machine disconnect the devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the manufacturer and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the system machine Danger to life when safety functions are inactive Safety functions that are inactive or that have not been adjusted accordingly can cause operational faults on machines that could lead to serious injury or death Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before commissioning Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system including all safety related components Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted and activated thr
219. ll the signals of interfaces are named by symbols and arranged in different symbol tables The name of a symbol follows some conventions For details see the topic Conventions for the symbols used inthe subroutines Page 241 35 7 13 Reserved for the manufacturer S 6 MANMACH JOG function o O a4 fASUP SUP function o O IS_MCP Signals from to the MCP IS_HMI Signals from to the HMI Signals from to the NCK i Signals fromitotheNCK o Structure of subroutines PLC sample subroutines offer PLC functions for the machine tool Subroutine No Name Description SS O 0to19 f Reserved for the manufacturer SSS 22 AUX_SAFE_DOOR Safety door control called in the subroutine AUX_MCP for a milling application 23 AUX_CHIP Chip conveyor control called in the subroutine AUX_MCP for a milling application 31 PLC_ini_USR_INI Reserved for initialization functions of the manufacturer this subrou tine is automatically called by subroutine 32 PLC_INI PLC initialization executed at the first PLC cycle SMO 1 Commissioning Manual 238 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Subroutine No Name Description S 38 39 40 4 44 45 48 49 Virtual gear change of the spindle Turret1_HED_T Turret control for turning machine turret type Hall element transistor 4 6 position Turret2_BIN_T Turret control for turning machine turret type position detection with encodings Turret38_CODE_T Hydraulic turret control for turning
220. losing time of the brake which ensures that the pulses are only suppressed after the brake has closed Dependency p1215 p1216 p1226 Threshold for zero speed de 210000 0 20 00 rom Float IM T U tection 0 Description Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring e When braking with OFF1 or OFF3 when the threshold is undershot standstill is identified The following applies when the brake control is activated e When the threshold is undershot the brake control is started and the system waits for the brake closing time in p1217 The pulses are then suppressed If the brake control is not activated the following applies e When the threshold is undershot the pulses are suppressed and the drive coasts down Dependency p1215 p1216 p1217 p1227 01227 Zero speed detection monitor 0 000 300 000 4 000 ing time Description Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification When braking with OFF1 or OFF3 standstill is identified after this time has expired after the setpoint speed has fallen below p1226 After this the brake control is started the system waits for the closing time in p1217 and then the pulses are Suppressed Dependency p1215 p1216 p1217 p1226 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 165 Par No Max Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed Description Sets the delay time f
221. lows to export the PLC application created with PLC Programming Tool to a USB stick EE PLC Programming Tool D SINUMERIK 808D 808D turning pty EQ File Edit View PLC Debug Tools Windows Help i Mew Ctri N _ Y Open Ctrl 0 Close Save Ctrl 5 Save As I R21 Import OF 5 323 Export cpp i IE Io 391 Save the PLC application as a pte file with a desired file name e g plc_app pte onto the USB stick Insert the USB stick into the USB interface at the front of the PPU Select the desired operating area on the PPU Upload Ctrl U Open the USB stick through the following softkey operations SYS USB E data N Select the pte file and then press this softkey to copy the file Hane Type Length 1688D on PC DIR Hult t Language DIR j user cycle DIR j B1 txt H B 5 GHEDsys te ing 125 61 HEB E Helpi txt H B 5 Helpz png 21 67 KE f 5 SinunerikArchitectureT ppt cH 98 HB i 5 alc txt HE B alcu_eng txt 5 75 KB 5 almc txt 311 EB E almc_chs txt 305 B B arc_product arc 36 HH KB B cov con 314 E 5 keys bak 416 5 oennanual pdf 1 74 HE E c con 544 6 Press this softkey and then access the folder for the NCK PLC data by pressing the follow ing key Press this softkey A warning note appears warning you that the original pte file will be overwritten Press this softkey to continue The download has been completed when the progress bar disappears Commissioning
222. lt Check the Motor Module and motor combi nation Ensure that there is a DC link voltage Check the DC link busbar Enable the in feed Replace the associated infeed or drive of the signaling component Connect the original power unit and power up the Control Unit again POWER ON Check whether the servo motor can rotate freely or not Check the torque limit Check the inversion of the actual value Check the motor encoder connection Check the encoder pulse number Check and correct the maximum speed 91082 Contact the Hotline Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 F30001 Power unit Over current Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F30002 DC link voltage overvoltage Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F30003 DC link voltage undervoltage Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F30004 Drive heat sink overtemperature Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F30005 Power unit Over load 2t Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F30011 Line phase failure in main circuit Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 The power unit has detected an overcur rent condition Closed loop control is incorrectly pa rameterized Motor has a short circuit or fault to ground frame Power cables are not correctly con nected Power cables exceed the maximum
223. lution is independent of the PLC and thus is much safer 24 VDC 3rd axis swtich Input to _3LMTp Release button 2nd axis swtich Input to _2LMTp 1st axis swtich Input to _1LMTp Emergency Stop Input to KA1 E Key 24V Input to _OVLrel pme 65 of the SINAMICS V60 Encoding the hardware limit switches ump falm SLT EMERGENCY STOP active CG 4 4 to o lo ff 8 902 08x4 6 3rd overlimit In the hardware solution above the feed stop signals for all axes can be activated via the hardware limit switches when any of the hardware limits is reached or an EMERGENCY STOP happens You can check the information of the PLC diagnostics from the encoding of the hardware limit switches shown in the table above and identify the cause Emergency Stop button or a hardware limit switch of an axis of the EMERGENCY STOP signal Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 249 Note When using the hardware solution you must take below information into consideration e You must assign the axes one by one for example X axis Z axis spindle or X axis Y axis Z axis spindle You must not assign the axes like X axis Y axis spindle Z axis e You must set constant 1 i e SMO 0 to the input signals of the hardware limits for undefined axes otherwise the hardware limits of the undefined axes can be activated Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description S Positive hardware
224. mber of warnings to be output 32 2540 Reserved 32 Actual data Bye Bt7 Bite sits Bit4 Bits Bit2 itt Bito o Interval 1 h 2 Number of warnings tobe output SSS O so Reserve O e Reserved 20 10 11 Reserved_1 2 Reserved _2 2 Interval 32 h Number of warnings to be output 32 Reserved_1 32 Reserved_2 32 A 7 2 15 User interface for ctrl energy Energy saving profile Bye Bt7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bt2 Bitt Bito Control signals Set time to Immediate pre warning ly activate limit energy saving profile Control signals HMI gt PLC Immediate ly activate energy saving profile Signals to check test the energy saving profile PLC user Master computer signal Reserved Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 231 4 Status signal Activation Energy time T1 saving expired profile ac tive 5 Reversed Actual value actual value T1 Actual value actual value T2 Effectiveness profile Disable Energy energy saving saving profile con profile figured State conditions HMI gt PLC Screen Data trans Operator change fer panel 12 State conditions HMI gt PLC Machine control panel 13 State conditions HMI gt PLC NC channel 1 in eee CO conditions BEEE gt d 15 PLC user Master i computer signal 16 State conditions HMI gt PLC Activation time T1 18 State conditions HMI gt PLC Activation time T2
225. missioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 3 Copy the program file with the toolbar button 83 keyboard shortcuts Ctrl C or from the context menu 4 Select the program directory in the NC file system 5 Paste the copied file into the current directory with the toolbar button V or from the context menu 4 Keyboard shortcuts Ctrl Registered as Manufacturer Control type BUD SINUMERIE 8080 Connection IP 172 716 202 207 Path Program O O O O O O O OoOo Bookmark Part program IS TEST mpf i F D System CF card 1 a di RCS Alternatively you can transfer the file by simply dragging and dropping it from the PC file system to the NC file system After the file is successfully pasted you can find it in the corresponding directory on the control system A 8 3 Remote control With the remote control function you can e Operate the HMI remotely from a PC e Generate screenshots of the HMI and save them onto a PC Configuring the remote access rights Proceed through the following steps to configure the remote access rights on the HMI SYSTEM 1 Select the desired operating area on the PPU AN ALARM R 2 Press this softkey to change the settings if desired enote am diag 3 Press this softkey to make the settings changeable Note that this softkey is visible only with a Change system password 4 Use this key to select the desired right for remote access You can choose to
226. mming Tool you can perform the following operations Creating the PLC program Editing the PLC program Making a connection between the programming tool and the system Compiling the PLC program Downloading the PLC program Uploading the PLC program Monitoring the PLC PLC instructions Various instructions are available in PLC Programming Tool You can view them in the instruction branch of the instruction tree i iil E E E E Be Be Be Be Bel Be Be Be oject BOSD PPLI1 6s EH Program Block i MAIN 061 i SBA_O SBRQ Symbol Table O Status Chart H Data Block WY Cross Reference ae Communications Instructions an Bit Logic 2 Compare fea Convert 41 Counters 8 Floating Point Math et Integer Math iin Interrupt an Logical Operations A Move ar Program Control ga Shift Rotate eS Timers rill Libraries oy Subroutines Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 13 You can right click an instruction or directly press the F1 key to view its help information ge S Communicat i A G E Instructions Show Back Forward Home Print Flay Bit Logic 2 a 4 laa Assign bit value directly Hl Ph 1 NI Instruction to directly assign a bit value aaa lt 3 m lt gt 5 ae Rl _ Ty NOP Inputs Outputs Data types oo He lll a au lk 2 a lt 3 l oot SI F lt 3 RI H E Compare H E Conver H E Counters
227. moothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity E Description Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity Description Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity smoothed Description Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity Dependency 0068 Dependency r0068 r0029 Current actual value field Arms Float generating smoothed Description Displays the smoothed field generating actual current Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity r0030 Current actual value torque Arms Float generating smoothed Description Displays the smoothed torque generating actual current Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity ee Description Displays the smoothed torque actual value Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a pro
228. mory Intemational Data Block Regional Settings Measurement System jus i Time Format 12 hour Date Format mm dd Avy The following message box pops up prompting that the software will restart to make the set ting effective i PLC Programming Tool will now exit in order to change options OK 3 Click this button to restart the software Then the display language is changed successfully Commissioning Manual 182 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 1 3 Selecting a target system In PLC Programming Tool you can select the PLC type as preset In the instruction tree the instructions that cannot be used for the target system are marked with a red x for example J After the PLC type is preset an error check of the program takes place when the program is written Operating sequence 1 Start PLC Programming Tool on your PC 2 Choose from the main screen menu as follows E PLC Programming Tool D SINUMERIK 808D 808D turning ptp EQ File Edit View Gegar RUN STOP JESE Compile view r Clear Information Program Block Compare Type Soles ok EMG_STOP BERS Then the following dialog opens PLC Type Select or read the PLC type from the PLC if you would like the software to range check parameters to the PLC s allowable memory ranges PLC Type 8US0 PPL1 6x 7 Communications
229. n Symbolic SMO 1 few Ti address EN Network 3 Emergency control SMa aaa 2 241 184 2 O M2 24 0 M2 Network 4 Interface processing activating the NCK signals SMO O Na EN Network 1 ite J PLC Status COTE Window 2 Cross status list OB1 SBR28 reference Two windows are available for you to view the program Progran block Commissioning Manual You can use this softkey to view the status of a subroutine 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 201 PLC You can use this softkey to check the PLC operating status and data info TERES You can use this softkey to look for the target address in the cross reference table reference ee Monitoring a PLC program with PLC Programming Tool Prerequisite Before you can collect status to monitor or debug your program make sure you have performed the following operations e Successfully compiling your program e Establishing communications between PLC Programming Tool and the control system e Successfully downloading your program to the control system You can use the toolbar button jf or the following menu command to monitor the online status of your PLC program when the PLC is in the run mode toolbar button P SI PLC Programming Tool D SINUMERIK 808D 808D turning ptp SII EQ File Edit View PLC Debug Tools Windows Help OSE SR amp Frstsan 4b 37 Multiple Scans
230. n communications to the Power Unit no longer possible 20A hex The Control Unit was inserted on a Power Unit which has another code number 20B hex The Control Unit was inserted on a Power Unit which although it has the same code number has a different serial number 601 hex The Control Unit was inserted on a Power Unit whose power performance class chassis unit is not supported The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance For distance coded encoders the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs This means that if a zero mark is missing depending on the pair generation this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the system Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol Reinsert the Control Unit CU or the Control Unit adapter CUAxx onto the original Power Unit PU and continue operation If required carry out a POWER ON for the CU and or the CUA Check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC Check the plug connections Check the encoder type encoder with equidistant zero marks Replace the encoder or encoder cable Check the encoder cable and shielding connection Replace the motor Check the encoder cable and shielding connection Replace the motor 177 F31117 Inver
231. nable the additional axis control 14510 12 Layout of the traverse keys e Fora turning variant 0 horizontal version 1 inclined version e Fora milling variant 0 vertical milling 1 knee type Example for calling subroutine 37 Sh0 0 MECF_NCE EN 04MODEF AFL_LED p M255 7 W251 044AFL_Key ConHw_L f M255 7 W251 04C0nHw_k SimConH f M255 7 W251 04SimConH MegDirSi p M255 7 W251 04 egDirSi INCwar_L f M255 7 W251 ONCyar k Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 247 A 7 4 11 Subroutine 38 MCP_Tool_Nr display tool number on the MCP Purpose Subroutine 38 is used to display active tool number lt 100 with the 7 segment LED on the MCP For a tool number 2 100 it displays FF Local variable definition None Assigned global variables None Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 38 ONE Tool Mr LED A 7 4 12 Subroutine 39 HANDWHL selecting a handwheel according to HMI interface signals Purpose Subroutine 39 is used to select one of the two handwheels to control an axis X Y or Z in the machine coordinate system or the workpiece coordinate system according to the HMI signals With the HANDWHEEL key and axis selection key on the MCP you can assign the handwheel 1 in the workpiece coordinate system to any axis Note You cannot use subroutine 39 together with subroutine 41 MINI_LHHU Local variable definition None Assigned global variable None
232. ng 2___ Reseed_ fe fe End user password End users e Entering or changing part of the machine data Default password e Editing programs CUSTOMER e Setting offset values e Measuring tools 7 Nopassword Enduses Je ooo O Protection level 7 is set automatically if no password is set and no protection level interface signal is set The protection level 7 can be set from the PLC user program by setting the bits in the user interface The number of machine data and drive data which can be read or modified depends on the protection level You can set the protection level for these function areas with the display machine data USER_CLASS Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 81 The control system is delivered with no password You must set the factory default manufacturer password SUNRISE to perform the commissioning work Perform the following steps to enter the password N 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM 2 Press this vertical softkey to open the following dialog Set yi 3 Enter SUNRISE with the PPU keyboard and press this softkey Accept A message now shows at the bottom of the screen which indicates that you have successfully set the password Access level Manufacturer The following password operations are also available in this operating area EnSTie To change the default password of the control system password Delete To delete the current password
233. ng Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 51 Pin assignment X60 Type Sub D 15 pin female Cable Type encoder cable Max length 10 m illustration Pin Signal Comment S a f Notassigned o 2 Notassigned o Notassigned o 4 5V 5 Vpowersupply S 5 Notassignaed o 6 5V _ 5V power supply S O ba spencooer 8 Notassigned o 9 M___ Ground 13 BO Track Connecting Connecting the inverter or servo spindle drive unipolar Pin4 FON Pin6 Pin7 V PPU Pin9 V Inverter or servo Kinto Z spindle drive 3 Pin12 B N Pin13 B fr Pin14 A N LA Pin15 A x Metal casing Shielding pindle encoder cable a g AO1 ii a acn lt a n Td ll Shieldinc T Setpoint cable 9 Spindle CCW k 10 M L IK2 1 10 V analog voltage 2 0 V signal 3 Use twisted pair cables for signals A A_N B B_N Z Z_N and 5 V M Commissioning Manual 52 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Connecting the inverter or servo spindle drive bipolar Pin4 5 V PPU Pin6 AAW Inverter or servo Pin7 V spindle drive Pin9 Pin10 A Pin11 N 3 Pin12 B N Pin13 B Wal Pin14 A N Pin15 A Metal casing Shielding i E E pindle encoder cable AO1 Z n AGND r SE2 Lir Setpoint cable 1 10 V analog voltage 2 0 V signal 3 Use twisted pair cables for signals A A_N B B_N Z Z_N and 5 V M 4 1 8 Ethernet interface X130 Pin assignment Type 8 pin RJ45 socket Cable Type Ethe
234. ng a slide show By default the slide show of Siemens product information is provided You can create the desired slide show as follows 1 Prepare your own slides and save them in the respective language folders on a USB stick Name each folder according to the following convention e Simplified Chinese folder name chs e English folder name eng The control system supports two kinds of image formats e png e bmp The image size is recommended to be 640 480 pixels for the best display effect Name each slide according to the following syntax e slide u png or e slide u bmp Here u is the number sequence starting with 1 For example slide1 png slide2 png slide3 png If your slides include both PNG format images and BMP format images number them sepa rately During the slide show the PNG format images will have a higher priority over the BMP format images 2 Insert the USB stick into the USB interface on the front panel of the PPU Ae N 3 Enter the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM 4 Locate the files on the USB stick through the following softkey operations Oo Sys a data gt P Leu Hame Type Length m Ceng DIR H 5 Select all the language folders for slide shows by using this softkey or you can select the ark all desired language folder by moving the cursor up and down 6 Copy the selected language folders with this softkey Copy Commissioning Manual 108 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015
235. nputs po inputs pat input 1004 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs Pp tpt DB3000 Mode signals to NCK r w PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bitz Bit4 Bito Ooo o Mode oO O Single block block Type A Type B Machine function Continuous Var INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC ier i i a 1 To use the machine function n in DB3000 DBB2 you must set the INC inputs in the operating mode signal range active signal DB2600 DBX1 0 to 1 DB3100 Mode signals from NCK r NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bitz Bit4 Bito Reset 808 BESA AUTO Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 217 Active machine function Machine function Continuous Var INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC ac traversing active active active active active tive Es S S S S l S A 7 2 9 Channel signals Signals to NC channel Control signals to NC channel DB3200 Signals to NCK channel r w PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit1 Bito Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate test run M01 single block DRF traverse traverse forwards backwards feedrate Activate Activate program protection referencing Activate skip block Feedrate offset 2 5 a traverse override Pp oH e F E bD c B A Feedrate Rapid trav Path veloci
236. nse times of the control system and of the drive Operation and or environmental conditions outside the specification Condensation conductive contamination Parameterization programming cabling and installation errors Use of wireless devices mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of the control system External influences damage 2 Inthe event of a fault exceptionally high temperatures including an open fire as well as emissions of light noise particles gases etc can occur inside and outside the inverter e g Component failure Software errors Operation and or environmental conditions outside the specification External influences damage Inverters of the Open Type IP20 degree of protection must be installed in a metal control cabinet or protected by another equivalent measure such that contact with fire inside and outside the inverter is not possible Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 11 3 Hazardous shock voltages caused by for example Component failure Influence during electrostatic charging Induction of voltages in moving motors Operation and or environmental conditions outside the specification Condensation conductive contamination External influences damage 4 Electrical magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to people with a pacemaker implants or metal replacement joints etc if they are too close 5 Rele
237. nt filter 1 PT2 general filter This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general filter The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency Dependency p1414 p1415 p1418 Speed setpoint filter 1 denomi 0 001 10 000 0 700 Float nator damping Description Sets the denominator damping for velocity setpoint filter 1 PT2 general filter This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general filter Dependency p1414 p1415 p1419 Speed setpoint filter 1 numera 0 5 16000 0 1999 0 Float tor natural frequency Description Sets the numerator natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 general filter This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency Dependency p1414 p1415 p1420 Speed setpoint filter 1 numera 0 000 10 000 0 700 Float IM T U tor damping Commissioning Manual 166 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Par No Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed Description Sets the numerator damping for speed setpoint filter 1 general filter This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter Dependency p1414 p1415 p1460 Speed controller P gain adap 0 000 999
238. ntrol keys Alarm cancellation key Cancels alarms and messages that are marked with this symbol On board wizard key Provides step by step guides on basic commissioning and operation procedures Help key Calls help information Cursor keys 000 Operating area keys USB interface Status LEDs 0000 A 1 2 Elements on the MCP The MCP for the control system is available in the following variants Applicable control system Horizontal MCP English version SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T Turning M Milling Horizontal MCP Chinese version Vertical MCP with a reserved slot for the handwheel English version Vertical MCP with a reserved slot for the handwheel Chinese version Vertical MCP with an override switch for the spindle English version Vertical MCP with an override switch for the spindle Chinese version Commissioning Manual 136 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Horizontal MCP 50 70 Vi eel 7 90 7 100 70 100 N 4 s0 M0 h Reserved hole for emergency stop button Handwheel key Controls the axis movement with external handwheels Tool number display Displays the number of the currently active tool Operating mode keys Program control keys User defined keys Axis traversing keys 00000 OO Spindle override switch unavailable for the vertical MCP with a reserved slot for the handwheel Spindle state keys Feedrate override switch Traverses the select
239. o stop the spindle after pressing the NC reset key In this case call subroutine 59 MM_MCP_808D after executing subroutine 37 MCP_NCK Then you do not need to rewrite subroutine 37 MCP_NCKk Local variable definition Inputs Name Type i Deescription S SP_STOP_K BOOL Spindle stop Assigned global variables None Relevant PLC machine data No Unit Range Description S MD14512 19 7 1 to enable the manual machine function 0 to disable the manual machine function Example for calling subroutine 59 DB4500 DBA1019 F MM MOP _soeo El P_M_SP_STOP A 7 4 32 Subroutine 60 Disk_MGZ_M disk style tool magazine used for milling Purpose You can use subroutine 60 to control the disk style tool magazine on a milling machine In the reference point mode initialize the tool magazine by pressing the Original position of the tool magazine key In the manual mode you can rotate the tool magazine clockwise or counter clockwise and enable the tool magazine to reach the spindle or tool change position respectively through the Clockwise rotation of the magazine Counter clockwise rotation of the magazine Tool magazine reaching the spindle and Tool magazine reaching the tool change position keys In the auto mode you need to execute M06 to call the tool change subroutine when compiling a part program Subroutine 60 and the tool change subroutine must be used together during the tool change process Three operations
240. of Cables in drag CHAINS ccccecccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeessaneeesaaeees 4 CORRE CUNO ete cece NEA r n E E A EE E ai 4 1 Interfaces on the PPU and MOP nannnnnnnnnsnnnnsnnnnsnrnnsnrensnrrnsnrrrsnrersnrrrsnrrnsnrrnsnrrrsnrrrsnrrrsnrrrsnrrrsnrrrsnrrrne 4 1 1 Digital input interfaces X100 X101 X102 20 cece ccccceeeecceeeeceeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeseueeseeeetanees 4 1 2 Digital output interfaces X200 X201 0 0 cece eecccseeeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeseeeeceacesseeeeseeeeseueessaeesseeeseeeseneetsaees 4 1 3 Fc Se AU OCI AZT sedane iea ei ea ae ETNE 4 1 4 Distributed WO X301 X302 sox acasenseccerscexcceececsveavacenseseeneuscyasieenacedaxecsceldinenucadanseeua tice raved cavecectbeeanceecesseea el 4 1 5 Handwheel inputs X10 2 0 cccccccc cece ceeee eee ee ee cece asec sees eee anes ee eesaeeee sees a eeseeese setae essa eesaeeeaaeesaeesaeeeaeeaey 4 1 6 Drive Bus interlace X 126 sser eris iA R EAEE AEREA EERE E SETE 4 1 7 Analog spindle interface X54 spindle encoder interface X60 4 1 8 Ethernet interface X130 ccccccsseccccssseccceeeecsececseseecseeesseuecesseeeesseusecseaeeesseueeessueeessegeeesseneessaaees 4 1 9 RS292 Menace A2 anne nen enon eee eo E a rere a ee eee eee 4 1 10 Power Supply interface X1 cccccccccecccseececeeeecaeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeeseeceseeesseeesseeeeseeceseeeesseeeseeeeseeeesaaees 4 1 11 USB interface on the front Cover of the PPU
241. oling method Setrooolng Setrooolng Back side IP20 Back side IP00 Electrical data Supply voltage 24 VDC permissible range 20 4 28 8 V Powered by PPU Ripple 3 6 Vpp Current consumption from 24 V Basic configuration typically 1 5 A inputs outputs open Non periodic overvoltage 35 V 500 ms duration 50 s recovery time Total starting current 1A Rated input current 2A Power loss max 50 W Interference immunity in accord 2 20 us ance with EN 61800 3 Overvoltage category Degree of pollution Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 127 Horizontal variant Vertical variant Horizontal variant Vertical variant 161 2 160 2 Transport and storage conditions Temperature 20 C to 60 C 20 C to 60 C Vibration resistance transport 5 Hz to 9 Hz 3 5 mm 5 Hz to 9 Hz 3 5 mm 9 Hz to 200 Hz 1g 9 Hz to 200 Hz 1g Shock resistance transport 10 g peak value 6 ms duration 100 shocks in each of the 3 axes vertical to one another Free fall lt 1m Relative humidity 5 to 95 without condensation 5 to 95 without condensation Atmospheric pressure 1060 hPa to 700 hPa corresponds to an altitude of 3 000 m Ambient operating conditions 0 C to 45 C Atmospheric pressure From 1080 hPa to 795 hPa From 1080 hPa to 795 hPa Vibration resistance in operation 10 Hz to 58 Hz 0 35 mm 10 Hz to 58 Hz 0 35 mm 58 Hz to 200 Hz 1g 58 Hz to 200 Hz 1g Shock resistance in operation 10 g peak value 6 ms
242. ommissioning Manual 22 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Braking resistor A braking resistor is used for the SINAMICS V70 When the internal braking resistor cannot meet the braking requirements an external braking resistor can be used to dump the regenerative energy produced by the motor thus giving greatly improved braking and deceleration capabilities Select a standard braking resistor according to the table below Illustration Resistance Q Max power kW Rated power W Max energy kJ se p e 229 a83 Filter Siemens recommends you to use a filter to protect the system from high frequency noise The table below lists all the filters recommended by Siemens IP20 6SL3203 0BE15 0VA0 IP20 6SL3203 0BE21 2VA0 IP20 6SL3203 0BE22 0VA0 w1 W2 ed 55 1 1300 38 158 170 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 23 Basic technical data Rated current 20A Rated voltage 3 phase 380 VAC to 480 VAC 15 to 10 Line frequency 50 60 Hz 10 to 10 Product standard IEC 61800 5 1 Insertion loss Rated current 20 A Noise frequency 0 1 0 5 11 0 5 0 10 30 0 1 0 5 1 0 15 0 10 130 0 1 10 5 1 0 15 0 10 130 MHZ 5 5 5 jcm aB eo 65 55 45 35 20 60 70 7o 55 45 15 60 eo jeo 55 35 15 DM a B 50 60 55 50 50 40 eo jes eo 50 45 30 40 55 55 50 45 30 Connecting The figure below provides a connection example It shows how to connect a line filter
243. ommissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 155 T1 M1 T2 M2 T3 M3 T4 M4 T5 M5 T6 M6 T1 M1 T2 M2 T3 M3 T4 M4 T5 M5 T6 M6 9 ie x a Oo OG E Fy ery o O o a o es o o Pa WT EN Fa EE a ill e a of 2 5 2 oleu Ma Meia 1 5 B B 0 g3 Jo z B lap Ra z fel D B B B o Printing customized MCP strips Siemens provides you a symbol library for customized MCP keys You can print customized strips with the A4 size blank paper included in the delivered MCP package You can find the symbol library in the Toolbox examples SINUMERIK_808D_ADVANCED MCP Siemens also provides you with a template file for printing customized strips Key positions in the template accord with real key layout on the MCP You can copy symbols from the symbol library and paste them to the key positions where you want to use customized symbols You can find the template file in the Toolbox examples SINUMERIK_808D_ADVANCED MCP Cutting customized MCP strips The delivered A4 size paper has been pre cut with boundaries You just need to tear them off after printing customized symbols Commissioning Manual 156 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 5 Parameter list A 5 1 Recommended machine data No pame Default Activating 11300 JOG_INC_MO BOOL DE_LEVELTRI GGRD INC and REF in JOG mode USER_DATA 62 768 to DWORD NT 0 31 32 767 User data INT 14512 USER_DATA_
244. ommissioning the referencing function Principles for referencing e Zero mark is away from the reference cam MD34050 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERS 0 Rv I Vc Start point Zero nal Reference cam e Zero mark is above the reference point MD34050 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERS 1 E ae 3 Ve m Start point i i J Reference cam Zero mark Vc Velocity for searching for the reference cam MD34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM VM Velocity for searching for the zero mark MD34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER Vp Position velocity MD34070 REFP_VELO_POS Rv Shift of the reference point MD34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST MD34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR Rk Set position of the reference point MD34100 REFP_SET_POS 0 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 95 Softkey functions You can commission the axis referencing function and approach the reference point by setting relevant machine data in the following window gt 89 43 41 Last Set axis Step Referencing Next Set spindle 1 cic parameters 7 14 debugging parameters MCS Position Speed Help 1 Set the MDs as required and Pore Se M x 1 8 988 8 988 en press Activate and RESET tes 2 Press the corresponding axis tr C MZ1 8 908 8 988 aversing key for referencing Activate MSP1 6 668 6 668 4 etait 20700 REFP_NC_START_LOCK 1 re TE 34018 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS an re 34626 REFP_YVELO_SEARCH_CAM Seaee nn min re 34646 6 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER 300 mm min
245. on Increase the ramp down time Activate the DC link voltage controller Use a braking resistor Increase the current limit of the infeed or use a larger module Check the device supply voltage Check the line supply phases Check the line supply voltage Check the line supply infeed and observe the fault messages relating to it if there are any Check the line supply phases Check the line supply voltage setting Check whether the fan is running Check the fan elements Check whether the surrounding air temper ature is in the permissible range Check the motor load Reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency Reduce the continuous load Adapt the load duty cycle Check the motor and power unit rated cur rents Check the main circuit fuses Check whether a single phase load is dis torting the line voltages Check the motor feeder cables 175 F30015 Phase failure motor A phase failure in the motor feeder cable e Check the motor feeder cables cable was detected Check the speed controller settings Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY The signal can also be output in the follow ing case The motor is correctly connected however the closed speed control is instable and therefore an oscillating torque is generat ed Power unit has detected a ground fault Ground fault in the power cables Winding fault or ground fault at the motor F30
246. on control mode is active do not disable the spindle by detecting the standstill speed Commissioning Manual 240 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 USER_DATA_FLOAT No PLC interface 14514 0 DB4500 DBD2000 3 40e38 to Tool magazine spindle positioning angle 3 40e38 14514 1 DB4500 DBD2004 3 40e38 to Tool magazine preparation position of axis Z for tool change 3 40638 14514 2 DB4500 DBD2008 3 40e38 to Tool magazine tool change position of axis Z 3 40e38 14514 3 DB4500 DBD2012 3 40e38 to Tool magazine velocity of axis Z go to the tool change position 3 40e38 14514 4 DB4500 DBD2016 3 40e38 to Tool magazine velocity of axis Z back to the tool change 3 40e38 preparation position A 7 4 2 Conventions for the symbols used in the subroutines The symbols used in the subroutines follow the conventions listed below e Leading characters designate the destinations of interface signals P_ to PLC interface H_ to HMI interface N_ to NCK interface M_ to MCP interface e Subsequent characters are for areas N_ NCK C_ Channel 1_ Axes M MCP e Other short forms of the symbols are as follows HWL Hardware Limit HW Handwheel RT Rapid Traverse TK Traverse key ACT Active SEL Selected e Symbols consist of a maximum of 11 upper case characters and numbers including the leading character Except for underlines you cannot use any other special symbols like
247. on sensor Purpose Subroutine 51 is used to control the turret with a Hall effect device positioning sensor and the turret motor is controlled by the PLC The turret rotates clockwise to search for a tool and rotates counter clockwise after positioning the desired tool to clamp it the turret CCW rotation time can be adjusted An alarm occurs if the turret fails to position the desired tool after the duration expires The subroutine verifies the time that the turret rotates CCW and sets a limit of maximum 3 seconds for this rotation time to prevent the turret motor from being broken In the AUTO and MDA modes the T function starts a tool change operation In the JOG mode a short press on the MCP key changes a turret position During a tool change the NC interface signals Read in disable DB3200 DBX6 1 and Feedhold DB3200 DBX6 0 are set this means that the part program can only continue to run after the tool change The turret positioning is prohibited in the case of an Emergency Stop turret motor overload or program test simulation The timing diagram for positioning a tool in the turret using the Hall effect device positioning sensor is shown as follows Clamping time Clamping time Signals Start T1 ot ie deste Start T6 EE 00 CW CW CCW CCW position detection signals This subroutine can activate the following alarms e Alarm 700022 Turret motor overload e Alarm 700023 Programmed tool number higher than the m
248. ons Response times of the control system and of the drive Operation and or environmental conditions outside the specification Condensation conductive contamination Errors during the assembly installation programming and parameterization Use of wireless devices mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of the control system External influences damage 2 Incase of failure unusually high temperatures inside and outside the motor including open fire as well as the emission of light noise particles gases etc can result for example in Component failure Software errors in converter operation Operation and or environmental conditions outside the specification External influences damage 3 Hazardous shock voltages caused by for example Component failure Influence during electrostatic charging Induction of voltages in moving motors Operation and or environmental conditions outside the specification Condensation conductive contamination External influences damage 4 Electrical magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to people with a pacemaker implants or metal replacement joints etc if they are too close 5 Release of noxious substances and emissions in the case of improper operation and or improper disposal of components Commissioning Manual 12 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 1 2 Carrying out of repairs AXDANGER Carrying out of repa
249. or pulse suppression After OFF1 or OFF3 and zero speed detection the system waits for this time to expire and the pulses are then suppressed Standstill is identified in the following cases e The speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has expired The speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired Dependency p1226 p1227 bin Description Setting for activating de activating the speed setpoint filter If only one filter is required filter 1 should be activated and filter 2 de activated to avoid excessive processing time Dependency The individual speed setpoint filters are parameterized as of p1415 p1415 Speed setpoint fiter ttype o 2 lo nes m tu Description Sets the type for speed setpoint filter 1 e 0 Low pass PT1 e 1 Low pass PT2 e 2 General 2nd order filter Dependency e PT1 low pass p1416 e PT2 low pass p1417 p1418 e General filter p1417 91420 p1416 Speed setpoint filter 1 time 5000 00 Float constant Description Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 PT 1 This parameter is only effective if the filter is set as a PT1 low pass Dependency p1414 p1415 p1417 Speed setpoint filter 1 denomi 0 5 16000 0 1999 0 Hz Float nator natural frequency Description Sets the denominator natural frequency for speed setpoi
250. ors Ltd Made in China Press this softkey to confirm your selection The selected motor information then displays in the drive list Axis Drive Hotor Mx1 11 ID 16 8 4KW 1 3A 3666r min Without brake HZ1 13 ID 16669 6 4KU 1 3A 3666r min Without brake For the analog spindle you can use this softkey to set the relevant machine data as re quired 3225808 RATED_OUTYAL Bo Fi cf 322688 RATED_YELO 3608 rpm cf 36706 DRIFT_ENABLE A cf Rated output voltage Hane RATED_OUTYAL Unit It is recommended that you set the value of 32250 as 100 otherwise the spindle cannot rotate The following softkey operations are possible on this screen Resets the value of the selected parameter to default Cancels the last change to the parameter After you finish configuring all motors press this softkey to save the configuration results on both CNC and drives and proceed to the next step Note The control system restarts after you press this softkey In this case for the drive connected to a motor with an incremental encoder immediately after the RDY LED on the servo drive lights up green the motor makes a short buzzing sound indicating that the motor is identifying the magnetic pole position of the rotor 93 Note You can change the motor direction of rotation by setting the drive parameter p1821 The parameter p1821 is accessible on the PPU through the following operations N MD toca Dev basic Expert Drive a a IMD d
251. ough appropriate parameterizing Perform a function test Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions relevant to safety are running correctly Note Important safety notices for Safety Integrated functions If you want to use Safety Integrated functions you must observe the safety notices in the Safety Integrated manuals Danger to life or malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameterization As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization machines can malfunction which in turn can lead to injuries or death e Protect the parameterization parameter assignments against unauthorized access e Respond to possible malfunctions by applying suitable measures e g EMERGENCY STOP or EMERGENCY OFF Danger to life from permanent magnet fields Even when switched off electric motors with permanent magnets represent a potential risk for persons with heart pacemakers or implants if they are close to converters motors If you are such a person with heart pacemaker or implant then keep a minimum distance of 2 m When transporting or storing permanent magnet motors always use the original packing materials with the warning labels attached Clearly mark the storage locations with the appropriate warning labels IATA regulations must be observed when transported by air Injury caused by moving parts or those that are flung out Touching moving motor parts or drive outp
252. out a protective housing in a metal control cabinet or protect the device by another equivalent measure in such a way that contact with fire is prevented e Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths Danger to life through unexpected movement of machines when using mobile wireless devices or mobile phones Using mobile wireless devices or mobile phones with a transmit power gt 1 W closer than approx 2 m to the components may cause the devices to malfunction influence the functional safety of machines therefore putting people at risk or causing material damage e Switch the wireless devices or mobile phones off in the immediate vicinity of the components Danger to life due to the motor catching fire in the event of insulation overload There is higher stress on the motor insulation through a ground fault in an IT system If the insulation fails it is possible that death or severe injury can occur as a result of smoke and fire e Use a monitoring device that signals an insulation fault e Correct the fault as quickly as possible so the motor insulation is not overloaded Danger to life due to fire if overheating occurs because of insufficient ventilation clearances Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent fire and smoke This can cause severe injury or even death This can also result in increased downtime and reduced service lives for devices systems e Ensure comp
253. ows Vista Win Ethernet connections The following Ethernet connections are possible between the control system and the AMM tool on the PC e Direct connection direct connection between the control system and PC e Network connection integrating the control system into an existing Ethernet network After an active Ethernet connection is established the AMM tool provides the possibility of data exchange between the control system and a PC as well as remote control of the HMI from a PC For more information about the tool functionality see the Online Help of the tool A 8 1 Establishing an Ethernet connection Establishing a direct connection Proceed as follows to establish a direct connection between the control system and a PC AMM tool SYSTEM oy A SHIFT ALARM 3 Press this key to view the extended softkeys 1 Connect the control system with the PC using an Ethernet cable N Select the desired operating area on the PPU 4 Set up a direct connection on the control system through the following softkey operations HY Serv Service Direct displ control connect The following dialog pops up on the screen IP address 169 254 11 22 Subnet mask 255 255 60 6 5 Start the Access MyMachine P2P PC on your PC A password setting dialog appears when the tool is started for the first time 6 Enter a desired password in the input fields and then click this button to save This password ensu
254. p control is incorrectly pa delta rameterized Check the motor load Fault in the motor or in the power ca Check the power cable connections bles Check the power cables for short circuit or The power cables exceed the maxi ground fault mum permissible length Motor load too high Power unit defective Note Alarm A30031 is always output if for a Power Module the hardware current limit ing of phase U V or W responds Check the length of the power cables A31412 Error bit set in the The encoder sends a set error bit via the Carry out a POWER ON power off on for serial protocol serial protocol all components Check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC Check the plug connections Replace the encoder A52900 Failure during data e Copying is halted Re plug in the SD card copying e The SD card was plugged out Make sure the drive is in the stop state e The drive is not in the stop state Commissioning Manual 180 6FC5397 4EP 10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 PLC program design and adjustment A 7 1 PLC Programming Tool A 7 1 1 Renaming the default program PLC Programming Tool contains a default PLC program You can give this program a new name by performing the following operations 1 Start the software by double clicking the icon on your desktop PLC Programmi 2 Click the g button in the toolbar or select from the main window menu as follows to select and open the default PLC pro
255. permissible length Power unit defective Line phase interrupted The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link e Motor regenerates too much energy e Device connection voltage too high e Line phase interrupted The power unit has detected an undervolt age condition in the DC link Line supply failure Line supply voltage below the permis sible value Line supply infeed failed or interrupted Line phase interrupted The temperature of the power unit heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value e Insufficient cooling fan failure e Overload e Surrounding air temperature too high e Pulse frequency too high The power unit was overloaded e The permissible rated power unit cur rent was exceeded for an inadmissibly long time e The permissible load duty cycle was not maintained At the power unit the DC link voltage ripple has exceeded the permissible limit value Possible causes A line phase has failed The 3 line phases are inadmissibly unsymmetrical The fuse of a phase of a main circuit has ruptured A motor phase has failed Check the motor data if required carry out commissioning Check the motor circuit configuration star delta Check the power cable connections Check the power cables for short circuit or ground fault Check the length of the power cables Replace power unit Check the line supply phases Check the external braking resistor connec ti
256. power input pins X301 X302 pins 47 48 49 50 Digital outputs The diagram below shows you how to connect the connector pins of the digital outputs at interface X301 example You can connect connector X302 in the same way External power X301 Pin supply 24 VDC 24 V OV 47 48 49 50 31 l It is recommended to use an I O extension board to make the connection To supply the digital outputs you must connect an external 24 VDC power supply X301 X302 pins 47 48 49 50 Commissioning Manual 48 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 You must also connect the reference ground of the external power supply to X301 X302 Pin 1 M Acaution You must ensure that the max current consumption at pin 47 pin 48 pin 49 or pin 50 does not exceed 1 A Note You must connect the 24 V power supply for the digital outputs to all the four power input pins X301 X302 pins 47 48 49 50 External power supply When using an external power supply for the digital inputs you must connect the reference ground to X301 X302 Pin 1 M Connecting according to the default PLC program The control system has integrated with a default PLC application If you perform the commissioning work with the default PLC application arrange wiring as follows 24 VDC Handheld unit axis X selected _ 13 Handheld unit axis Z selected 14 Handheld unit 4th axis selecied z 11 Handheld unit axis X select
257. ptional fUNCtIONS cccceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaaeeeeaaeeeesaeeessaeeeesaees 6 7 Loading system languages wrcncsasinecwcsaiacnssnainaawsadascnsnanimanwcnubesnasaatenneaatoosusanabesnuloauiesuishadinnnstaloccupsnakioncetteads 6 8 Overview on commissioning and operation WIZAIS ccccceececeeeeceeceeeeeeseeeeeeaeceeeeseeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeanees Commissioning the prototype MACIIING mi sxisceaceeestnnscnnrarnrcenscannecancoaceanstnnsavetapnsdendcnderancteceeeannsaimnmpardeaenaeeaxeneceeertinns 7 1 Commissioning Me PLO ade ace cde ae ce se eke ace r aiene ed hw ose nce EE E Ei EE 7 1 1 Setting PLC related parameters cccccccsssceccssecccceseeccescecseuseecsegeeessscecseueeessaseessuesecsageeesseneessaaeees 7 1 2 Downloading and commissioning PLC prograiss ccccsecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeseeeeeesaeeeessaeeeesaees FA Checking I O address assignment ccccseececcesececceeeeeceeececceuseecseeeecseeecseueeecseeeessussecseueeesseneeesaaeees 7 1 4 Editing PLC alarm texi S eare an eee ai aea aa 7 2 Conngunng NNN VS a nes cise ohne te gas abe ee ge oes ARNE EAR N EaR E RAS EEn ESE SEARA EN EnaA Vanes 7 3 Setting basic parameters eccccsseccccsecccceeeeecsueeeccsuececseueeccseueeecsueeecseueeesseueeesseeesssueeessegeeesseeseesaaeees 7 3 1 Setting feed axis parameters cccccesscccceeececceeeccsuscccceueeccceueeecseeecseeeeeseueeecseeeessueeesseueeesseeeesaagee
258. put 84 Q23 Digital output 1o i3 7 Digital input 35 Q24 Digitat output m 4o Digital input 36 Q25 Digital output 12 M1 Digitalinput_ 37 Q26 Digital output 13 M2 Digitalinput_ 38 Q27 Digital output fe as foaim fe faso gto 15 M4 Digitalinput_ 40 Q31 Digital output 16 45 Digital input fat Q32 Digital output a7 46 Digital input 42 933 Digital output 18 M7 Digitalinput_ 43 Q34 Digital output 19 i50 Digital input 44 035 Digital output 20 51 Digtalinput 45 6 Digital output 21 52 Digitalinput_ 46 Q37 Digital output a ss Dptatinput a Dav 2 np 23 i54 Digital input 48 tt 24 input 24 t8 5 Digital input fot 424 input 25 i56 Digitainput 50 tte 24 input Commissioning Manual 46 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Sp __Sgret__Gorrnent a a a aoa r a o oo X302 DISTRIBUTED I O 2 Mm Extemalground 26 J187 Digtalinput 2 pav 24 Voutput a7 o eo Notassigned rr 16 1 Digitalinput_ 29 o Notassigned 162 Digitatinput 30 Notassigned 16 3 Digitalinput 31 foso Digit output 16 4 Digital input 32 ft Digital output e les ogtatinput la Jaz gta outa 66 Digital input 84 Digital output 1o t67 Digitaiinput 35 Digitaloutput mo fio Digitalinput 36 45 Digital output 12 714 Digital input s7 Q46 Digital output 13 72 Digitainput 887 Digital output u rs ogam 58 foo oparom 15 74 Digital input 4o 95 1 Digital output 16s Digitalinput_ fat Q52 Digital output
259. r ground fault Motor current does not match the cur rent of Motor Module F7802 Infeed or power unit not ready After an internal power on command the infeed or drive does not signal ready be Reaction OFF2 cause of one of the following reasons Acknowledgement e Monitoring time is too short IMMEDIATELY e DC link voltage is not present e Associated infeed or drive of the sig naling component is defective F7815 Power unit has been The code number of the actual power unit changed does not match the saved number Reaction NONE Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7900 Motor blocked speed The servo motor has been operating at the controller at its limit Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY torque limit longer than 1s and below the speed threshold of 120 rom This signal can also be initiated if the speed actual value is oscillating and the speed controller output repeatedly goes to its limit F7901 Motor overspeed Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F7995 Pole position identifi The pole position identification routine was cation not successful unsuccessful Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY The maximum permissible speed has been exceeded 174 The drive torque or accelerating capac Check the causes and resolve Reduce the stall torque correction factor Increase the up ramp or reduce the load Check the motor and motor cables for short circuit and ground fau
260. r heat sink has been reached If the temperature of the heat sink in creases by an additional 5 K then fault F30004 is initiated The motor temperature model 1 3 identi fied that the alarm threshold was exceed ed Encoderless operation is active due to a fault e Check the air intake for the Control Unit e Check the Control Unit fan Note The alarm automatically disappears after the limit value has been undershot Remove and check the removable data medi um Then run the data backup again Save all parameters Save the parameterization using the SAVE function on the BOP This overwrites the incor rect parameter files in the non volatile memory and the alarm is withdrawn e Check bus configuration e Check parameters for clock cycle synchro nization ensure To gt Tdx Note To Time of setpoint acceptance Tdx Data exchange time Set clock synchronization across the bus con figuration and transfer clock synchronous sign of life Check the following e ls the surrounding air temperature within the defined limit values Have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned Has the cooling failed Check the motor load and reduce it if re quired Check the motor surrounding air tempera ture Remove the cause of a possible encoder fault Carry out a POWER ON power off on for all components 179 A7965 Save required The angular commutation off
261. r level in position NO HGi BOOL High gear level in position NO Outputs Name Type Description S O Assigned global variables SPhold Dstill BOOL M248 5 Signal for spindle stop BOOL M248 6 Spindle gear change delay BOOL M248 7 Monitoring for the gear change Req _SP_G_CH BOOL M244 0 Request for spindle gear change G Commissioning Manual 260 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Req_Low_G BOOL M244 1 Request to change to the low gear stage Req_Hign_G BOOL M244 2 Request to change to the high gear stage TIMER Spindle stop delay Td_GearChg TIMER Gear change delay Tm_GearChg TIMER Delay for monitoring the gear change Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 49 Gearlhg1_ Auto A 7 4 23 Subroutine 50 GearChg2_Virtual virtual spindle gear change Purpose Using subroutine 50 you can requests the system to switch to the corresponding gear after changing the gear manually The corresponding gear is set when M41 M45 are executed This subroutine must not be used together with GearChg1_Auto SBR 49 Local variable definition Outputs Name Type Description S BOOL 0 low gear level 1 high gear level Assigned global variables None Relevant PLC machine data None Example for calling subroutine 50 OME Gearlhg Virtual Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 261 A 7 4 24 Subroutine 51 Turret1_HED_T turret with Hall effect device positi
262. rallel This means that you can connect the 24 V power supply to either of the terminal pairs 4 1 11 USB interface on the front cover of the PPU Pin assignment Type USB socket type A Cable Type USB 1 1 cable Max length 3 m Mustration Pin Signainame Signal type Comment 4 1 12 USB interface X30 There is a USB interface on the back of the PPU This USB interface is used for connecting with the MCP Pin assignment Type USB socket type A Combicon 4 pin Cable Type USB cable 0 5 m Illustration Pin __ Signal name Signal type P5_USBO 5 V power supply DM_USBO USB data DP_USBO USB datas Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 9a Connecting The illustration below shows the connection between the PPU and the MCP with the MCP connection cable MCP Sue USB interface USB interface e oe MCP connection cable 4 1 13 Slot for the system CF card The system CF card is installed on the PPU at the factory Q Maintenance door Note The maintenance door is accessible only by the Siemens service personnel Do not touch or remove the system CF card under any conditions 56 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 2 Interfaces on the SINAMICS V70 servo system The SINAMICS V70 servo system consisting of the SINAMICS V70 servo drive and SIMOTICS S 1FL6 servo motor is an economical closed loop servo drive solution for machine tool applications It is designed to
263. rd requires an end user access level It is designed to help you learn about the basic operations of the machining process Three machine data areas are used in the wizards to commission the prototype machine general machine data axis machine data and NC basic list Softkey functions C Pressing this key on the PPU allows you to enter the main screen of the wizards FUNCTION XA 2018 02 05 JOG Prototype start up assistant Commissioning the prototype Assistant Status v Ses PLC commissioning Download and commission PLC program Check I Os Edit PLC alarm texts Drive configuration E Parameter setting Set feed axis parameters Reference point commissioning Set spindle parameters Create series start up archive E Data setting Set SW limit Backlash compensation Lead screw error compensation Drive tuning Note Set PLC parameters e g 14516 121 14516 26 and 14512119 Activate related functions with these MDs for default PLC progran Select DOOOOOOO FO 6 6 6 acs 2 TOn MAAA assistant assistant Calls the commissioning wizard for the prototype machine Calls the commissioning wizard for series machines Calls the operation wizard Enters the currently selected task Note This softkey becomes active when you move the cursor key to a completed or current task Starts commissioning from the current task 00O Pressing any operating area key on the PPU allows you to exit the wizard
264. re 34656 6 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVE re Approach reference point in minus direction 6 j pa Name REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS Unit Next step Q Selects the next axis Cancels the last change to the parameter Selects the previous axis Returns to the last step Activates the modified values O Proceeds to the next step Resets the value of the selected parameter to default Approaching the reference point To approach the reference point you must follow the instructions on the screen e Foran axis driven by a motor with an incremental encoder the following instructions are displayed Help i 5et the HDs as required and th en press Activate and RESET 2 Press the corresponding axis tr aversing key for referencing e For an axis driven by a motor with an absolute encoder the following instructions are displayed Help 1 Switch to JOG mode Traverse the axis to a certain position c Enter the reference position va lue in 34168 3 Enter 1i in 34216 to activate the encoder debugging 4 Press in order REF POINT A ctivate and RESET 5 Press the corresponding axis tr aversing key for referencing If the axis is referenced a symbol appears next to the axis identifier for example a MX 1 8 880 8 880 ay M21 H ggg H ggg Commissioning Manual 96 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Relevant machine data Unit Default Description value 20700 REFP_NC_START_LOCK a ae NC start disable wit
265. res that all the connection data for AMM is encrypted The password can be subsequently changed at any time from the menu bar 7 Select the direct connection option in the following dialog and then click this button Selecting connection Please select the connection which you want to establish Available connections Direct Connectionm i92 7 Direct Connecton 169 2954 11 22 Crn aR Direct Connection 192 168 215 1 Control IP 192 New network connection Control name not possible direct connection Remote display IP 197 168 215 1 Port 5900 s An attempt is made to establish a direct connection Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 287 8 If you have not established any authentication data the following dialog appears Authentication Please select login here and enter password key file Password TILLLIT or Key file E Save authentication Cancel Select the log on details and enter the corresponding password or alternatively select a key file in the dialog If the authentication data for the direct connection has already been saved a connection to the control system will be set up immediately 9 Click this button and the AMM tool connects to the control system selected i Establishing a network connection Proceed as follows to establish a network connection 1 Connect the control system with the local network using an Ethernet cable 4 N 2
266. ress these two softkeys in succession to open the following communication setting win dow Communication settings Active communication parameter Baud rate 38408 Stop bits 1 Parity Even Data bits g Use this softkey to select a communication baud rate The control system supports the following baud rates e 9 6 kbps e 19 2 kbps e 38 4 kbps e 57 6 kbps e 115 2 kbps Activate the RS232 connection with this softkey No modifications to the settings are possible in this state The active or inactive state is retained even after a power on except when you start the system with the default data In the lower right corner of the screen the W icon shows that the connection to the PC via the RS232 interface is active Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 B T None Address 0 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Start PLC Programming Tool on your PC and click this button in the navigation bar to open the following dialog T icp i T T Dexinty mmunications Links Communications Setup mone Address 0 Double click the icon representing the PLE to my Double Click communicate with to Refresh Double click the interface icon to change communication parameters Double click the modern icon to setup the modem parameters or dial to start modem communications Communication Parameters Remote Address 2 Local Address Module COM 1 Protocol PPI Transmission Aate Mo
267. rformed based on frequency response measurements of the dynamic response of the machine Softkey functions B ee Last Set spindle Step Drive parameters 13 14 tuning Please select an axis to tune Please select JOG mode The tuned axes can work with better performance Axis MX1 Not tuned MZ1 Not tuned 69 46 28 2615 62 69 Next Create start up archive Export results Status Options Please switch to Jog mode Operating sequence 1 WW VU JOG 2 3 Options 4 5 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Returns to the last step Proceeds to the next step Saves the trace files during the tuning process to a USB flash disk if inserted Enters the window for selecting the tuning strategy Starts the drive tuning process Switch to JOG mode Note that the drive tuning can be performed in JOG mode only You can select all axes or an individual axis for tuning Press this softkey to enter the window for selecting the tuning options Use this key to select a desired tuning objective There are three objectives available for selection e For less rigid axes with motor feedback e For rigid axes and or direct drive e For large machines with direct feedback Move the cursor and select the desired measurement and interpolation options for each axis 103 OK Start tune Start tune
268. rnet cable Illustration Pin Signal Comment S ra aa me fos O ooo Note The length of the Ethernet cable must be less than 30 m or the communication will be unstable Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 53 4 1 9 RS232 interface X2 You can connect a PC to the PPU version 161 2 160 2 via an RS232 port to establish communication between the PC and the control system Pin assignment Type Sub D 9 pin male Cable Type RS232 Max length 10 m Mustration Pin Signalname Signaltype Comment ao Notassigned S RxD Receivedata 3 e Jo Transmitdata o a bTR O Dataterminalready SM VO round S e psR_ tC Requestsetready 7 RTs o Request to send se eos tt Ceartosend S oof Notassigned o PPU 9 pin Sub D PC 9 pin Sub D Shielding PC 25 pin Sub D Field PG P3 6ES7710 xx Shielding Shielding Note Use only shielded twisted pair cables You must connect the cable shield to the metal or metalized connector casing of the control system Commissioning Manual 54 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 1 10 Power supply interface X1 The PPU uses a 24 VDC power supply You can connect the 24 VDC power supply via interface X1 For more information about the 24 VDC power supply see Section Options Page 22 Pin assignment Type Combicon 4 pin Cable Max length 10 m Illustration Pint Signal Name Comment The O V terminals as well as the 24 V terminals are internally connected in pa
269. ro Finish totype machine and return to the main screen of the wizard A N 6 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM 6 ie Press this softkey to save data ave data Jf 8 Press this softkey to complete the operation OK Note If you choose USB as the target directory do not remove the USB stick during the data saving 8 Series machine commissioning Note The control system constantly creates restoring points during operation In case of data loss due to power failure or other problems the control system automatically restores the last autosaved system data upon startup with an alarm appearing on the screen 8 1 Loading series commissioning archives You can use the series commissioning archive to commission the machines for series production The series archive is created during the commissioning of the prototype machine For more information about creating a series archive refer to Section Creating series archives Page 99 Operating sequence cappe 1 Press this horizontal softkey on the main screen of wizards to call the commissioning wizard for PEETER series machines 2 Use either softkey to enter the window for loading the series commissioning archive Select Start assistant Commissioning Manual 106 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 3 Press this softkey to open the dialog for loading the series archive Load archive m DEH files EUSB Cy jUser files 4 Enter
270. rogram PLC alarm texts User cycles and part programs Tool and work offset data R variables HHMI data e g OEM OnlineHelp OEM Manual Note Fill the archive information and press Create archive a new archive with specified name will be generated 69 56 48 2615 62 69 Create archive Creating prototype machine commissioning archives After commissioning the prototype machine you must also create a commissioning archive for the data backup of the prototype itself To create a start up archive for the prototype machine proceed as follows Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Specify the properties of the archive as required Archive creator Archive version Hachine type Comment Archive content Creation date H i Turning machine Hy archive Start up data archive 2615 82 09 105 2 Press this softkey to open the window for saving the archive file Select a directory from this Create f Peehi e window using the cursor keys arc_startup arc Start up archive DEH files USB The default name of the data archive is arc_startup arc You can use your desired name for it 3 Press this key to open the selected directory Select a folder using the cursor keys f 4 Press this softkey to create the archive OK 5 After the archive is created successfully press this softkey to finish commissioning the p
271. roject Help Fath C Users 20037 e5c Desktop eued di SINUMERIK 808D Toolbox Test mpf 7 WIZARD mpt 4 I I osb SINUMERIE S080 Prograrn Part programs ha Control type Fath Bookmark Registered as Manubacturer Connection IP 172 156 202 201 m System CF card Beroaren J OEM files Online status Time 11 04 10 Date 2015 03 05 Information Connection established successfully 4 Fl for Help Connection 172 16 202 201 You can edit rename copy or delete part programs workpiece programs cycles and so on directly in the NC file system of the AMM tool Example of transferring a file to the control system The file transfer between the control system and a PC is possible by means of simple copy and paste drag and drop operations Proceed as follows to transfer a program file from PC to the control system Open the main screen of the AMM tool on your PC Select a desired program file to be transferred for example Test mpf from the PC file system ah Access MyMachine P2P PC No project active File Edit View Connection Remote control Bookmarks Settings x lar oh Sh oo BRIS e File system of the PC Path CA Users420031 e5c D esl Po i Desktop a SINUMERIK 808D Toolbox lj soen El Test mof fa SINUMERIK 8 WIZARD mpt J 808D_Commissic J 808D_Commissic se di 808D Commissic 808D_Commissic m i 808D_Diagnostic _ z i Ei a so 4 rn t 290 Com
272. ronization finishes successfully the following dialog displays on the screen Press this softkey to exit the dialog Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Checking the status LEDs on the SINAMICS V70 drives When the data synchronization is completed the LEDs on the drive indicate the drive is in ready state RDY green COM slow flashing green every two seconds The drive BOP displays S off or a fault depending on the type of connected encoder SIEMENS SIEMENS RDY COM RDY COM 6 4 Setting the password The control system provides a concept of protection levels for enabling data areas Different protection levels control different access rights The control system delivered from Siemens is set by default to the lowest protection level 7 without password If the password is no longer known you must reinitialize the control system with the default machine drive data All passwords are then reset to default passwords for this software release Note Before you boot the control system with default machine drive data make sure that you have backed up your machine drive data otherwise all data are lost after rebooting with default machine drive data Protection level Locked by Access right 0 id Siemens password __ Siemens reserved fe Manufacturer password Machine manufacturers e Entering or changing part of the machine data Default password and drive data SUNRISE e Conducting NC and drive commissioni
273. routine 40 ohid O AALS OTL O4NODEF Ovirnite M2557 A 7 4 14 Subroutine 41 MINILHHU handwheel on hand held unit Purpose Subroutine 41 is used to support the customer s handheld units With a handheld unit you can assign the handwheels to X axis Y axis and Z axis and select incremental override X1 X10 X100 at the same time You can then use the handwheels to control the movements of your machine Local variable definition Inputs INC1 BOOL Select INC 1 SelectINC Outputs X1_LED BOOL X10 LED BOOL Inc 10 is active X100 LED BOOL Inc 100 is active HHU ACT LED BOOL HHU is active Assigned global variables None Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 251 Relevant PLC machine data No Value Description S 14512 17 3 Choose to use a hand held unit oO Choose to use a handwheel Example for calling subroutine 41 OME MIMI_HAALU _dth Sel OME OME ONE 1_LEDPNULL_b 410_LED PNULL_b 100_LEDPNULL_b HHU ACT bat 7 Commissioning Manual 252 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 4 15 Subroutine 42 SPINDLE spindle control Purpose Subroutine 42 is used for spindle control including the spindle braking function When the braking function is activated MD14512 19 1 1 the spindle brakes in the following cases e Inthe JOG mode after you perform the following operations ame pe e Inthe AUTO or MDA mode when the spindle changes the rotating direction or
274. s Diagnostics Page 169 and Parameter list Page 157 for detailed information about any possible alarms and parameters used during commissioning 6 1 Switching on the SINAMICS V70 drive 6 1 1 Jog test To implement Jog test for the SINAMICS V70 drive proceed through the following steps 1 Switch on the 24 VDC power supply to the drive 2 Switch on the 3 phase 380 VAC line supply to the drive 3 To configure a motor with an incremental encoder proceed as follows otherwise skip Steps 3 and 4 and go to Step 5 directly Configure the motor ID p29000 18 or 19 You can find the motor ID of the connected motor on its rating plate Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 15 Operating display Ch borted ange aborte 5 of F a M M oK v Target parameter oK Default value A Desired value p 6916 gt Es ns FAri The dot means that at least one parameter is changed without saving To save the parameter changes see Step 6 4 Configure the motor brake p1215 as follows For a motor without a holding brake skip this step and go to Step 5 directly O default No motor holding brake available 1 Motor holding brake under sequence control 2 Motor holding brake always open 3 Motor holding brake under sequence control by the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Operating display Ch borted ange aborte of F M OK A Target parameter OK Default value A Desired value Loy o
275. s ASUB end cution not no not being exe ed possible allocated cuted 1001 INT2 ASUB exe Interrupt ASUB is ASUB end cution not no not being exe ed possible allocated cuted 1002 1003 G functions from NCK channel DB3500 G functions from NCK channel r NCK gt PLC interface Bit7 Bite Bits Bits Bits Bt2 Bit4 Bito Active G function of group 1 8 bit int Active G function of group 2 8 bit int a Active G function of group 3 8 bit int Active G function of group 63 8 bit int Active G function of group 64 8 bit int A 7 2 10 Axis spindle signals Transferred M and S functions axis specific DB3700 3703 M S functions r NCK gt PLC interface Byte Bit Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bitz Biti Bito M function for spindle DINT S function for spindle REAL Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 223 Signals to axis spindle Common signals to axis spindle DB3800 Signals to axis spindle r w 3803 PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Bitt Bito Feedrate override LW i se Eo ef hm es G e A 1 Override Position Position Follow up Axis spindle active measuring measuring disable system 2 system 1 2 Reference point value Clamping in Distance Drive ena progress to ble go spindle reset 3 Axis spindle Veloci Activate fixed feedrate Enable enaos WWiSpING e speed Feed 3 Feed 2
276. s 7 3 2 Commissioning the referencing function cccceccccseeececeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesseeeesaaeees 1 323 Seting SONICS parameters osscar as ncueiecodsh coca ntsees ests E SES 7 4 Creating series Ar CHIV SS ei ctcesacaccssdatea tennscceenanesueeoensesaecedabea E Ania n EAE EnA EEA EARE AAEE nin REE En EE iernii 7 5 Setting compensation Gata cccccccccsssccccesseeceneecceececceueeecseuececseeeessueeecseueeessauseessesessaueeessegeesseaes 7 5 1 Setting software limit switch data ce ccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaaeeeesaaeeeeseeeeeegees 7 9 2 Setting backlash compensation data ce cccccsecececseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeesseneeesaees 75 3 Setting leadscrew error compensation data ccccccccccsseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesaees 7 6 TUNING drive performance ccccceecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeseeeeessaeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeees 1 1 Creating prototype machine commissioning archives cccsecceesseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesseeeeseeeeesaaes Series machine COMMISSIONING ccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeesaeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeseeesaeeseaeesaeeeeanesseesaeeeseeeseeseeeeseeeenanesaees 8 1 Loading series COMMISSIONING ALCHNIVES cccseeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeaeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeeseeeesaneesaes 8 2 Setting software limit swi
277. s otherwise the alarm cannot display properly J 3 Confirm your entry with this softkey or the following key OK Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 91 4 You can also use these two softkeys to import export the PLC user alarm texts from to Import the following directories Z Export G0EM files EUSB GiUser files TE 9 After you finish editing the alarm texts press this softkey to move on to the next step step Note You can edit the alarm text either in English or in simplified Chinese Editing in Chinese is only possible when the system language is simplified Chinese gt ALT S Pressing both the key and the key on the PPU calls the Chinese character editor You can find the PLC alarm text files in different languages in the HMI data area through the following operation SYSTEM A To 5 sirt AARM gt fo data anmas If you use a system language rather than the four default languages Simplified Chinese English Portuguese and Russian the PLC alarm text file in that language is visible only after you edit the PLC alarm texts You can copy and paste these files for backup or other customized purposes 7 2 Configuring the drives Before starting the drive configuration you must ensure the Drive Bus addresses are properly set p0918 via the drive BOPs For more information about setting the Drive Bus address refer to Section Configuring Dri
278. s address Copy parameter set from drive to an SD card Jog Copy parameter set from an SD card to drive Save parameter set in drive O Update firmware Set parameter set to default Commissioning Manual 144 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Setting Drive Bus address When connecting the SINAMICS V70 to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED you must set the Drive Bus address with the BOP Four addresses in total are available e 11 X axis e 12 Y axis or additional axis for the turning variant of the control system e 13 Z axis e 15 Additional axis You must set a proper address according to the actual application of the drive To set Drive Bus address with the BOP proceed as follows Long press Functions Default value Desired value Lm m E Long press aly 5 f Hut u Flash for around 15s Note After setting a proper address you must restart the drive to apply your setting For more information see Section Configuring Drive Bus addresses Page 78 Jog To run the connected motor with the Jog function and view the Jog speed or Jog torque proceed as follows Jog speed M Long press Functions moe a Speed value Torque value a Jog torque For more information see Section Jog test Page 75 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 145 Saving parameter set in drive RAM to ROM This function is used for saving a parameter set from drive RAM to drive ROM
279. s follows to call the created cycle for example CYCLE888 1 PROGRAM USEF Cyc legg 3 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Press this hardkey on the PPU and the following horizontal softkey appears after you im port the desired files into the control Then press this softkey User Cycle gt ab 14 19 37 REEPOINT 2015706724 user Cycle_1 s eof user Cycle 2 user Cycle 3 user Cycle _4 user Cyc le888 5 a user Re J Edit i Drill S Turn Cycle conp Press this softkey to open the following window Sas 14 19 44 REEPOINT 2015 06 24 C HP 12 PF 7 Cancel Set the parameters as desired and then press one of the following two softkeys Cancel quit the cycle OK save the settings Then the following screen appears indicating that the user cycle is saved 123 E 14 19 56 REEPOINT 2015 06 24 user Cycle_1 PYCLES88 6 6 f s eof user Cycle 2 user Cycle 3 user Cycle 4 user Cycle888s prorat fy ro fat cm Peat i Sim Fy 9 4 9 Editing the user cycle screens You can edit the softkeys identifiers bitmaps or parameters for user cycles A Edit To do so export the relevant files and edit them on a PC After that import them back to the respective folders and restart the control system 9 5 Loading machine manufacturer s MD description files Perform the following operations to access the OEM MD des
280. seeees A 6 2 1 General information about faults And Alarms cccccccccseccceeeeeeeececeeceaeeeeseecesecesaeeesneeeseeeeseeeeeaaess A 6 2 2 List of faults and QIQNIINS 2o cubsexetnceet a ted erednceee a bie aeteeeccs cade veaddesetSuidotennte eee scalteaeaddre al onetecee sede A T PLC program design and adjustment cccccccceecceceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaeeeesaees A 7 1 PEC Programming POON sissie a E EE a ES A 7 1 1 Renaming the default program ccccccseccccsseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeesaeeeeseeseesaees A 7 1 2 Changing the display language cccccssecccceeececceeececseueeccsuseecseeeecaueeeseuseecseueeessuscessenseesseneeesaaees A 7 1 3 Selecting a target system vcs cdicsesencssnsssccbbecinensuadssntensdeesasssboeadebisuseveqssiceseeedecaddatiesoneches eaceshidnensuederscelees A 7 1 4 Establishing a connection between the control system and the PC ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees A 7 1 5 Downloading uploading comparing PLC applications ccccccccecccceececeeceeaeeeeseecesecesseeesseeeeseeeesees A 7 1 6 Compiling and monitoring PLOGrAMS ccsecccccseeceeseeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseueeeseeeeesaaeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeees A 7 2 yg OUEST es adil go a C1 eee en ee ee ee ee er eee eee A 7 2 1 Signals BVO the MOP es seca rE gc eines ea enc guts EARE EEA ANE EAS Al 2 2 Reading Writing NG dalas csser innein E
281. set was re This alarm automatically disappears after the defined and has still not been saved data has been saved In order to permanently accept the new value it must be saved in a non volatile fashion A7971 Angular commuta The automatic determination of the angu The alarm automatically disappears after de tion offset determination lar commutation offset encoder adjust termination activated ment is activated The automatic determination is carried out at the next power on command A7991 Motor data identifica The motor data identification routine is The alarm automatically disappears after the tion activated activated motor data identification routine has been The motor data identification routine is successfully completed carried out at the next power on com If a POWER ON or a warm restart is performed mand with motor data identification selected the motor data identification request will be lost If motor data identification is required it will need to be selected again manually following ramp up A30016 Load supply The DC link voltage is too low e Switch on the load supply switched off e Check the line supply if necessary A30031 Hardware current Hardware current limit for phase U re Check the motor data As an alternative run a limiting in phase U sponded The pulsing in this phase is motor data identification inhibited for one pulse period e Check the motor circuit configuration star Closed loo
282. sion error signals A B R Reaction ENCODER Acknowledgement PULSE INHIBIT F31130 Zero mark and position error from the coarse synchronization Reaction ENCODER Acknowledgement PULSE INHIBIT F31150 Initialization error Reaction ENCODER Acknowledgement PULSE INHIBIT F52980 Absolute encoder motor changed Reaction OFF 1 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F52981 Absolute encoder motor mismatched Reaction OFF 1 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F52983 No encoder detect ed Reaction OFF 1 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F52984 Incremental encod er motor not configured Reaction OFF 1 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F52985 Absolute encoder motor wrong Reaction OFF 1 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY F52987 Absolute encoder replaced Reaction OFF 1 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY 178 For a square wave encoder bipolar dou ble ended signals A B and R are not inverted with respect to signals A B and R After initializing the pole position using track C D Hall signals or pole position identification routine the zero mark was detected outside the permissible range For distance coded encoders the test is carried out after passing 2 zero marks Fine synchronization was not carried out Encoder functionality is not operating correctly The servo motor with absolute encoder is changed Actual motor ID is different from commissioned motor ID Connected absolute encoder
283. sion rate which PLC Programming Tool will use for communication Note The baud rate you select must be the same as what you have set on the control Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 9 Open the Local connection tab to specify the COM port to which the RS232 V24 cable is connected Properties PLC802 PP11 PPI Local Connection Connection to COM1 Modem connection Defaut Cancel Help 10 Click this button twice to exit the Set PG PC Interface dialog OK y DoubleClick 11 Double click this icon on the right side of the communication setting window It will take C to Refresh several minutes to search for a valid address 12 Wait until the information on the connected control system is identified as follows and then the connection is ready IHH TCPIP gt Intel F 82579LM Gigab A 2080 PPU1 6x Note Before configuring communications in PLC Programming Tool make sure the connection is already enabled on the control system A 7 1 5 Downloading uploading comparing PLC applications You can save copy or overwrite a PLC project or PLC application on the control system by using the following e PLC Programming Tool e USB stick The PLC project contains the PLC user program including all of the important information symbols comments You can upload download a PLC project from to the control system with PLC Programming Tool Also with this tool you can import
284. ss to a USB flash disk if in serted Note For the machine data that are changeable only with a manufacturer password the settings made during drive tuning cannot be restored after an NC restart in case of power failure or unexpected abortion of the tuning process A 3 Cutting reserved holes in the MCP There are three kinds of MCP a horizontal variant and two vertical variants On the horizontal MCP there are three reserved holes with a standard diameter of 16 mm and on the vertical variant there are four holes with a standard diameter of 16 mm They are available for you to install necessary devices according to your own needs fi E id Sd a 2 zy L Z m sp g A AS Reserved holes VF SZ Kl H a n_e 7 a 7
285. stration above takes the version with a spindle override switch for example 42 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 1 1 Digital input interfaces X100 X101 X102 Pin assignment Type Mini Combicon 10 pin Cable Max length 10 m Max cross section 1 5 mm when using one cable per connection Inputs Permissible level including ripple High level 20 4 V to 28 8 V Low level 3 V to 5 V Pin x100 DINo xonon xt02 Remarks 2 fo Digital input a oz S ez o Digital input Digital input o mMm mm External grou Connecting according to the default PLC program 1 2_Turret motor overload 3 Reserved for other turret Coolant level low 7_ Cooling motor overload 8 Lubricant level low 9 Lubricating motor overload Magazine count 5 Magazine at spindle position Limit Y i Magazine at original position Coolant level low Limit Z Magazine at release position Cooling motor overload f Magazine at clamp position ad 24V Note End sleeves are necessary if you use two cables per connection Fasten the cables to the screw terminals and plug the terminals into interfaces X100 X101 and X102 correctly Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 43 4 1 2 Digital output interfaces X200 X201 Pin assignment Type Mini Combicon 10 pin Cable Max length 10 m Max cross section 1 5 mm when using one cable per connection Outputs Rated digital output current 250 mA Pin _ X200
286. t 3245818 BACKLASH a Undo Last step Next 7 step Q Selects the next axis Cancels the last change to the parameter Selects the previous axis Returns to the last step Activates the modified values Proceeds to the next step Resets the value of the selected parameter to default Setting parameter No Name_ Unit__ Default value 32450 0 BACKLASH Backlash compensation is active after reference point ap proach Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 101 7 5 3 Setting leadscrew error compensation data The principle of the leadscrew error compensation is to modify the axis specific position actual value by the assigned compensation value at the particular compensation point and to apply this value to the machine axis for immediate traversal A positive compensation value causes the corresponding machine axis to move in the negative direction Softkey functions Last Backlash compensation Position Step 12 14 8 49 03 2615 62 69 Next Drive tuning Start point MCS End point MCS Interval Number of points Q Selects the next axis Selects the previous axis Switches to bidirectional compensation Note Press Comp 9 0000 nn 5606 666 mn 1666 666 mn 6 Operating sequence Bi comp Axis Comp lt lt Back 102 Axis Compensation value um Number of runs 5 Pause time 4 s
287. t Initiate the pole position identification routine Then check that the pole position identification routine is correctly exe cuted SERVO If a pole position identification technique is selected and if 00301 does not contain a mo tor type with an encoder adjusted in the facto ry then p1990 is automatically activated Mechanically adjust the encoder Accept the new serial number Re causes 3 4 Accept the new serial number with p0440 1 Reduce the numerator or denominator natural frequency of the current setpoint fil ter involved at the control system side Switch out the filter involved p1656 Check the causes and resolve 173 F 7452 Following error too The difference between the position set high point position actual value following error Reaction OFF1 dynamic model is greater than the toler Acknowledgement See IMMEDIATELY ity exceeded Position measuring system fault Position control sense incorrect Mechanical system locked Excessively high traversing velocity or excessively high position reference value setpoint differences F7801 Motor overcurrent Reaction OFF2 Acknowledgement IMMEDIATELY The permissible motor limit current was exceeded Effective current limit set too low Current controller not correctly set Motor was braked with an excessively high stall torque correction factor Up ramp was set too short or the load is too high Short circuit in the motor cable o
288. t non painted and observe the mounting clearances specified in the illustration below Cabinet wall Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 31 3 22 Drill patterns and outline dimensions Frame size A unit mm mma O ig lt ejs eS UU Commissioning Manual 32 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Frame size C unit mm 50 240 100 260 FSC 3 2 3 Mounting the drive 4 x M5 screws Tightening torque max 2 0 Nm Cabinet wall Note EMC instructions To comply with the EMC standards all cables connected with the SINAMICS V70 system must be shielded cables which include cables from the line supply to the line filter and from the line filter to the SINAMICS V70 drive The SINAMICS V70 drives have been tested in accordance with the emission requirements of the category of C2 domestic environment The conducted emissions and radiated emissions are in compliance with the standard of EN 55011 and reached Class A In a residential environment this product can cause high frequency interferences that may necessitate suppression measures For a radiated emission test an external AC filter between the 380 VAC power supply and the drive will be used to meet the EMC requirement and the drive will be installed inside the shielded metallic chamber other parts of the motion control system including the PLC DC power supply spindle drive motor will be put inside th
289. t active Green Red Continuously lit Communication with CNC is in error Status LEDs on the PPU POK RDY TEMP m SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCEDT _ E amp ooog goo 4 201340672 SIEMENS i Kio 0 0 TO r fF fmm TETE bil Boo ooo DHE ogg Deo Boe BEaon aaa _ HEE Bee B eo m ES SELI mom o BOD 288 SOU8 865 The individual LEDs and their functions are described in the table below pep Coor Status escription O RDY Red oo Continuously lit The CNC is in stop mode TEMP Continuously lit The CNC temperature is out of range Continuously lit The CNC temperature is within the specified range Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 149 A 2 Configuring the additional axis The control system with PPU16x 2 supports up to two additional axes for the turning variant and one for the milling variant Before the configuration you must first activate the option for additional axis Page 83 However you need to configure the additional axis manually as you cannot proceed with the wizards A 2 1 Setting parameters for the additional axis turning Operating sequence Proceed as follows to set the parameters for an additional axis driven tooling axis A N 1 Select the desired operating area on the PPU SHIFT ALARM 2 Open the channel machine data window through the following softkey operations Tal Hach Expert Channel MD data list gt HD 3 Use this softkey or t
290. t actual Pos offset to LAZLS act value Zao 2 82 O O o 2 amp amp Pos offset to LAZLS setpoint Service Service Service Serva Version axes drives control trace You can perform the return operation by clicking the _ icon in the screen when possible A 8 3 2 Saving the remote control screen as a picture Operating sequence 1 After the remote control is started select from the AMM main window menu as follows we Access MyMachine P2P PC No project active File Edit View Connection Remote control Bookmarks 36 BE Start l File system of the PC Stop 03 i ji Desktop Save as picture o B J 808D y ETTE a J SINUMERIK WIZARD mpf 2 Select the target directory on your PC 3 Specify the picture name and type C Save 4 Click this button to save the picture Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 293 Trademarks All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary
291. t4 Bito Reset Start JOG Mode MDI AUTOMATI measure C ment in JOG 1 Active the machine function REE o oo gt i E E G G A e E soo Soo T T T O S S S Signals from PLC Signals from PLC r Byte Bit7 Bite Bit5 Bit4 Bits Bt2 Bit Bito 1000 Commis Boot with Boot with sioning saved data default archive has values been read in aort ooo S S S S S S l YSO aoz FP d S S S S S OS aos l S S e S S l S S PLC cycle in ps DINT Month Tens digit BCD Second Tens digit BCD Weekday BCD 1 2 7 1 Sunday Commissioning Manual 210 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Signals to maintenance planners Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 itt Bito 2000 Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva tion 8 tion 7 tion 6 tion 5 tion 4 tion 3 tion 2 tion 1 2001 Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva tion 16 tion 15 tion 14 tion 13 tion 12 tion 11 tion 10 tion 9 2002 Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva tion 24 tion 23 tion 22 tion 21 tion 20 tion 19 tion 18 tion 17 2003 Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva Deactiva tion 32 tion 31 tion 30 tion 29 tion 28 tion 27 tion 26 tion 25 Byte Bit7 Bte Bits Bit4 Bt3 Bitz Bit Bito 4000 Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl Acknowl edgement 8 edgement 7 e
292. ta area R R W ns W i DB1800 DBB0 DB1900 DBB0 eee BELURBERS DB3801 DBBx DB3901 DBBx PROCS ERO Program control i HMI Handwheel DB3800 DBBx DB3900 DBBx MCP signal signal Selecon Sigra selection signal Axis control Shaft state signal signals W W R R Address identifier Range Operand identifier Data DB1000 to DB7999 DB9900 to DB9906 T Timers TO to T15 100 ms T16 to T63 10 ms Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 203 Address identifier CO to C63 i Image of digital inputs 10 0 to 18 7 Qf image of digital outputs 0 00057 SSS Structure of the DB range address DB 3801 DBX1 0 0 0 7 Bit number 0 to 7 Offset 000 to 999 Subrange 0 to 9 Range number 00 to 99 axis channel User range 10 to 99 DB3801 DBX1000 7 Bit 7 of the byte with offset 0 in subrange 1 for axis 2 user range 38 DB3801 DBBO Byte with offset 0 in subrange 0 for axis user range 38 DB4500 DBW2 Work with offset 2 in subrange 0 range 0 user range 45 Double Word DB2500 DBD3004 Double word with offset 4 in subrange 3 range 0 user range 25 Note The permitted offset for an address depends on the access as follows e Bitor byte access any offset Byte size variables are placed one beside another seamlessly in a DB e Word access the offset must be divisible by 2 Word size variables 2 bytes are always saved on straight offsets e Double word access the offset must be divisible
293. tch data i ccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeesaaeeessaneeesaaeeeeaeeeeeeaaes 8 3 Setting backlash compensation data cee ccccecccecseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeesneeesaees 8 4 Setting leadscrew error compensation data ecccceccccceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseesaeeeeseeeeeeseeeesaees 8 5 TUNING drive performance ccceeccccceseecceeececceuseccceuceccaeeeccauseecsuueeessuscecseuueessueeesseeessauseesseseeesaaees 8 6 Backing Up series machine AMCHIVES ccecccceseccesscecsececeuceceueeeesecensuceseueeseueeeneeeseueessueesneesenseseneas Other MO QUBINEY USOC TUNCHOINS css ecics dass cc sa vnccansacdancansceiexoandesgccapvansansadsancansseieeoaedeshacaasnnbansandanctancadueamedeseeagazansans 9 1 Payna asde SOW csser email Ween sucinind ieaas et aerd enesauaerd neonate 9 2 Defining the Service PIANNEL cccccccsseeccceececceeececceeeeccceseecsseecseeeessaeeessueeeeseueeessageeesseeeessaneeenas 9 3 Using the machine manufacturer startup screen and machine logo 9 4 Creating User 05 0 mean nee ia eae ee ne ee eee 9 4 1 Creating the extended user text fil cc ceccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaaes Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 9 4 2 Creating the user cycle softkey index file ccccccsescecceeececceeececseusecceececseaseeceeseessaseesseueeesseneesseaes
294. tes on the laying of cables in drag chains Page 40 2 5 Options External 24 VDC power supply A 24 VDC power supply is used to supply the 808D ADVANCED and V70 servo drive Consider the following technical specification requirements when selecting a 24 VDC power supply e 24 VDC supplying the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Rated input voltage 24 V Max input voltage 28 8 V Min input voltage without output derating 20 4 V Rated input current 2 25 A e 24 VDC supplying the SINAMICS V70 drive Without a holding brake With a holding brake Rated voltage V Maximum current A Rated voltage V Maximum current A 24 15 to 20 af 24 10 to 10 9B 1 The minimum voltage of 24 VDC 10 must be available at the connector on the motor side in order to guarantee that the brake reliably opens If the maximum voltage of 24 VDC 10 is exceeded then the brake could re close The voltage drop along the brake feeder cable must be taken into consideration The voltage drop AU for copper ca bles can be approximately calculated as follows AU V 0 042 e I q IBrake Where Cable length m q Brake core cross section mm IBrake DC current of brake A Fuse circuit breaker The fuse circuit breaker is used to protect the control system Refer to the table below for the selection of fuses and circuit breakers CoO E a a Ea e S eo paene 5DE21 4UA0 esL32105DE218ua0 25 emaasros aRvio2taDao C
295. the backup directory and select the desired archive file J 5 Press this softkey to confirm your selection and the archive information displays on the screen OK J 6 Check the archive information and press this softkey to start loading the series commissioning OK archive Note Successful loading of the data archive can delete the password You must set the password again before proceeding For more information about setting a password refer to Section Setting the password the password Page 81 y 8 2 Setting software limit switch data Refer to Section Setting software limit switch data Page 100 8 3 Setting backlash compensation data 8 4 Setting leadscrew error compensation data 8 5 Tuning drive performance Refer to Section Tuning drive performance Page 103 8 6 Backing up series machine archives Refer to Section Creating prototype machine commissioning archives Page 105 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 107 9 Other frequently used functions 9 1 Playing a slide show The control system has a function of playing a slide show It supports multiple languages besides two standard ones Simplified Chinese and English After installing the language package of a non standard language you can create the slide show in this language Playing a slide show You can press this key combination on the PPU to play a slide show and press the key combination abs n D again to exit the slide show Creati
296. the counter and present value Style plus counter CTU count counter value 1 R 1 counter resets counter value gt preset value Cn 1 minus counter CTD count counter value 1 LD counter value preset value counter value 0 Cn 1 plus and minus counter CTUD plus counter counter value 1 minus counter counter value R 1 counter resets counter value gt preset value C 1 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 235 Plus and Plus Minus minus counter counter counter PV is preset CD is minus CU is plus value count pulse count pulse LD is loading R preset value is resetting Timers Timer T Form condition of timer bit T3 T25 represents the comparison result of timer value and preset value timer value T3 T25 represents timer value Style open delay timer TON IN 1 begin timing IN 0 timer resetting count value gt preset value Tn 1 close delay timer TOF IN 1 timer resetting IN 0 begin timing count value gt preset value Tn 0 keep delay timer CTUD IN 1begin timing IN Otimer stops count value gt preset value Tn1 Assign word constant0 to T to make counter composite 236 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 4 PLC subroutine library In order to simplify the PLC design we provide refined PLC functions which have generality such as initialization machine panel signal processing emergency stop processing axis enable control har
297. the name of at least one of their R variables The detailed procedure is as follows Te 1 Select the desired operating area 2 Press these two softkeys in succession R Var Then select a certain R variable with the cursor keys gt Show H nane 3 In the following dialog define the name of the R variable as desired for example Ho Hane Value Ro 1 111 989898 Ri 6 668888 Then save your input with the following 4 Access the OEM R variable name file folder by performing the steps mentioned above At this time a file containing the change log in the corresponding language exists in the folder B E Commissioning Manual 126 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 5 Press these two softkeys in succession to copy the file and then open the desired window Copy In the opened window paste the file with the following Paste i CYCLE888 S MD_DESCR_CHS E MD_DESCR_ENG Ech ivi dell cea 6 Open the file with this hardkey A Then you can view the change that you made CHASRPARAM_NAME_ENG TAT 10 Technical data 10 1 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Horizontal variant Vertical variant Horizontal variant Vertical variant 161 2 160 2 Design data Dimensions W x H x D in mm 420 x 200 x 104 265 x 330 x 104 420 x 120 x 58 265 x 230 x 58 Weight in kg 2 985 2 865 0 86 0 795 variant with a reserved slot for the handwheel 0 935 variant with an override switch for the spindle Co
298. tion Save data in drive Saving parameter set in drive RAM to ROM Restore drive to default settings Save data from drive to SD card Upload data from SD card to drive Update firmware Refer to Updating firmware Page 148 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Display The Drive Bus communication between the NC and the servo drive is established In this case the BOP is protected from any operations except clear ing alarms and acknowledging faults A 1 3 2 Parameter structure You can navigate through the parameter structure by pressing the keys as shown in the sequences below Power on Operating display Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 141 A 1 3 3 Actual status display You can monitor the following drive states by using the operating panel after power on e Servo off e Actual speed e Torque e Voltage If the servo enable signal is available actual drive speed is displayed by default otherwise S OFF servo off is displayed With p29002 you define which of the following drive operating status data is to be displayed on the BOP Value Meaning O default Actual speed fo Devote DC voltage 2 Actual torque Note Make sure you save p29002 after modification A 1 3 4 Basic operations Editable parameters All P parameters under the Para menu are editable parameters Read only parameters All r parameters under the Data menu are read only parameters
299. tion of rotation inverted 1008 Axis 3 in Work avery comment_ __Trevelvequest__ Hand eve ibrary sodod ae ee eee Axis 3 in Work Machine function Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 221 Continuous Var INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC o 1010 1011 a handwheel direction of rotation inverted Additional status signals from NC channel DB3300 Signals from NCK channel r NCK gt PLC interface ae pmr j me ms ma ms mz mi Bo 4o00 Travel External request setpoint language drive test reached mode ac present tive Associated STOP_DEL ASUB is feedrate M01 M00 AYED stopped Active Active No tool DELAY change FST FST command SUPPRES active S 4004 ProgEvent display Start after Boot Operator Part pro block panel gram search Reset Start from RESET 4005 Jog circle Stop condi StopByColl Active tion Danger mj ft ET sor S S S 4008 Active transformation 4009 Reserved Reserved Reserved Commissioning Manual 222 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Asynchronous subroutines ASUBs Job DB3400 ASUB Result r NCK gt PLC interface Bye Bt7 Bite Bits Bits Bits Bit2 Biti Bito INT1 Start INT2 Start A Asynchronous subroutines ASUBs Result DB3400 ASUB Result r PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bits Bt2 itt Bito eee ee ee 1000 INT 1 ASUB exe Interrupt ASUB i
300. to go Maintenance scheduler User interface User interface for ctrl Energy cceceeeeeeees Operation symbols of PLC programming lanQuages ccccccccsscccseeceseececeeceeeeeeesueeeeeeeeseeeesseeensaees PLC subroutine library ccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeees PLC machine data ccccecceesseeeeeseeeeesaeeees Conventions for the symbols used in the subroutines c cc eeccceeccceeeccceececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeceseeeesaeeesanees Subroutine 20 AUX_MCP machine auxiliary functions ce ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeenees Subroutine 21 AUX_LAMP working lamp Subroutine 22 AUX_SAFE_DOOR Safety door cccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeesaeeeesaaes Subroutine 23 AUX_CHIP chip conveyor Subroutine 31 PLC_ini_USR_ini user initialiZation cc eeccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeesseeeeeeaees Subroutine 32 PLC_INI PLC initialization Subroutine 33 EMG_STOP cceeeeeee Subroutine 37 MCP_NCK MCP and HMI signal proCeSSing ccccsseceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenees Subroutine 38 MCP_Tool_Nr display tool number on the MCP ccccceececeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaeees Subroutine 39 HANDWHL selecting a handwheel according to HMI interface signals Subroutine 40 AXIS_CTL controlling the spindle ANd axes ccccccecccseeccceeeeceeeesseeeese
301. umber It must not exceed four digits Note The name of a user cycle must not be same with that of a standard Siemens cycle It is recommend to use a cycle number with the range of 100 to 800 Programming example Create the program with a wordpad or notepad As a cycle screen always also transfers values as call parameters to the user cycle the transfer interface is defined as follows PROC CYCLE100 REAL DIA REAL DIAF REAL STAP REAL ENDP REAL MID REAL UX INT MACH REAL VRT SAVE SBLOF PROC is a keyword followed by the cycle name with the cycle number All the transfer parameters for the screen are contained within brackets with the data type and name separated by commas PROC CYCLE100 REAL DIA REAL DIAF REAL STAP REAL ENDP REAL MID REAL UX INT MACH REAL VRT SAVE SBLOF DISPLOF DEF REAL VAR IF P_EP X lt DIA GOTOF LL1 LL3 IF DIAF gt DIA GOTOF END2 START IF MACH 0 GOTOF ROUGHING IF MACH 1 GOTOF FINISHING IF MACH 2 GOTOF ROUGHING DEF REAL VAR ROUGHING1 R101 DIA DIAF 2 UX R102 R101 MID R103 TRUNC R102 R104 0 VAR1 DIA IF R103 lt 1 GOTOF ROUGHING2 LL2 SBLON G90 GO X VAR1 Z STAP 2 Commissioning Manual 118 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 G1 Z ENDP G91 X MID GO G91 X VRT Z VRT G90 GO Z STAP 2 SBLOF VAR1 VAR1 2 MID R104 R104 1 IF R104 lt R103 GOTOB LL2 IF R104 gt R103 GOTOF ROUGHING2 ROUGHING2 SBLON G90 GO X DIAF UX G1 Z ENDP GO G91X VRT Z VRT G90 GO X DIA 2 Z STAP 2 IF MACH
302. ur PC proceed through the following steps 1 Double click the Setup exe in the folder For more information see Section Execut ing transferring a part program through the RS232 interface in the SINUEMRIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Turning Milling GQ d 808D SINU Organize Include in library Share with Bun M 7 Sir Favorites F Name j Date modified ME Desktop Ji examples 12 1 2014 12 52 PM J Downloads _ J license 12 1 2014 12 52 P E Recent Places ji setup 12 1 2014 12 54 PN di userdoc 12 1 2014 12 54 Ply eg Libraries autorun inf 3 30 2011 9 28 AM Documents 2 10 2010 3 50 PM al Music 3 30 2011 9 28 AM Pictures siemense bet 10 31 2014 2 51 Pl E Videos 7 8 items 4 m 70 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 2 Read the welcome information and continue with Next a ai Welcome to the installation of Toolbox 8085 w04 06 02 00 Ik is strongly recommended that you esit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program i protected by copyright law and International treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or ari portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and Will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under l
303. us injury Make sure that the control system is installed in a control cabinet with an adequate protection class Note When dimensioning the control cabinet make sure that the installed components do not exceed the permissible surrounding air temperature even if the outside temperature is high Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 25 3 1 Mounting the PPU and MCP Cut out dimensions and mounting clearance mm To make maintenance easy keep sufficient clearance recommended distance 80 mm between the maintenance door on the PPU and the cabinet wall The recommended depth of the cabinet is greater than 155 mm Horizontal PPU and MCP Cabinet panel 406 1 gt 80 on o Maintenance door 186 1 1 106 1 oh B JO QO k gt t MCP oe lad AY A WY w y __4 Thickness 2 to 5 Vertical PPU and MCP Cabinet panel 30811 Maintenance
304. used to safely disconnect the torque generating energy feed to the motor When the function is selected the drive unit is in a safe status The switching on inhibited function prevents the drive unit from being restarted The two channel pulse suppression function integrated in the module is a basis for this function Functional features of Safe Torque Off e This function is integrated in the drive this means that a higher level controller is not required e The function is drive specific i e it is available for each drive and must be individually commissioned e When the Safe Torque Off function is selected the following applies The motor cannot be started accidentally The pulse suppression safely disconnects the torque generating energy feed to the motor The power unit and motor are not electrically isolated e By selecting deselecting STO in addition to the fault messages the safety messages are also automatically withdrawn The STO function can be used wherever the drive naturally reaches a standstill due to load torque or friction in a sufficiently short time or when coasting down of the drive will not have any relevance for safety Note Closing delay of the holding brake The closing signal low level of the holding brake is output 30 ms after the STO is triggered Preconditions for using the STO function When use the STO function the following preconditions should be fulfilled e Each monitoring channel STO1
305. ut elements and loose motor parts that are flung out e g feather keys in operation can result in severe injury or death e Remove any loose parts or secure them so that they cannot be flung out e Do not touch any moving parts e Safeguard all moving parts using the appropriate safety guards Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 9 Danger to life due to fire if overheating occurs because of insufficient cooling Inadequate cooling can cause overheating resulting in death or severe injury as a result of smoke and fire This can also result in increased failures and reduced service lives of motors e Comply with the specified coolant requirements for the motor A WARNING Danger to life due to fire as a result of overheating caused by incorrect operation When incorrectly operated and in the case of a fault the motor can overheat resulting in fire and smoke This can result in severe injury or death Further excessively high temperatures destroy motor components and result in increased failures as well as shorter service lives of motors e Operate the motor according to the relevant specifications e Only operate the motors in conjunction with effective temperature monitoring e Immediately switch off the motor if excessively high temperatures occur CAUTION Risk of injury due to touching hot surfaces In operation the motor can reach high temperatures which can cause burns if touched e Mount the motor so that it
306. uts an alarm message Note To perform a service plan on the PLC you need to download DB9903 SP_INI and DB9904 SP_ACT Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description S BYTE BOOL Deactive 1st service plan AckMsg0 BOOL Acknowledge message of 1st service plan Outputs Name Type Description S HintMsgO BOOL Hint message for 1st service plan BOOL Alarm message for 1st service plan Assigned global variables ServPlan_msgO BOOL Notification message of the first service plan ServPlan_alm0O BOOL Alarm message for 1st service plan Relevant PLC machine data None Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 259 Example for calling subroutine 48 OME SernPlan Hinthis gO p ALAR MaD Alarm p ALAR M31 A 7 4 22 Subroutine 49 GearChg1_Auto automatic spindle gear change Purpose Subroutine 49 is used to automatically change the gear for the analog spindle with 2 level gear detection signals During a gear change the spindle oscillates and the PLC outputs the gear change signal When the PLC detects that the desired gear level has been reached the gear change has been completed You cannot use this subroutine together with subroutine 50 Local variable definition Inputs Name Type Description Monitor time for gear change in position WORD Monitor time for the whole gear change process must gt D_CHG D_MON D_SO S_hold BOOL Spindle stopped NO BOOL Spindle alarm NO BOOL Low gea
307. ve Bus addresses Pao TOY Operating sequence coe 1 Press this softkey on the main screen of drive configuration and the controller starts to config identify the drives and motors connected After the identification finishes a drive list with motor information displays on the screen as follows Axis Drive Hotor H 1 13 ID 16669 6 4KW 1 3A 3868r min Without brake HSP1 Ana spindle not configured Note For a motor with an absolute encoder the motor ID can be identified automatically For a motor with an incremental encoder however you must configure it manually A v 2 Select the motor to be configured using the cursor keys E 3 Press this softkey to enter the motor configuration window conf iy Commissioning Manual 92 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Select Hotor config Default Undo Hext step Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 Select the right motor ID according to the motor rating plate with the cursor keys Axis HAL Drive ti Hotor ID Power Current Speed Brake type 19 6 4KW 1 30 3808r min With brake For example you can find the motor ID on the following motor rating plate SIMOTICS S 1FL6 3 Servo Motor iP 1FL6042 1AF61 0AG1 is LMH C90388899302 Mn 1 27 Nmijin 1 2 A nn 2000 r min lo 1 Mo 1 9 Nmflo1 7 A Nmax3000r mi N 222 V IP65 S1 N 0 4 kW Th CL 130 B D18 CE ENCODER INC 2500 ppr BRAKE 24VDC Siemens Standard Mot
308. ves cccccccccceececeececeeeeeceeeeceeeseecesaeeeesececeacesseeeeseueeseeesseessaeeeseeesaneesaaees 10 3 SIMOTICS S 1FL6 servo MOOI sccccesisccetcccesescaciseceectdedeateridesnansiecnicesidegeeeiindeaieindadaentiaceatessdeceeetGaeeaeaes 10 4 S26 e A E EE E E E E PEE E eee ee ee ee 10 4 1 Drive Bus cable Drive Bus trailing cable for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED 10 4 2 Technical data cables for the SINAMICS V70 Servo SYSTEM cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeneeeeeas A APPEN ccs chs ee ects erst cena wate csr cg oc va sss een en oe acing ie cece anaes winced eseeec guna eee A 1 Operation and display essre E E EEEE A 1 1 Elements on the PPU eters enh svecetied seecsnsacidest cece nedcaceabed dtawuincdeeel Ei a ENN Eaa EREA Ea EEEa A 1 2 BICMOS on the MOP sanciieecccsasatensiccccedonngesavarctevedenasersacet cde Reen A 1 3 Operating the SINAMICS V70 Basic Operator Panel BOP cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaaees A 1 3 1 BOF OVEVIC eee secrete pa cecic ede gat E ESE E SE NS A 1 3 2 Parameter SING Ue assii eai nE E E EEEE EERE E E A A EEE AER E A 1 3 3 Actual Status GIS play essri s Santor wettest datdec a Ea edo ais A 1 3 4 Basie OS ONS be ceseden tenant ose ea eao ea ea eE aA a aie eront A 1 3 5 Auxiliary TUNCUONS enema eet eee tet te ste i er en re Pt Ses rere eae no ners RON ce et epee veer Re tere A 1 4 Status indicators cc ccccceecccesceceseeceeeeecaececaueeceeeseaeeesaueesaueesesaeseaeeesaeesau
309. vice planning function under different languages which are supported by the control system For other languages name the task files with the abbreviations corresponding to the languages For example the task files in Italian will be named as svc_tasks_ita txt For more information about the language abbreviation see Section Loading system languages Page 85 9 3 Using the machine manufacturer startup screen and machine logo The control system uses the Siemens startup screen and machine logo by default If necessary you can use your own startup screen and machine logo Using the machine manufacturer startup screen The default startup screen is shown below SINUMERIK Siemens AG 2013 2014 All Rights Reserved OC Start Operating Area To change it to your own startup screen proceed as follows 1 Prepare the image of the startup screen and save it on a USB stick The control system supports a startup screen image in the BMP format with a maximum size of 600x360 pixels WxH Name the image as startup bmp 2 Insert the USB stick into the USB interface on the front panel of the PPU 3 Locate the startup screen file in the USB stick through the following softkey operations om Sys co data gt P USB Hane B Commissioning Manual 112 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 4 Copy 5 868D fe data 6 f 8 9 Paste 10 Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08
310. writing NC data Result DB1200 Reading writing NC data r i PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bt7 Bte6 Bits Bit4 Bt3 Bt2 Bt1 Bito pleted 2001 Fo 2002 DB1200 Reading writing NC data r 1203 PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7_ Bits Bits Bitz Bit14 3000 Error has Boo varia occurred ble 3001 Access result 1 3000 3004 Reading data from NCK variable x data type of the variables 1 to 4 bytes 1 0 no error 3 illegal access to object 5 invalid address 10 object does not exist Commissioning Manual 206 6FC5397 4EP 10 0BA4 08 2015 A 7 2 3 PI Service PI service Job DB1200 PI service r w pene arnom OO Byte Bit7 Bite Bits Bit4 Bt3 Bit2 Bt1 Bito so Stat PI index soon Soo e PI parameter 2 PI parameter 6 4022 PI parameter 10 PI service Result DB1200 Reading writing NC data r PLC gt NCK interface Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bitz itt Bito 5000 Error in job Job com pleted 5001 5002 o O A 7 2 4 Retentive data area DB1400 Retentive data r w Byte Bit7 _ Bite Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit4 Bito Cd User data ser tat C a User data User data Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 207 126 ser dat 127 A 7 2 5 User Alarms User alarms Activating DB1600 Activating alarm r w PLC gt HMI interface Byte Bit7 Bite Bit5 Bit4 Bt3 Bit2 itt Bito
311. xists in the folder A es eS 9 Press these two softkeys in succession to copy the file and then open the desired window Eit l In the opened window paste the file with the following Paste sai B CYCLE888 E MD_DESCR_CHS Ey E RPARAM_NAME_ENG 6 Open the file with this hardkey Then you can view the change that you made HC CHASMD_DESCR_ENG TAT MN_USER_DATA_HEX_IDX4 888 BT T_MN_USER_DATA_INT_IDX 111 31 T_MN_USER_DATA_INT_IDXi 888 OT T_MN_USER_DATA_INT_IDX2 User data CINT T eof Commissioning Manual 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 125 9 6 Loading machine manufacturer s R variable name files Perform the following operations to access the OEM R variable name file folder SYSTEM 4s NI E Sys seed SHIFT ALARM gt FS data ES data HMI data folder ts gt Hane Type Length Customized bitmaps User cycle files CjEasyxLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnmp Q Extended user text file falme txt C70EM HD description file md_descr txt Cj0EM manual Coemmanual pdf gi CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt CI0EM slideshow bnp pnq Oo Service planner task name file svc_tasks txt In the factory setting the R variable name files in the two default languages are prepared on the control but invisible to the machine manufacturer The machine manufacturer can load files of this type only after defining
312. xl sms pon sacs ior 6 ens a eta fee cr a e004 bee ear 78 ffoul 7115 koz 728 fou ya08 fe 7a1 se ane foul size o soos rox sar fob eee rrr lt 210 7 ar oH oiz7 oyl san7 Son sary Ube sere eee som feziiiom resiiom fferiitom iyesi i10 z x100 X102 X200 201 Pno DOUTO on Note The clamp mounting position marks on the back of all vertical MCP versions are the same The figure above takes the MCP version with a reserved slot for the handwheel for example Commissioning Manual 30 6FC5397 4EP10 0BA4 08 2015 3 2 Mounting the drive Death or severe personal injury from harsh installation environment A harsh installation environment will jeopardize personal safety and equipment Therefore Do not install the drive and the motor in an area subject to inflammables or combustibles water or corrosion hazards Do not install the drive and the motor in an area where it is likely to be exposed to constant vibrations or physical shocks Do not keep the drive exposed to strong electro magnetic interference Hot surface During operation and for a short time after switching off the drive the surfaces of the drive can reach a high temperature Avoid coming into direct contact with the drive surface Note For mounting conditions see Section Technical data servo drives 3 2 1 Mounting orientation and clearance Mount the drive vertically to the back plate of a shielded cabine

- Service, Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents